advertisement
SURPASS hiX 5750 R2.0
Operation Manual CLI
2
Operation Manual CLI
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity, or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMEN-
TATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS
OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR
THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2007-2008. All rights reserved.
f Important Notice on Product Safety
Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment.
Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage.
Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected has to comply with the applicable safety standards.
The same text in German:
Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Spannung. Einige Teile können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverletzungen und Sachschäden führen.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die
Anlagen installiert und wartet.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Angeschlossene
Geräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.
Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
Table of Contents
This document has 272 pages.
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
GPL/LGPL Warranty and Liability Exclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Command Modes Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Entering a Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DHCP Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
RMON Configuration Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Route-Map Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PPPoE Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Exiting a Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Listing Available Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using Privileged Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Port Indices and Slot Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configuring the Outband Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configuring the Inband Management Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Modifying the Password of Privileged Exec Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Configuring the Auto-Logout Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Limiting the Number of Management Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Checking the Management Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Id:0900d8058025f467 3
4
Operation Manual CLI
Software and Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Auto-Backup the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Downloading and Uploading of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Displaying the System Version and Startup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Checking the Running System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Checking the Operating Values of System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Displaying the Running Time of System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Displaying Running Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Checking the System Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Checking the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Displaying Hosts Accessing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting the Output Condition of Terminal Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring of System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring an Alarm Severity Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Displaying the Occured Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the GPON Alarm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuring the CPU Overload Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Changing the Admin State of Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Converting of IU_GPON Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards, Rack & Self . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
CXU Board and Line Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Checking Redundancy-States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Modifying ONU Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Getting List of Unknown ONTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Synchronizing the ONU Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Performing the ONU Selftest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Managing the Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Checking the Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
GEM Traffic Description Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Large Reach Ethernet (LRE) Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
E1/DS1 Port Configuration and Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
POTS Configuration and Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Id:0900d8058025f467 5
6
Operation Manual CLI
Configuring the Threshold Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuring of Payload-Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.11.1.4Assigning of Multicast/Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10.11.1.6Activating the Configuration with Payload-Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Checking the Payload-Counter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.11.2.1Getting and Resetting the Payload-Counter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Verifying the Running XDSL Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Assigning xDSL Profiles to Port (EFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
Checking the XDSL Configuration of LRE Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Verifying of the XDSL Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Checking the Media and RTP Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Configuring the TCP/UDP Port Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
VoIP Configuration Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Modifying the VoIP Configuration Data Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Checking the VoIP Configuration Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Voice CTP (Connection Termination Point) Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Modifying the Voice CTP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Checking the Voice CTP Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring of Call-Control PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Checking the Current and History PM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MGC Configuration Data Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MGC Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Checking the MGC Configuration and User Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
SIP User Dial Plan Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
SIP Performance Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Checking the User Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the GPON MAC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configuring of Priority Mapping Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configuring of CoS Mapping Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuring of Enhanced MAC Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
1: 1 VLAN Cross-Connect Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Id:0900d8058025f467 7
8
Operation Manual CLI
Disabling the Enhanced MAC Mode of VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Checking VLAN Mapping Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Modifying the MAC Mode of VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Showing MAC Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Common Bridge Base Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DSCP-to-Dot1p Mapping Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Assigning an IP Address to the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Displaying the IP Address of Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Assigning the VLAN to DHCP/PPPoE Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Checking the VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring the Dot1p Priority-to-Queue Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Configuring the Scheduling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Checking the QoS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configuring of the DHCP/PPPoE Telegram Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Changing into the DHCP/PPPoE Configuration Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Configuring the DHCP/PPPoE Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Verifying the Consistence of DHCP Provider Pool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
Enabling the DHCP Relay Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Registering the DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Checking the Configuration of DHCP Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
DHCP Option 82 / PPPoE Option 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Enabling the Option 82 / Option 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
VLAN Handling depending on Circuit ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Configuring the DHCP Packet Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configuring Subnet Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Verifying the DHCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Configuring of ARP Flooding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Showing Entries of DHCP/ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP/ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Multicast Package and Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Configuring of Queries Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Managing of ARP Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Enabling a BGP Routing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Announcing the Network to Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Managing BGP Peer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Extended Neighbor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Redistribute Routing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Determining the State of BGP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Id:0900d8058025f467 9
10
Operation Manual CLI
Redistributing of Routing Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Configuring the Administrative Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Extended RIP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Managing the Authentication Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Checking of Router and Protocol Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Basic Configuration of IS-IS Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Extended Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Configuring of Interface Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Redistribution of Reachability Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring the STP Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Activating STP/RSTP/MSTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Applying the STP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Configuring a Point-to-Point MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Changing the STP Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking the BPDU Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Sample of MSTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Global Enabling of IP Anti-Spoofing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Enabling IP Anti-Spoofing for Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring an IP Anti-Spoofing VLAN Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Forming a fixed Trunk Group of Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Checking Port Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
Configuring the Member Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Deciding Member State of LACP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configuring LACPDU Transmission Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Checking LACP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Setting of the Tagging Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configuring of Matches and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Displaying the Rules Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Mapping a Subscriber Port to IRL Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Checking the IRL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Configuring an SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Configuring the Security of SNMP Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Configuring the SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configuring an SNMP Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configuring the SNMP MIB View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Configuring the Access Policy for Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Configuring an SNMP Trap Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SNMP-V1/V2 Trap-Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Displaying the SNMP Trap Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Displaying and Resetting the SNMP Trap Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Checking the SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Configuring the Syslog Output Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Syslog Output Level without a Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Id:0900d8058025f467 11
Operation Manual CLI
Syslog Output Level with a Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Checking the Syslog Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Enabling/Disabling of Syslog Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Configures Number of RMON History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Assigning Source Port of statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Identifying Subject of RMON History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Configuring Number of Sample Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Configuring Interval of Sample Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12 Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
List of Figures
Overview of Configuration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Serial Console Cable - Wiring and Signal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CXU and 1-GE Redundancy (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
VoIP Configuration Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
User-defined Setting for CPU Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Id:0900d8058025f467 13
Operation Manual CLI
List of Tables
Command Notation of CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Main Commands of Privileged Exec Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Main Commands of Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Main Commands of Rule Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Main Commands of the DHCP Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Main Commands of the RMON Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Main Commands of the Bridge Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main Commands of the Interface Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main RIP Commands oft the Router Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Main Commands of the Route-Map Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Return Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Privileged Exec Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CLI Key Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Port Indices and Slot Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Clock Source Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ONT/MDU Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
T-CONT Bandwidth Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Information displayed by Show Port Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
RFI in VDSL Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G.993.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Bridge Port Shaping and Policing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
RSTP Path Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14 Id:0900d8058025f467
Operation Manual CLI
Change History
5. Update (12.12.2008)
System Access (3)
– Chapter updated
System Basic Configuration (4)
– Automatic S-APS upgrade added
– Invalid commands deleted
– Commands added/changed
Alarms (6)
– New show command added
OLT Equipment (7)
– New show commands added
ONU Equipment (9)
– Create ONU command changed, invalid command deleted
Performance Monitoring (10.10)
– Calculation algorithms of PM objects added
– Commands added, changed
Payload-Counters (10.11)
– Commands modified
Voice over IP (12)
– Section PM changed
– Commands added, changed
Bridges (14)
– Tagging rules and enhanced tagging profile added
Quality of Service (QoS) (17)
– Invalid commands deleted
DHCP and PPPoE (18)
– Command changed
IP Anti-Spoofing (23)
– New show command added
4. Update (13.10.2008)
3. Update (10.06.2008)
Change History
Id:0900d8058025f61f 15
Change History
2. Update (17.04.2008)
1. Update (31.01.2008)
Initial release (21.12.2007)
Operation Manual CLI
16 Id:0900d8058025f61f
Operation Manual CLI Introduction
1 Introduction
The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides a series of CLI (Command Line Interface) commands for
from local or remote place by a console terminal that is installed on PC or workstation. This user manual explains how to access the CLI and how to use it to configure the NE hiX 5750 R2.0. Related commands are grouped together and organized into chapters based on their most common usage. In many cases, usage examples and configuration instructions are given.
For a detailed system overview refer to the documents itemized in section 1.4 Related
. g
Depending on the software load used in the hiX 5750 R2.0, some features described in this document may not be supported. Refer to the current release notes of the hiX 5750 R2.0 to determine the provided features. If the information in the release notes differs from the information in this manual, follow the release notes.
1.1
Audience
This manual is intended for hiX 5750 R2.0 operators and maintenance personnel. It
configuration. In particular, users should be familiar with the following:
• Ethernet technology and standards
• Virtual local area networks (VLANs)
• Unicast IP routing concepts and protocols
• Internet IP protocols and concepts
•
• Basic knowledge about the personal computer and its applications.
!
1.2
Document Conventions
The following symbols are used in order to boost reader’s attention.
g
NOTE: This is the symbol for additional information that may be of special importance. Notes contain also helpful suggestions or references.
DANGER: This warning symbol means danger.
You are a situation that could causes bodily injury, equipment damage, or loss of data.
Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents by making quick guide based on this guide.
1.3
Typographical Conventions
Command Notation
This document uses the following conventions when presenting the syntax of a command.
Id:0900d8058020cb15 17
Introduction Operation Manual CLI
|
Notation
Bold style lowercase term
Italic style uppercase term
{ }
[ ]
< >
Description
Indicates keywords that must be typed exactly as shown in the command description. For better readability keywords are structured with hyphen ("-"),
Example: show system-version.
Indicates a user-supplied parameter that may be either required or optional.
For better readability parameters are structured with underscore ("_").
Examples: NAME, PROFILE, SEVERITY_TABLE_INDEX, ...
Braces indicate a group of required keywords or variables. One, and only one, item inside the braces must be entered. Nesting is also possible.
Example: {internal | external {1|2}} means internal or external 1 or external 2.
Square brackets indicate optional parameters. Choose none; or select one or more of the listed keywords or variables. Nesting is also possible.
Example: show bridgeport [ PORTS ]
Angle brackets indicate the valid range of numbers, endpoints inclusive.
Example: qos watermark <0-7> <0-100> <0-100>
A vertical bar indicates a choice of parameters, e.g. keywords placed within brackets are separated by vertical bars. Select one item from the list.
Example: bridgeport PORTS mode { ipoa I ipoe }
Table 1
Command Notation of CLI g
Do not enter brackets, braces, or vertical bars as part of the command.
1.4
Related Documents
In addition, other related documents are available, describing the AccessIntegrator
Element Manager EM PX R2.0 software and the hiX 5750 R2.0 system. These docu-
ments are described in Table 2 .
Title Part number
AccessIntegrator Element Manager EM PX
R2.0
A50010-X3-G200-*-76K5
SURPASS hiX 5750 R2.0
A50010-X3-G201-*-76K5
Topics covered
Installation of Element Manager EM PX R2.0 software and its supporting software components. (IMN)
Backup and restore of AccessIntegrator data, configuration of domain and permission. (ADMN)
Operation and configuration of hiX 5750 network element using the Element Manager EM PX R2.0. (OGL)
SURPASS hiX 5750 R2.0 functions and hardware descriptions. (SYD)
Instructions for the commissioning of a hiX 5750 R2.0
Installation and Test Manual (ITMN)
Commands for configuring the hiX 5750 R2.0 via console or telnet, Command Line Interface (CLI)
Table 2
Related Documentation
1.5
GPL/LGPL Warranty and Liability Exclusion
The product SURPASS hiX5750 contains both proprietary software and „Open Source
Software”. The Open Source Software is licensed to you at no charge under the GNU
General Public License (GPL) and the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL).
This Open Source Software was written by third parties and enjoys copyright protection.
You are entitled to use this Open Source Software under the conditions set out in the
18 Id:0900d8058020cb15
Operation Manual CLI Introduction
GPL and LGPL licenses indicated above. In the event of conflicts between Nokia
Siemens Networks license conditions and the GPL or LGPL license conditions, the GPL and LGPL conditions shall prevail with respect to the Open Source portions of the software.
The GPL can be found under the following URL: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html
The LGPL can be found under the following URL: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lgpl.html
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
The use of Open Source Software contained in this product in any manner other than the simple running of the program occurs at your own risk, that is, without any warranty claims against Nokia Siemens Network. For more information about the warranties provided by the authors of the Open Source Software contained in this product, please consult the GPL and LGPL.
You have no warranty claims against Nokia Siemens Networks when a defect in the product is or could have been caused by changes made by you in any part of the software or its configuration. In addition, you have no warranty claims against
Nokia Siemens Networks when the Open Source Software infringes the intellectual property rights of a third party.
Nokia Siemens Networks provides no technical support for either the software or the
Open Source Software contained therein if either has been changed.
Id:0900d8058020cb15 19
20
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
2 Using CLI
This chapter describes the CLI (command line interface) modes in which configuration commands of the hiX 5750 R2.0 must be executed and provides helpful tips for the effective usage of CLI.
2.1
Command Modes Overview
Serial interface
(Bits per second: 38400
Data bits: 8
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: none) Connect:
Login:
Password:
PuTTY
(telnet)
User EXEC mode
SWITCH>
enable or
en
Privileged EXEC mode
SWITCH#
configure terminal or
con t exit end
change to previous mode change to
EXEC mode
Bridge mode
SWITCH(bridge)#
ip dhcp provider NAME
(NAME: Provider name)
DHCP configuration mode
SWITCH(dhcp-provider)#
rmon-history <1 - 65535>
RMON configuration mode
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory[n])#
bridge or
br
ip pppoe provider NAME
(NAME: Provider name)
Configuration mode
SWITCH(config)#
PPPoE configuration mode
SWITCH(pppoe-provider)#
interface mgmt or
in mgmt
Interface configuration mode
SWITCH(config-if)#
rule NAME create
(NAME: Rule name)
Rule configuration mode
SWITCH(config-rule)#
router XXX
(XXX: bgp Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) isis IS-IS Protocol rip Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Router configuration mode
SWITCH(config-router)#
route-map NAME permit <1 - 65535>
(NAME: WORD Route map tag:
Sequence to insert to/delete from existing route-map entry)
Route-map configuration mode
SWITCH(config-route-map)#
Figure 1
Overview of Configuration Modes
Id:0900d8058024303c
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
2.2
Entering a Command Mode
2.2.1
User Exec Mode
When a user logs in successfully, the command mode is on User exec mode. This is a
read only mode provided to all users accessing to the
. The prompt is displayed as SWITCH> by default.
In User exec mode, it is possible to check the system configuration.
show running-config
Command Function
Shows running system information.
2.2.2
Privileged Exec Mode
In order to get the right to configure the system, enter to Privileged exec mode by using the enable command. After this, the command prompt changes from SWITCH> to
SWITCH#
.
Command enable
Mode Function
To enhance the security, it is possible to assign a password to the Privileged exec mode.
The commands of Privileged exec mode shown in the below table are used to display the changes of terminal configuration, network status, and system information.
clock
Command
Inputs time and date in system.
Function telnet terminal line traceroute where
Table 3
Connects to another device through telnet.
Configures the number of lines to be displayed in screen.
Traces transmission path of packet.
Finds users accessed to system through telnet.
Main Commands of Privileged Exec Mode
2.2.3
Configuration Mode
In order to enter into Configuration mode, execute the command configure terminal on
Privileged exec mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH# to
SWITCH(config)#
.
Command configure terminal
Mode Function
Configuration mode is used to configure functions for general system management and
. In addition, a user can enter into Bridge/Interface configuration mode from that level.
Id:0900d8058024303c 21
22
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
Table 4 shows a couple of important main commands of Configuration mode.
Command access-list arp bridge clear hostname exec-timeout interface passwd
Function
Configures policy to limit routing information on the standard of
.
table.
Enters into Bridge configuration mode.
Reset functions.
Changes hostname of system prompt.
Configures auto-logout function.
Enters into Interface configuration mode.
Changes the password.
restore factory-defaults route-map router snmp syslog time-zone
Table 4
Initiates the configuration of switch.
Enters into Config-route-map mode.
Enters into Router configuration mode.
Configures SNMP
Configures syslog
Configures time zone
Main Commands of Configuration Mode
2.2.4
Rule Configuration Mode
To enter into Rule configuration mode, the rule create command is used in Configura-
tion mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(config-rule[name])#
.
Command
rule NAME create
Mode Function
In Rule configuration mode, it is possible to configure the condition and operational method for the packets which rule function is applied to.
Table 5 shows a couple of important main commands of Rule configuration mode.
Command
apply
mac match no-match
port
prio
Table 5
Function
Configures rule and applies it to the GPON
.
Configures the packet condition by MAC address.
Configures operational condition which meets the packet condition.
Configures the operational condition for the packet which does not meet the packet condition.
Configures the packet condition with port number.
Configures the priority for rule.
Main Commands of Rule Configuration
Id:0900d8058024303c
Operation Manual CLI Using CLI
2.2.5
DHCP Configuration Mode
configuration mode, execute the ip dhcp provider command on
Configuration mode. The system prompt changed from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(dhcp-provider)#
.
Command
ip dhcp provider NAME
Mode Function
DHCP configuration mode is used to configure the DHCP relay agent, option82, and
PPPoE option 105.
Table 6 shows main commands of DHCP configuration mode.
Command ip server option82 option105
Table 6
Function
Configures DHCP relay.
Configures DHCP server address.
Configures DHCP option82.
Configures PPPoE option 105.
Main Commands of the DHCP Configuration Mode
2.2.6
RMON Configuration Mode
To enter into RMON-history mode, execute the rmon-history command on Configura-
tion Mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory[n])#
.
Command
rmon-history <1-65535>
Mode Function
Config Changes into RMON configuration mode.
Table 7 shows a couple of important main commands of RMON configuration mode.
Command active
owner
Table 7
Function
Activates the history.
Shows the subject, which configures each RMON and uses related information.
Main Commands of the RMON Configuration Mode
2.2.7
Bridge Configuration Mode
By executing the bridge command on Configuration mode, the system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to SWITCH(bridge)#.
Command bridge
Mode Function
Bridge configuration mode is used to manage
Id:0900d8058024303c 23
24
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
Table 8 shows a couple of main commands of Bridge configuration mode.
lacp mirror
Command
function.
Configures mirroring function.
Function vlan
Table 8
Configures VLAN function.
Main Commands of the Bridge Configuration Mode
2.2.8
Interface Configuration Mode
To change into Interface configuration mode, execute the interface command on Con-
figuration mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(config-if)#
.
Command
interface INTERFACE
Mode Function
mode.
Interface configuration mode is used to assign
addresses in Ethernet interface and to
activate or deactivate interfaces.
Table 9 shows a couple of main commands of Interface configuration mode.
Command description
ip
shutdown mtu
Table 9
Makes description of interface.
Function
Assigns IP address.
Deactivates interface.
Set mtu value to interface
Main Commands of the Interface Configuration Mode
2.2.9
Router Configuration Mode
To change into Router configuration mode, execute the router command on Configura-
tion mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(config-router)#
.
Command
router IP-PROTOCOL
Mode Function
According to the used routing protocol, the Router configuration mode is divided into
,
IS.
shows a couple of main commands.
Id:0900d8058024303c
Operation Manual CLI Using CLI
Command
distance
neighbor network redistribute
Table 10
Function
Configures distance value to find better route.
Configures neighbor router.
Configures network to operate each routing protocol.
Registers transmitted routing information to another router ’s table.
Main RIP Commands oft the Router Configuration Mode
2.2.10
Route-Map Configuration Mode
To change into Route-map configuration mode, execute the route-map command on
Configuration mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(config-route-map)#
.
Command
route-map NAME { permit I deny }
<1-65535>
Mode Function
On Route-map configuration mode routing filter can be configured.
shows a couple of important main commands.
Command match set
Table 11
Function
Transmits routing information to specified place.
Configures router address and distance.
Main Commands of the Route-Map Configuration Mode
2.2.11
PPPoE Configuration Mode
To change into
configuration mode, execute the ip pppoe provider command on Configuration mode. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(pppoe-provider)#
.
Command Mode Function
Id:0900d8058024303c 25
26
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
2.3
Exiting a Command Mode
The following commands to exit the current command mode are always available.
Command
exit
end
Table 12
Function
Closes current mode and returns to previous mode.
Closes current mode and returns to User EXEC mode.
Return Commands
2.4
Useful Tips
The following sections provide useful functions for user’s convenience while using CLI commands:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port Indices and Slot Assignments .
2.4.1
Listing Available Commands
Enter a question mark (?) on the particular command mode in order to display available commands used in this mode and the parameters following this commands.
Example for the Privileged exec mode:
SWITCH#
?
Exec commands: clear Reset functions clock Manually set the system clock configure Enter configuration mode copy Copy from one file to another debug Debugging functions (see also 'undebug') enable Turn on privileged mode command exit End current mode and down to previous mode help Description of the interactive help system no Negate a command or set its defaults ping Send echo messages show Show running system information telnet Open a telnet connection terminal Set terminal line parameters traceroute Trace route to destination where List active user connections write Write running configuration to memory, network, or terminal
SWITCH# g
The question mark (?) is not displayed and there is no need to press <ENTER> key in order to display the list.
Id:0900d8058024303c
Operation Manual CLI Using CLI
In case of installed command shell, commands can be found out starting with specific alphabet. Enter the first letter and a question mark without space. The following is an example of finding out the commands starting with s in Privileged exec mode.
SWITCH#
s?
show Show running system information
SWITCH# s
To view required and possible parameters of a command, enter the command and a question mark delimited by one space. The following is an example of viewing the variables of write command.
SWITCH#
write ?
file Write to the file
memory Write to NV memory
terminal Write to termina l
SWITCH# write
Use the show list command to find out a detailed list of available commands with its parameters in each mode (press the arrow key to display more information), see the following example:
SWITCH#
show list clear ip bgp * clear ip bgp * in clear ip bgp * in prefix-filter clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) in clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) in prefix-filter clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) out clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft in clear ip bgp * ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft out clear ip bgp * out clear ip bgp * soft clear ip bgp * soft in clear ip bgp * soft out clear ip bgp * vpnv4 unicast in clear ip bgp * vpnv4 unicast out clear ip bgp * vpnv4 unicast soft clear ip bgp * vpnv4 unicast soft in clear ip bgp * vpnv4 unicast soft out clear ip bgp <1-65535> clear ip bgp <1-65535> in clear ip bgp <1-65535> in prefix-filter clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) in clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) in prefixfilter clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) out clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft in clear ip bgp <1-65535> ipv4 (unicast|multicast) soft out clear ip bgp <1-65535> out clear ip bgp <1-65535> soft clear ip bgp <1-65535> soft in
Id:0900d8058024303c 27
28
Using CLI clear ip bgp <1-65535> soft out clear ip bgp <1-65535> vpnv4 unicast in clear ip bgp <1-65535> vpnv4 unicast out clear ip bgp <1-65535> vpnv4 unicast soft clear ip bgp <1-65535> vpnv4 unicast soft in
:
Press the
RETURN
- key to skip to the next list.
Operation Manual CLI
2.4.2
Calling Command History
By using command history, the last executed commands can be displayed. Press the arrow key <
↑ > repeated to display the commands in LIFO order one after another.
The following is an example of calling the command history after using the command sequence: show clock
→ configure terminal → interface 1 → exit.
SWITCH(config)#
exit
SWITCH#
show clock
Mon, 5 Jan 1970 23:50:12 GMT+0000
SWITCH# configure terminal
SWITCH(config)#
interface 1
SWITCH(config-if)#
exit
SWITCH(config)#
exit
SWITCH#
(press the arrow key
↑)
↓
SWITCH#
exit (arrow key
↑)
↓
SWITCH#
interface 1 (arrow key
↑)
↓
SWITCH#
configure terminal (arrow key
↑)
↓
SWITCH#
show clock (arrow key
↑)
2.4.3
Using Abbreviation
Almost commands can be used also with abbreviated form. The following table shows some examples of abbreviated commands.
Command clock exit list configure terminal
Abbreviation clo exi lis con t g
Press the tab
key after entering the first letters of the command to complete it, e.g. con
+ tab
key will be completed to configure.
2.4.4
Using Privileged Mode Command
By using the do command, Exec mode commands can also run in another as the Exec mode.
Id:0900d8058024303c
Operation Manual CLI Using CLI
Command do
Can be used in the following mode Function
Config/bridge/config-rmonhistory/config-rule/dhcp-provider/ pppoe-provider/config-if/config-touter/config-router-map
It is possible to use commands that are only valid in Exec mode, e.g. do write
Table 13
Privileged Exec Mode Command
An example for the write ? command.
SWITCH(config)#
do write ?
LINEexec command
SWITCH(config)# do write
2.4.5
Using Line Editing Keys
Some commonly used key combinations in order to simplify the line editing are listed in
.
Keys
Ctrl+B or left arrow key
Ctrl+F or right arrow key
Ctrl+A
Ctrl+E
Ctrl+I or tab key
Ctrl+D
Ctrl+H
Ctrl+K
Ctrl+W
Ctrl+U
Ctrl+N or down arrow key
Ctrl+P or up arrow key
Ctrl+C
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+Z
Table 14
Function
Moves cursor back one character.
Moves cursor forward one character.
Moves cursor to beginning of line.
Moves cursor to end of line.
Command completion.
Deletes character under cursor and shifts remainder of line to left.
Deletes character to left of cursor.
Deletes characters from under cursor to end of line.
Moving the CLI cursor
Editing command line
Deletes word to the left of cursor.
Deletes entire line.
Scrolls next command in command history buffer and places cursor at end of command.
Using command history
Scrolls previous command in command history buffer and places cursor at end of command.
Aborts command and moves to next line.
Clears screen and redisplays line.
Changes to Privileged Exec mode.
CLI Key Combinations
Id:0900d8058024303c 29
30
Using CLI Operation Manual CLI
2.5
Port Indices and Slot Assignments
116
117
118 hiX5750:A 101
102
103
104
105
110
111
112
113
106
107
108
109
114
115
116
117
System Shelf slot
(1)
hiX5750:E 101
(2)
102
103
104
105
106
107
112
113
114
115
108
109
110
111
IU
IU
IU
IU
CXU
CXU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
PM3
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
PM1
PM2
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
IU
CXU
CXU
IU
IU
IU
IU
Module type
(3)
IU
IU
1
2
Slot for IUs,
CXUs and PMs
(4)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
13
14
15
16
17
3
4
1
2
15
16
17
18
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
CLI SNMP
Slot number used in GPON
OLT for port entry
(5)
Slot number used in ACI
(6)
101
102
103
104
13
14
15
16 not supported
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
117
118
101
102
113
114
115
116
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 no supported
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
Table 15
Port Indices and Slot Assignment
Id:0900d8058024303c
Operation Manual CLI
Entry of the module and port number
The entries for
s are made as x/y with
according to
y: used port of the module
Example for hiX 5750:E:
Entry 1/1 means port 1 of the module pluggend-in on shelf slot 101.
Entry 9/1 means Ethernet port 1 of the CXU plugged-in on shelf port 109.
Using CLI
Id:0900d8058024303c 31
32
Operation Manual CLI System Access
3 System Access
3.1
Overview
The CLI of hiX 5750 R2.0 can be configured and managed via local terminal connection or a remote session using Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH). Both Telnet and SSH are
by default. The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports three methods to gain access to the NE for management and configuration tasks:
1. Local access to the NE through the RS232 console port on CXU’s front panel, see
3.2 Login for the First Time on page 32 .
2. Dedicated local Telnet/SSH connection to the NE by using the
CXU’s front panel (outband interface).
3. Remote access over the provider’s Ethernet/IP network by using Telnet/SSH.
Therefore, an inband management channel, i.e., a specific management VLAN has to be configured.
3.2
Login for the First Time
3.2.1
Proceeding
Perform the following tasks to login for the first time:
1. To access local management on hiX 5750 R2.0 connect a PC/workstation directly
to the RJ45 console port on CXU. Use a straight serial V.24 connecting cable that is
wired as shown in
.
There are two reasons that require the access to the hiX 5750 R2.0 over serial console port:
• At initial startup, the hiX 5750 R2.0 is configured with standard features and
’s IP address depends on operator’s network management concept, there is no IP assigned to the system for this purpose. Hence, if the system has booted successfully for the first time, the management channel for both inband and outband must be configured on this way in order to ensure that an IP connection can be established between an
• For any reason, a restore of NE factory defaults was initiated.
RJ45 Plug to Console Interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3 - TXD
Pin 4 - GND
Pin 5 - GND
Pin 6 - RXD
Pin 7
Pin 8
9-pin SUB-D Connector to Com Port
Pin 1
Pin 2 - RXD
Pin 3 - TXD
Pin 4
Pin 5 - GND
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
5
9
4
8
3
7
2 1
6
Figure 2
Serial Console Cable - Wiring and Signal Assignments
Id:0900d8058025feb5
Operation Manual CLI System Access
2. Run a VT terminal emulation software (e.g. HyperTerminal) with the attributes:
38400 8-N-1, no flow control.
3. When the NE is switched on, the CXU is starting up and the terminal program displays automatically the login prompt “SWITCH login:”.
4. Login as described in Chapter 3.3 System Login
.
5. Configure the outband, see Chapter 3.2.2 Configuring the Outband Interface
.
6. Configure the inband, see Chapter 3.2.3 Configuring the Inband Management
.
3.2.2
Configuring the Outband Interface
over LCT port on CXU, after login configure an outband interface as follows:
1. Configure the management interface and a default gateway. See the Chapters
, 15.2 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface
, and
for more information.
SWITCH> enable
SWITCH# configure terminal
SWITCH(config)# interface mgmt
SWITCH(config-if)#
ip address <ip address of the management interface
according to the project documentation>/<mask>
SWITCH(config-if)# no shutdown
SWITCH(config-if)# exit
SWITCH(config)# ip route default
<default gateway ip address
according to the project documentation>
2. Configure the trap destination to communicate with the NE using
-E EM
PX R2.0/
), see Chapter 28.7 Configuring an SNMP Trap Host
.
SWITCH(config)# snmp community ro public
SWITCH(config)# snmp community rw private
SWITCH(config)# snmp trap2-host
<ip destination address for the
trap-host> public
3. After return from the Configuration mode, the made settings must be stored in the persistent CXU memory.
SWITCH(config)# exi t
SWITCH# write memory g
Wait for OK message!
4. Connect the PC/workstation via LCT port. Local Telnet access as well as access using the EM PX R2.0 (LCT) should be possible.
3.2.3
Configuring the Inband Management Channel
To enable inband management communication the following tasks need to be performed:
Id:0900d8058025feb5 33
34
System Access Operation Manual CLI
1. Create a dedicated VLAN for inband management and assigned it to the CXU uplink
port, see Chapter 16.1 Configuring a VLAN
.
SWITCH> enable
SWITCH# configure terminal
SWITCH(config)# bridge
SWITCH(bridge)# vlan create
<vlan-id>
SWITCH(bridge)# vlan add
<vlan-id> <port> tagged
SWITCH(bridge)# exit
2. Configure the interface and the default route, see Chapters 16.2 Enabling a Host
15.2 Assigning an IP Address to the Interface , and
.
SWITCH(config)# host-vlan
<vlan-id>
SWITCH(config)# interface br
<vlan-id>
SWITCH(config-if)# ip address
<ip address of the management
interface according to the project documentation>/<mask>
SWITCH(config-if)# no shutdown
SWITCH(config-if)# exit
SWITCH(config)# ip route
<destination network>/<mask> <default
gateway according to the project documentation>
trap destination, see Chapter 3.2.2 Configuring the Outband
.
4. The configuration must be stored in the persistent CXU memory, see Chapter
3.2.2 Configuring the Outband Interface
.
3.3
System Login
Access the hiX 5750 R2.0 as follows:
1. After starting the terminal session, the login prompt is displayed:
SWITCH login:
2. Enter the login
root (default) and the password siemens7 (default) to move into the User exec mode:
SWITCH login:root
Password:
(entered characters are hidden)
SWITCH>
3. From the User exec mode, the configuration of the hiX 5750 R2.0 can be only verified. To configure and manage the system, enter into the Privileged exec mode:
SWITCH>enable
SWITCH#
3.4
Telnet Access
g
Before a remote user can access the CLI via Telnet connection, the management
IP interface (mgnt) must be configured (see 15 Interface Configuration
).
Up to eight client systems can be connected at the same time. Use the following
command to establish a Telnet connection between
and remote place.
Command
telnet DESTINATION [ tcp-port ]
Function
Connects to the system with specified IP address.
DESTINATION: IP address.
Id:0900d8058025feb5
Operation Manual CLI System Access g
After applying a command in order to save the configuration over Telnet connection, wait for the [OK] message. When the Telnet session is disconnected before, all new settings will be deleted.
3.5
Modifying the Password of Privileged Exec Mode
Use the following commands to configure a password that enhances the security of the
Privileged exec mode.
Command
passwd enable [ 8 ] LINE
no passwd enable
Mode Function
Config Modifies enabled password parameters,
8: specifies a HIDDEN password will follow
LINE: HIDDEN 'enable' password string.
Clears the password.
When it is not encrypted, the set password could be displayed with the show running
config command. To avoid this, use the following command.
Command service password-encryption no service password-encryption
Mode
Config Encrypts system passwords.
Function
Disables password encryption.
Example of configuring the password as angpon:
SWITCH#configure terminal
SWITCH(config)#passwd enable angpon
SWITCH(config)#
Example of accessing:
SWITCH login:root
Password:
SWITCH>enable
Password:
SWITCH#
3.6
Configuring the Auto-Logout Function
For security reasons, the user is automatically logged out when there is no command prompted within the configured inactivity time.
Use the following command to enable the auto-logout function and to configure the inactivity timer.
Command
exec-timeout <0-35791> [ < 0-59 > ]
Mode
Config
Function
If no command is entered within the configured inactivity time, the user is automatically logged out of the system.
0 - 35791: time unit in minutes (by default 10 minutes)
0: releases auto-logout function
0 - 59: time unit in seconds.
Id:0900d8058025feb5 35
36
System Access Operation Manual CLI
show exec-timeout
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows configured inactivity timer.
Example:
Example of configuring an auto-logout timeout of 50 seconds and displaying the configuration:
SWITCH(config)#exec-timeout 0 50
SWITCH(config)#show exec-timeout
Log-out time : 50 seconds
SWITCH(config)#
3.7
Configuring of Users
The administrator can configure up to 8 user accounts. Once a user account is configured, the user can login to the system using the user name/password combination.
Adding a User
An added user with “read only” right can only check for system information but cannot configure the system.
Command
user add NAME DESCRIPTION
Mode
Config
Function
Adds a user with read only right.
NAME: user name
DESCRIPTION: description of the user, e.g. admin
Example of adding the user “GPON” (The password is set to siemens7 by default):
SWITCH(config)#user add
GPON admin
Changing password for GPON
Enter the new password (minimum of 5, maximum of 8 characters).
Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers.
Enter new password:
Re-enter new password:
Password changed successfully
SWITCH(config)# g
The entered password is not displayed, so be careful to make no mistake.
Example: User “GPON” logs in.
SWITCH login:GPON
Password:
siemens7
SWITCH>
Id:0900d8058025feb5
Operation Manual CLI System Access
Enter a question mark (?) in order to display the executable user commands.
SWITCH>?
Exec commands:
@debug Debug command clear debug enable
Reset functions
Debugging functions (see also 'undebug')
Turn on privileged mode command exit help no
End current mode and down to previous mode
Description of the interactive help system
Negate a command or set its defaults show Show running system information terminal Set terminal line parameters
SWITCH>
Configuring a User Password
To configure a password for the created user account, use the following command.
passwd NAME
user del NAME
Command Mode Function
Config Configures the user’s password.
NAME: user name.
Example:
SWITCH(config)#
passwd GPON
Changing password for GPON
Enter the new password (minimum of 5, maximum of 8 characters)
Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers.
Enter new password:
Re-enter new password
:
Password changed.
SWITCH(config)#
Deleting a User
After adding the user, it is impossible to change user’s information such as ID, password, and description. Thus, if there is a need to change one of this parameters, delete the user and add it again with new properties.
Function Command Mode
Config Deletes a user.
NAME: user name.
Example of deleting the user “GPON”:
SWITCH(config)#user del GPON
SWITCH(config)#
3.8
Limiting the Number of Management Sessions
To designate the number of open management sessions, enter the following command.
Id:0900d8058025feb5 37
38
System Access Operation Manual CLI g
The counter will be incremented by Telnet sessions as well as a serial connection over console port.
login connect COUNT
Command Mode
Config
Function
Limits the number of sessions accessing to the NE.
COUNT: number of sessions (1 to 8 = default).
3.9
Checking the Management Sessions
Use the following command to get information about management sessions accessing the NE.
Command show management-session
Mode
Config
Function
Shows information about the management sessions.
Example:
SWITCH(config)#show management-session
SNMP Session Aging Time: 300
Management Session Information
-------------------------------------------
IP Address | Type | Expired Time
-------------------------------------------
10.150.229.85
Telnet 0
-------------------------------------------
SWITCH(config)#
where
3.10
Checking Telnet Users
Use the where command to examine the users connected over console port or from remote place through Telnet.
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows users connected through Telnet.
Example of displaying users connected through Telnet:
SWITCH#where root at from console for 4 days 22 hours 15 minutes 24.88 secondsroot at ttyp0 from 10.0.1.4:1670 for 4 days 17 hours 53 minutes 28.76 secondsroot at ttyp1 from 147.54.140.133:49538 for 6 minutes
34.12 seconds
Id:0900d8058025feb5
Operation Manual CLI
4 System Basic Configuration
System Basic Configuration
show flash
4.1
Software and Configuration Management
For information about commands that are needed to operate the system software, see the following sections:
•
•
•
Downloading and Uploading of Software
•
•
Restoring default Configuration
•
Displaying the System Version and Startup Information
•
Checking the Running System Configuration
.
The following sections describe the commands in order to check the utilization of system resources and the status of system values:
•
Displaying the Running Time of System
•
•
Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory
•
•
.
4.1.1
Saving the Configuration
After download a new system image to the hiX 5750 R2.0 system from
changing the configuration, the operator has to save the files into the flash memory. Otherwise, the configuration data will be lost in case of rebooting.
Command Mode Function
exec
Privileged/
Config
Displays flash info.
Examples:
SWITCH#write memory
[OK]
SWITCH# g
Wait for [OK] message after starting this function without pressing any key.
Id:0900d8058023f449 39
40
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH# show flash
Flash Information(Bytes)
Area total used free loadname
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Load 1 32112640 12976156 19136484 gpon-r2.0.5-cxu_f-o.010
Load 2 32112640 14856192 17256448 gpon-r2.0.5-cxu_f-o.003
CONFIG 1310720 663552 647168
CONFIG 1441792 675840 765952
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
SWITCH#
Besides the write command, the system configuration can be also stored into flash memory through copying the configuration file with a particular file name. The configuration file stored in flash can be transferred to a remote FTP server as well.
In order to copy or erase a system configuration file, use the following commands.
Command Mode
copy running-config { FILENAME | startup-config } Privileged/
Config
copy startup-config FILENAME
copy FILENAME startup-config
copy FILENAME1 FILENAME2
erase FILENAME
Privileged/
Config
Config
Description
Copies a running configuration file.
FILENAME: configuration file name
startup-config: startup configuration file.
Copies a startup configuration file.
Copies a specified configuration file to the startup configuration file.
Copies a specified configuration file to another configuration file.
Deletes a specified configuration file.
show config-list
Command
Use the following command to display system configuration file.
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Description
Displays a list of saved configuration files.
4.1.2
Auto-Backup the Configuration
Auto-backup ensures that made configuration changes are valid after system reboot also if they were not stored explicitly by operator command. This function allows to store configuration data automatically to the CXU’s background memory or/and to remote
server. The waiting time before storing the data after last change of configuration can be specified.
Id:0900d8058023f449
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
Configuring Local Auto-Backup
Command
auto-backup local [ enable | disable ]
auto-backup local waiting-time [ 1-59 ]
Mode Function
Config Configures automatic save of the configuration data in persistent memory.
enable: local save enabled
disable: local save disabled.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function.
Configures auto-backup waiting time for local backup,
1 - 59: waiting time in minutes after the last configuration action before the configuration data are saved in persistent memory.
Configuring the Auto-Backup to an FTP Server
Use the following commands in order to inform the NE about the FTP server that is used for auto-backups. If this is the default FTP server, the optional parameters may drop.
Command
auto-backup ftp [ enable | disable ]
auto-backup ftp file-count [ 1-32 ]
auto-backup ftp ip [ A.B.C.D ]
auto-backup ftp path [ PATH ]
auto-backup ftp account [ USER PASSWORD ]
auto-backup ftp interval [ 1-48> ]
auto-backup ftp start-time [ 0-1439 ]
Mode
Config
Function
Configures automatic save of the configuration data on an FTP server.
enable: FTP save enabled
disable: FTP save disabled.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function.
Configures the number of files on FTP-server,
1 - 32: number of files on FTP-server.
Configures the IP address of the FTP-server.
A.B.C.D: IP address of the FTP-server.
Configures the path on FTP-server where to save the backup.
PATH: path on FTP-server.
Configures the account to access the FTP-server,
USER: user name of the FTP-account
PASSWORD: password of the FTP-account.
Configures the time between two backups,
1 - 48: time [hours].
Configures the time of day when the first backup is written,
0 - 1439: time of day [minutes].
g
Configuration data will be stored on FTP server only if the data in the persistent memory has been changed before.
Initiating an Auto-Backup auto-backup now
Command Mode
Config
Function
Forces an auto-backup immediately.
Verifying the Auto-Backup Configuration
Command
show auto-backup ftp file-table
show auto-backup
Mode
Config
Function
Shows informantion about backup files located on FTP-server.
Shows informantion about auto-backup configuration.
Id:0900d8058023f449 41
42
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
Example
Auto-backup that stores configuration data of the NE “GPON_1" local as well as remote on FTP server:
1. Configuration of local auto-backup
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup local enable
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup waiting-time 24
2. Configuration of remote auto-backup
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp ip 10.2.30.19
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp path GPON/loads/gpon_1
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp account ftpuser ftpuser1
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup now
Jun 13 11:51:43 system: ERROR: swal_vlan_get_pvid port 2 data not found
Jun 13 11:51:43 system: ERROR: swal_vlan_get_pvid port 3 data not found
Jun 13 11:51:43 system: ERROR: swal_vlan_get_pvid port 4 data not found
Jun 13 11:51:43 system: ERROR: swal_vlan_get_pvid port 5 data not found
Jun 13 11:51:43 savecfg: write backup (-w)
Jun 13 11:51:45 savecfg: done
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp interval 24
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp start-time 800
GPON_1(config)# show auto-backup
--- current time ---------------------------------------------current time: Fri Jun 13 11:52:49 2008
--- local backup ---------------------------------------------automatic write of local backup: enabled local backup up to data: no last backup: Fri Jun 13 11:51:45 2008 automatic write after: 24 minutes
--- remote backup --------------------------------------------save of backup on FTP-server: enabled backup on FTP-server up to data: no last backup: Fri Jun 13 11:51:46 2008 last FTP access result: success backup period: 24 hours start time: 13:20:00 number of files on FTP-server: 5
FTP-server IP-address: 10.2.30.19
path on FTP-server: GPON/loads/gpon_1
FTP-account username: ftpuser1
FTP-account password: ******** next backup: Fri Jun 13 13:20:00 2008
Id:0900d8058023f449
Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration
3. Refresh file-table
GPON_1(config)# auto-backup ftp refresh-file-table
GPON_1(config)# show auto-backup ftp file-table
Index | File Name | Timestamp
-------+-----------------------------+-------------------------
1 | gpon_080006263ce5.dat | Fri Jun 13 11:40:00 2008
GPON_1(config)#
4.1.3
Auto-Upgrading the S-APS
For an automatic S-APS upgrade, the S-APS configuration file is needed on FTP server.
This file contains the software load information on all units possible to plug in and also those ONT types that may be connected to the hiX 5750 R2.0. If automatic S-APS handling is enabled, most of the commands for manual software up- and download are blocked. Exceptions are commands like "upload cxu errorlog", "upload cxu/iu inventory".
In order to download SAPS, use one of the following commands.
Command
download sapshandling create sapsserverinfo
ADDRESS USER PASSWORD SAPSFILE
download sapshandling { enable I disable I restart-reset I restart-noreset I reload }
Mode
Config
Config
Function
Configures S-APS config data for upgrade.
ADDRESS: S-APS FTP server IP address
USER: S-APS FTP server user name
PASSWORD: S-APS FTP server password
SAPSFILE: S-APS file on SAPS server with complete file path, e.g.
/SAPS/hiX5750R20.55/hix5750r20.55.012.
Configures S-APS handling, S-APS use of S-APS data from now on.
enable: S-APS configuration file will be read from FTP server. If it is not possible, S-APS handling will remain in ON condition but the operstate changes to disable.
disable: S-APS handling disabled, manual up-/download possible
restart-reset: S-APS handling restart (if S-APS enabled). All plugged units will be checked again against S-APS configuration file content and if needed an upgrade with load activation; automatic unit reset will be done.
restart-noreset: S-APS handling restart without board. All plugged units will be checked again against S-APS configuration file content and if needed an upgrade will be done. NO automatic load activation is performed.
reload: S-APS configuration file will be reload, if S-APS is disabled.
Example:
SWITCH(config)# download sapshandling create sapsserverinfo 172.18.104.252 usera asdf
/SAPS/hiX5750R20.55/hix5750r20.55.012
timeout (20 seconds) active command complete
SWITCH(config)# download sapshandling enable start upgrade script: PID(4731) now command complete
SWITCH(config)# download sapshandling restart-reset saps handling restarted with resettimeout (7200 seconds) activestart upgrade script: PID(4867) now..
Id:0900d8058023f449 43
44
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
4.1.4
Downloading and Uploading of Software
In order to guarantee a fail-safe upgrade process, the OLT stores two software images.
One image is the active and committed load that is currently running. This load is always available and it will be used after a reset. The second image is inactive. It will be overwritten during a software download.
Depending on the number of equipped CXU boards, there are two operation cases:
1. If there is only one CXU in the system, the new load will be automatically activated and committed if the download process was successful and the load is valid. After reboot by operator command, the committed load is running and will be used also for later reboots by reset or cold starts. When something goes wrong (e.g. board crash), the CXU will disable the wrong load and will reboot automatically with the former good load.
2. In an OLT with two CXUs that provides redundancy measures, one CXU is in active mode and the other one is in standby mode. In this case, the download process replaces at first the active load of the standby CXU. g
During the load download process, the standby CXU performs automatically two resets.
After the download process has been finished (load and configuration), the following tasks must be performed in order to update both CXU boards with the same load:
– Check with show table shelf command the software consistence on both CXU boards. The new load on both boards must be identical (stored/backup).
–
Reset the standby CXU to pre-activate the new software, see 8.2 Resetting a
– Check the consistence of the software loads on this board (identical running/stored/backup loads).
– Reset the active CXU to initiate a switch-over that makes the standby CXU to the active one, causes the upgrade of the other CXU (by now in standby mode) and activates the new software on it.
– Check the consistence of both boards software loads. (identical running/stored/backup loads). g
To backup or restore the configuration data, use the FTP upload and download commands that are described in the following sections. g
See 9.11 Managing the Software Load
for information about how to manage the software load of an ONU.
!
FTP Download Process
Use the following commands to download the software load and configuration data from
.
The load file name used in the following commands must have an extension that is composed of up to maximal 5 characters (e.g. "gpon-r205-cxu_f-o.004" or "gpon-r205cxu_f-o.004_1"). File names without extension could damage the internal upgrade system.
Id:0900d8058023f449
Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration
Command
download cxu { load I config } ADDRESS FILE
download iu load ADDRESS FILE
download iu load alloftype ADDRESS FILE
download remote load ADDRESS FTP_SERVER FILE
[ ignore-operstate ]
download remote load help download remote load stop_request
Mode
Config
Function
Upgrades
image or board configuration.
load: software load
config: configuration data
ADDRESS: server ID address or hostname
FILE: source file name according to the selected command
(load file or configuration file).
Upgrades IU image or configuration.
ADDRESS: server ID address or host name
FILE: source file name (load file).
Upgrades IU image for all plug-in units of the same type.
ADDRESS: server IP address or host name
FILE: source file name (load file).
Upgrades software load of remote system,
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID[/ONU-card]]].
FTP_SERVER: IP address of FTP server.
FILE: source file name.
ignore-operstate: force download to disabled cards.
Help shows the relations between address and download type.
Stops current download job of upgrade software load remote system,
FTP Upload Process
Use the following commands to upload data to FTP server.
g
The file extension “.tgz” will be added by the system if the upload cxu config command is executed.
Command
upload cxu { config | errlog | inventory | alarmlog | uptimelog }
ADDRESS FILE
Mode
Config
upload iu { errlog I inventory } ADDRESS FILE
upload iu inventory alloftype ADDRESS FILE
Config
Config
Function
Uploads specified CXU data.
config: configuration data
errlog: error log
inventory: inventory data
alarmlog: alarm log data
uptimelog: board uptime log data
ADDRESS: FTP server ID address or hostname
FILE: destination file name acc. to the selected command.
Uploads IU data for slot number 1..x).
errlog: error log
inventory: use inventory data
ADDRESS: server ID address or host name
FILE: destination file name acc. to the selected command
Uploads IU inventory data for all IUs of same type.
ADDRESS: server ID address or host name
FILE: destination file name (inventory file).
Example:
SWITCH(config)#upload cxu config 192.168.156.16 alf/config
SWITCH(config)#FTP User Name:onus
SWITCH(config)#FTP Password :
SWITCH(config)#upload cxu config file alf/config.tar to server
192.168.156.16 complete
Id:0900d8058023f449 45
46
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
Timer Parameter
Command
upgrade set-timeout { cxu | stb-cxu | iu | remote | config | errorlog | pm-data | label-data | snmp } ftp-timeout <25-65535> upgrade-timeout <25-65535>
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Sets upgrade option timeout value,
cpu: set upgrade CXU timeout
stb-cxu: set upgrade standby CXU timeout
iu: set upgrade IU timeout
remote: set upgrade ONT timeout
config: set upgrade config timeout
errorlog: set upgrade error log timeout
pm-data: set upgrade performance data timeout
label-data: set upgrade label data timeout
snmp: set upgrade SNMP timeout,
ftp-timeout: set FTP timeout
25 - 65535: set FTP timeout value in sec.
upgrade-timeout: set upgrade timeout
25 - 65535: set upgrade timeout value in sec.
Checking the Upgrade Process
Use the following commands to verify such data that are relevant for upgrade process.
show upgrade show upgrade table
Command
show upgrade table SLOT
show upgrade table mnemocode show upgrade table sapsjobs show upgrade sapsserverinfo show upgrade timeout-values
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays upgrade information.
Displays upgrade information (table of slot, remote index
number) or whole system).
Displays upgrade information for specified slot number.
Displays slot based mnemocodes of whole system.
Displays the S-APS upgrade jobs of whole system.
Displays S-APS server data known by upgrade.
Displays upgrade information: timeout value.
Examples:
SWITCH(config)# show upgrade sapsserverinfo
S-APS server data known by upgrade:
S-APS handling : disabled
S-APS server address: 10.0.1.16
S-APS user name : sff00009
S-APS password : *****
S-APS path name : SAPS/hiX5750R205/
S-APS file name : 002
SWITCH(config)#
Id:0900d8058023f449
Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration
SWITCH(config)# show upgrade table file information table for whole system: (equipped slots)
,=========,====================,================================================,=========,==========,
| Slot | type of file | file | version | size |
|=========|====================|================================================|=========|==========|
| 09
| 09
| 09
| 09
| stored load | gpon-r2.0.5-cxu_f-o.010
| error log | error.tgz
| configuration | configuration.tgz
| label data | inventory.bin
| 010 | 12976156 |
| none | 23499 |
| none | 5952 |
| none | 256 |
|---------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|---------|----------|
| 13 | stored load | gpon-r2.0.5-iu_gpon-o.006
| 006 | 0 |
| 13 | error log | error.log
| none | 16962 |
|---------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|---------|----------|
| 17 | stored load | not available; mnemo(M:PM3:A) | unknown | 0 |
|---------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|---------|----------|
`=end====='===================='================================================'========='=========='
SWITCH(config)#
reset all
4.1.5
Restarting the System
Execute the reset command in Config mode to reboot the system manually after downloading a new system image from the TFTP/
server or when a reboot is needed
during installing or managing the system.
g
Execute the write memory command (see 4.1.1 Saving the Configuration
) to save a new configuration before rebooting the system. Otherwise, all changes will be lost.
Command Mode
Config Resets the system.
g
For information about restarting single cards see also:
•
•
.
Function
4.1.6
Restoring default Configuration
g
After reloading the configuration by executing the restore factory-defaults
command, all previous configuration data are lost. The
access is only possible via console. The system must be rebooted manually.
Restore factory-defaults
Command Mode Function
Config Restores factory default configuration.
Example:
SWITCH(config)#restore factory-defaults
SWITCH(config)#reset all
SWITCH(config)#
Id:0900d8058023f449 47
48
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
4.1.7
Displaying the System Version and Startup Information
Use one of the following commands to display system startup information and
version.
Command show system-version show system-feature-list show startup-type show startup-result show startup-config
Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Displays system information.
Displays the feature list of the system.
Displays the type of the last startup.
Displays the result of the last startup.
Privileged Show a current startup configuration.
Command show running-config show running-config arp show running-config bridging show running-config dhcp show running-config dns show running-config full show running-config hostname show running-config igmp
show running-config interface IFNAME
show running-config l3 show running-config lacp show running-config login show running-config mac show running-config maxhosts show running-config port show running-config qos show running-config rmon show running-config router bgp show running-config router isis show running-config router rip show running-config rule show running-config snmp show running-config stp show running-config switch show running-config syslog show running-config time-out show running-config time-zone
4.1.8
Checking the Running System Configuration
Mode Function
Privileged/Config Shows current system information
Privileged/Config Shows current
Privileged/Config Shows current bridging information
Config Shows current
information
Privileged/Config Shows current
Config Shows current full information
Privileged/Config Shows current hostname information
Config
Config
Shows current
information
Shows current interface information
IFNAME: name of logical interface.
Config Shows current fixed IP information
Privileged/Config Shows current
information
Privileged/Config Shows current login information
Privileged/Config Shows current
Config Shows current maxhosts information
Privileged/Config Shows current port information
Privileged/Config Shows current
information
Privileged/Config Shows current
information
Config
Config
Shows current
router information
Shows current
-IS router information
Config Shows current
router information
Privileged/Config Shows current Rule information
Privileged/Config Shows current
information
Privileged/Config Shows current
information
Privileged/Config Shows current switch information
Privileged/Config Shows current system log information
Privileged/Config Shows current time out information
Privileged/Config Shows current time zone information
Id:0900d8058023f449
Operation Manual CLI
Command show running-config trunk
show running-config xdsl alarm-profile
show running-config xdsl all-profiles show running-config xdsl chan-profile show running-config xdsl line-profile show running-config xdsl notch-profile show running-config xdsl psd-profile show running-config xdsl vcc
System Basic Configuration
Mode Function
Privileged/Config Shows current trunk information
Privileged/Config Shows current x
Privileged/Config Shows all current xDSL profiles
Privileged/Config Shows current xDSL channel profile
Privileged/Config Shows current xDSL line profile
Privileged/Config Shows current xDSL notch profile
Privileged/Config Shows current xDSL
profile
Privileged/Config
information
4.2
Checking the Operating Values of System
4.2.1
Displaying the Running Time of System
show uptime
Command Mode Function
Privileged/Config Displays running time of system after booting.
Example:
SWITCH#show uptime
10:41am up 15 days, 10:55, 0 users, load average: 0.05, 0.07, 0.01
SWITCH#
show cpuload
4.2.2
Checking the CPU Load
Use this command to display the CPU utilization.
Command Mode
Config
Function
Displays the average of CPU utilization in specific time intervals.
Example:
SWITCH(config)#show cpuload
----------------
Average CPU load
----------------
5 sec: 7.73( 0.00) %
1 min: 4.22( 0.00) %
10 min: 4.15( 0.00) % cpuload threshold : 50 timer interval : 60 seconds
SWITCH(config)#
Id:0900d8058023f449 49
50
System Basic Configuration
4.2.3
Displaying Consumption Ratio of System Memory
Operation Manual CLI
Command show memory
show memory { bgp | isis | dhcp | imi | igmp | lib | nsm | ospf | rip }
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays memory information.
Displays memory information of
bgp:
imi: integrated management interface
-IS router
lib: libraries
nsm: network services module
router.
4.2.4
Displaying the Fan Status
Command Function
Config
Mode
4.2.5
Displaying Running Processes
The following show command displays information about the running processes on hiX
5750 R2.0 that may be very helpful to manage the NE.
show process
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Description
Shows information of the running processes.
Example:
SWITCH(config)# show process
USER PID %CPU %MEM VSZ RSS TTY STAT START TIME COMMAND root 1 0.0 0.1 1448 596 ? S Oct07 0:01 init [3] root 2 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW Oct07 0:00 [keventd] root 3 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SWN Oct07 0:00 [ksoftirqd_CPU0] root 4 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW Oct07 0:00 [kswapd] root 5 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW Oct07 0:00 [bdflush] root 6 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW Oct07 0:00 [kupdated] root 7 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW Oct07 0:00 [mtdblockd] root 63 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SWN Oct07 0:00 [jffs2_gcd_mtd2] root 70 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SWN Oct07 0:00 [jffs2_gcd_mtd4] root 143 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW< Oct07 0:00 [bcmDPC] root 147 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW< Oct07 0:00 [bcmCNTR.0] root 148 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW< Oct07 0:00 [bcmTX] root 149 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? SW< Oct07 0:00 [bcmLINK.0] root 150 0.9 0.0 0 0 ? SW< Oct07 80:54 [bcmCNTR.1]
...
SWITCH(config)#
4.3
Checking the System Access
To prevent trouble or if there is any problem with the system access, the operator cannot get only information about the access status of system, but he can also check if the
Id:0900d8058023f449
Operation Manual CLI System Basic Configuration network configuration is correct to reach the system. This chapter describes the required
commands in following sections:
•
Checking the Network Connection
•
•
•
Displaying Hosts Accessing the System
.
4.3.1
Checking the Network Connection
The ping command can be executed to verify if the system is correctly connected to the
(Internet control message protocol) echo messages to notify a fault situation and to provide information about the location where the IP packets were received from.
ping [ IP_ADDRESS ]
Command Mode Function
Privileged Performs ping test to check network status.
IP_ADDRESS: destination address. g
Press
Ctrl
+
C
keys to stop the ping process.
4.3.2
Tracing Packet Routes
To identify the route used for host-to-host connectivity across the network, execute the
traceroute command. If the waiting time to response has expired, an asterisk (*) will be printed on the screen.
Command
traceroute [ ip I WORD ]
Mode Function
Privileged Traces packet routes through the network.
ip: destination IP address
WORD: hostname.
Example: Tracing packet route sent to 10.2.2.20
SWITCH#traceroute 10.2.2.20 traceroute to 10.2.2.20 (10.2.2.20), 30 hops max, 38 byte packets
1 10.2.2.20 (10.2.2.20) 0.598 ms 0.418 ms 0.301 ms
SWITCH#
4.3.3
Checking Telnet-User
where
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Checks accessed Telnet user from remote place.
Example:
SWITCH#where root at ttyp0 from 10.150.229.85:34260 via telnet for 12 minutes 8.38 seconds
SWITCH#
Id:0900d8058023f449 51
52
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
4.3.4
Displaying Hosts Accessing the System
The following commands show brief information about the number of hosts accessing the system.
Command show tmn-connect show lct-connect show cli-connect
Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
(e.g. EM ACI-E) is connected to the network element (NE) or not.
is connected to the NE or not.
Shows whether and how many
consoles are connected to the NEor not.
4.4
Operation Environment
4.4.1
Setting the Output Condition of Terminal Screen
By default setting, the hiX 5750 R2.0 is configured to display 24 lines each with 80 characters on console screen. With the length command, the number of displayed lines can be changed.
Command
terminal length <0~512>
terminal no length
Mode Function
Privileged Configures the number of displayed lines on terminal screen.
0 - 512: line value.
Disables the configuration for the number of displayed lines.
Example: Sets the number of displayed lines on terminal screen as 20 lines.
SWITCH#terminal length 20
SWITCH#
banner banner login banner login-fail
4.4.2
Configuring a Login Banner
Command Mode
Config
Function
Register message before login the system.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner.
Register message when successfully log in the system.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner.
Register message when failing to login the system.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the banner.
show banner
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Displays login banner.
Function
Example:
Id:0900d8058023f449
System Basic Configuration Operation Manual CLI
1. Execute the banner login command
2. Write the message (e.g. do not change the configuration) and then press Ctrl+D key two times.
3. The banner will be displayed after user’s log-in.
Id:0900d8058023f449 53
54
Operation Manual CLI System Properties
5 System Properties
This chapter describes the following configuration steps:
•
•
Configuring of System Date and Time
•
•
5.1
Setting the Host Name
The host name displayed on prompt is necessary to distinguish each hiX 5750 R2.0 system that is connected to the network.
hostname NAME
Command
no hostname [ NAME ]
Mode
Config
Function
Creates host name of the system.
NAME: enter the name.
Host name distinguishes upper case and lower case!
Deletes all configured host names or the specified host name.
g
The default host name is SWITCH.
Example: Changing the host name to “AN_GPON”.
SWITCH(config)#hostname AN_GPON
AN_GPON(config)#
5.2
Configuring of System Date and Time
clock .DATETIME
show clock
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Configures the system time and date.
Displays the system date and time.
Available formats of “.DATETIME” are (examples):
10:20 Jul 04 2007 or 04 Jul 2007 10:20 pm or 04 Jul 2007 10:20.
AN_GPON#clock
20070604 10:20
AN_GPON#show clock
Mon, 4 Jul 2007 10:20:37 +0000
AN_GPON#
5.3
Configuring the Time Zone
Time
Zone
GMT-12
GMT-11
GMT-10
Country/City
Eniwetok
Samoa
Hawaii, Honolulu
Table 16
Time
Zone
GMT-3
GMT-2
GMT-1
Country/City
Rio De Janeiro
Maryland
Azores
World Time Zones
Time
Zone
GMT+6
GMT+7
GMT+8
Country/City
Rangoon
Singapore
Hong Kong
Id:0900d80580201aa1
System Properties Operation Manual CLI
Time
Zone
GMT-9
GMT-8
GMT-7
GMT-6
GMT-5
GMT-4
Country/City
Alaska
LA, Seattle
Denver
Chicago, Dallas
New York, Miami
George Town
Table 16
Time
Zone
GMT+0
GMT+1
GMT+2
GMT+3
GMT+4
GMT+5
Country/City
London, Lisbon
Berlin, Rome
Cairo, Athens
Moscow
Teheran
New Delhi
World Time Zones (Cont.)
Time
Zone
Country/City
GMT+9 Seoul, Tokyo
GMT+10 Sydney
GMT+11 Okhotsk
GMT+12 Wellington
Command
time-zone TIMEZONE
show time-zone
Mode
Config
Privileged/
Config
Function
Sets the time zone.
TIMEZONE: GMT, GMT+0, GMT+1, ..., GMT+12, GMT-0, GMT-1,
..., GMT-12, GMT0, Greenwich, UCT, UTC, Universal
Displays all time zones.
5.4
Synchronizing the Clock
2
3
Index/Priority
1 (High)
Clock Source ETSI
T3 input at PM_1
Internal clock generator
Table 17
Clock Source Indexes
Clock Source ANSI
DS1 interface #1 at PM_3
DS1 interface #2 at PM_3
Internal clock generator
Command
modify clock-sync source INDEX <1-10>
modify clock-sync waittime TIME
show clock-sync sources
Mode
Config
Config
Config
Function
Modifies configuration of clock sync source.
INDEX: clock source index
1 - 10: alarm severity profile index.
Modifies clock sync waittime to restore.
TIME: time to has expire before switch back to a higher clock source after error condition (unit is 100 ms).
Displays all clock sync sources.
Id:0900d80580201aa1 55
56
Alarms Operation Manual CLI
6 Alarms
The fault management system of the hiX 5750 R2.0 uses alarm profiles specifying alarm severities to inform the operator in case of system errors by
traps. It is possible to configure different levels of error checking according to the service type and port.
For information about how to set the alarm severity profile for a specific unit see the chapters describing the configuration of OLT cards, ONUs and ports.
6.1
Configuring an Alarm Severity Profile
Prior use the show alarm-id command to get information about alarm ID values (see
6.2 Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration
).
Command
al-mgr set sev profile { ALARM_ID } {SEV1} {SEV2}
{SEV3} {SEV4} {SEV5} {SEV6} {SEV7} {SEV8} {SEV9}
{SEV10}
modify alarm-severity ALARM_ID PROFILE_INDEX
SEVERITY
update alarm-list
Mode Function
Config Sets all severities for the chosen alarm.
ALARM_ID: alarm ID value
SEV1-SEV10: severity for profile 1-10. (the first profile is default and cannot be overwritten) severities values are:
1: critical
2: major
3: minor
4: warning
5: cleared.
Modifies the index of the severity profile in severity profile table.
ALARM_ID: alarm ID value
PROFILE_INDEX: index of the severity profile in severity profile table
SEVERITY: new severity of the alarm (1 to 5)
Updates the alarm list after changing the severity.
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify alarm-severity 6 3 2
Alarm ID : 06
Severity Profile: 3
Old Severity
New Severity
: 1
: 2
SWITCH(config)# update alarm-listAlarm list is now up to date.
6.2
Checking the Alarm Severity Configuration
In order to identify ID and name of alarms that can occur in system, use the following command. See the maintenance manual for more information about a particular alarm.
Function Command Mode
Config
Example:
SWITCH# show alarm-id
Id:0900d8058025ae9c
Alarms Operation Manual CLI
Assignment Alarm and Alarm-ID
ID | Name |
----|-------------------------------------|
01 | gponPhysDCAlarm0
02 | gponPhysDCAlarm1
03 | gponPhysFanAlarm0
04 | gponPhysFanAlarm1
05 | gponPhysFanAlarm2
06 | gponPhysFanAlarm3
07 | gponPhysFanAlarm4
08 | gponPhysFanAlarm5
09 | gponPhysShelfMupState1
10 | gponPhysShelfMupState2
11 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm01
12 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm02
13 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm03
14 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm04
15 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm05
16 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm06
17 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm07
18 | gponPhysShelfExternalAlarm08
19 | gponPhysCardTypeMismatch
20 | gponPhysCardFailure
-- More --
SWITCH#
The following commands display information about the configured severity of specific alarms.
Command
show alarm-severity-table SEVERITY_TABLE_INDEX
show alarm-severity ALARM_ID
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays the specified alarm severity profile.
SEVERITY_TABLE_INDEX: index of alarm severity table index, range of 1-10.
Displays the severity of a alarm.
ALARM_ID: alarm ID value.
Examples
SWITCH(config)# show alarm-severity-table 5
AlarmSeverity table for index :
Alarm ID | Severity |
----------|----------|
01
02
...
24
25
|
|
|
|
1
1
2
2
SWITCH(config)# show alarm-severity 4
AlarmSeverities for Alarm ID 4 :
Id:0900d8058025ae9c 57
Alarms Operation Manual CLI
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Severity Profile Index | Severity
------------------------|----------
01
02
03
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
| 1
6.3
Displaying the Occured Alarms
Command
show alarm-list [ critical I major I minor I warning I cleared ]
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays the alarm list of the system.
without parameter: all
critical: only critical alarms
major: only major alarms
minor: only minor alarms
warning: only warnings
cleared: only cleared alarms.
Example:
SWITCH# show alarm-list critical
Alarm List :
ID | Severity | Prof| Time and Date
| | Idx |
| rep src type | rep | Name
| | src |
|
|
----|----------|-----|----------------------------|-----------------|-----|--------------------------|
86 | critical | 01 | Tue 13 Jun 2000, 23:26:35 | SyncSource | 01 | gponSyncClockSourceAlarm
86 | critical | 01 | Tue 13 Jun 2000, 23:26:35 | SyncSource | 02 | gponSyncClockSourceAlarm
All values are decimals...
58 Id:0900d8058025ae9c
Operation Manual CLI Alarms
Command Mode
show alarm-list-reportingsourcetyp
{ physical_entity I interface I vcctp I vlan I bridgeport I erpdomain }
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays the alarm list of the system.
physical_entity: only alarms from physical entity
interface: only alarms from interfaces
bridgeport: only alarms from bridge port
erpdomain: only alarms from ERP domain (Ethernet ring protection is not supported by GPON).
show alarm-list-cxu
show alarm-list-iu-addr SLOT
show alarm-list-gpon-port ADDRESS
show alarm-list-ont-addr ADDRESS
show alarm-list-ont-card-addr ADDRESS
show alarm-list-oid
show alarm-list-sync
Displays CXU alarms.
Displays the alarms of a certain
address (IU and
ONTs).
SLOT: OLT-slot of IU_GPON.
Displays the alarms with a certain GPON port address
(GPON-line/port and ONTs).
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port.
Displays the alarms with a certain ONT address (ONT and
ONT cards).
ADDRESS:OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Displays the alarms with a certain ONT card address.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Displays alarm list of the system shown by OIDs.
Displays alarms which are synchronized by alarm manager to standby (standby available messages).
The list header of the above show alarm-list commands is shown below.
Alarm List :
ID | Sev | SevProfIdx | Time and Date | rep src type | rep src | MIB Object ID |
----|-----|-------------|----------------------------|--------------|---------|---------------|
All values are decimals...
6.4
Configuring the GPON Alarm Thresholds
The GPON thresholds are used to calculate the alarms “signal failed” (Sf) and “signal degraded” (Sd). There is one pair of values for the whole NE. Note that the Sd-threshold value must be higher than Sf-threshold value.
The Sf-alarm as well as the Sd-alarm become active if the bit error rate is equal to or greater than 10E-X and it become inactive if the bit error rate is lower than 10E-(X+1).
Command
gpon threshold <3-8> <4-9>
show gpon threshold
Mode Function
Config Changes alarm threshold.
3 - 8: 10^-SfThresh value (default 10E-3)
4 - 9: 10^-SdThresh value (default 10E-4).
Shows alarm thresholds.
Id:0900d8058025ae9c 59
Alarms
6.5
Configuring the CPU Overload Threshold
Operation Manual CLI
Command
threshold cpu <20-100> { 5 I 60 I 600 }
Mode Function
Config Configures CPU overload threshold.
20 - 100: Threshold in percent
5, 60, 600: Time interval in sec.
60 Id:0900d8058025ae9c
Operation Manual CLI
7 OLT Equipment
This chapter contains information about configuration of the OLT cards.
•
•
Changing the Admin State of Card
•
•
•
•
Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card
•
Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards, Rack & Self
•
•
.
OLT Equipment
7.1
Creating a new Card
The creation of an OLT card is possible without the necessity that the card has to be equipped into shelf’s slot. If this card is plugged-in later, the system will be check whether the equipped card type is matching the configured one or not. When the card’s type is valid, the admin state changes automatically to “unlocked”.
Command Mode Function
slot card create SLOTNUM { m_iugpon_2512_e I m_iugpon_2512_a I m_iugpon_2512_l_e | m_iu10ge_1o_e I m_iu1ge_10o_e | m_cxuvr_1o_4e_e | m_cxuf4_1o_4e_e } { planned I locked }
Config Creates a new card.
SLOTNUM: number of the slot
iugpon_2512_e: IU with 4 port GPON (2,5/1,2G, class B) with 8x E1
(unstructured), front access
iugpon_2512_a: IU with 4 port GPON (2,5/1,2G, class B) with 8x DS1
(unstructured), rear access
m_iugpon_2512_l_e: IU with 4 ports GPON (2.5G/1.2G, Class B), front access
iu10ge_10_e: IU with 10x1G optical Ethernet interface, 1x10G uplink
iu1ge_10o_e: IU with 1x10G optical Ethernet interface
m_cxuf4_1o_4e_e: central unit with 4x1 GigE uplinks,
150G switching capacity, 1x 10G uplink
m_cxuvr_1o_4e_e: central unit with 4x1 GigE uplinks,
150G switching capacity, 1x 10G uplink, virtual routing support
planned: set admin state to ’planned’
locked: set admin state to ’locked’.
7.2
Changing the Admin State of Card
Command Mode Function
card admin-state SLOTNUM { planned I locked I unlocked } Config Changes the admin state of a card.
SLOTNUM: number of the slot
planned: set admin state to ’planned’
locked: set admin state to ’locked’
unlocked: set admin state to ’unlocked’.
Id:0900d8058023f600 61
62
Operation Manual CLI OLT Equipment
7.3
Reset of Interface Unit Cards
Command
reset type { m_iugpon_2512_e I m_iugpon_2512_a I m_iugopn_2512_l_e | m_iu10ge_1o_e | m_iu1ge_10o_e }
Mode Function
Config Resets all modules of the same type.
m_iugpon_2512_e: IU with 4 port GPON (2,5/1,2G, class B) with 8x E1 (unstructured), front access
m_iugpon_2512_a: IU with 4 port GPON (2,5/1,2G, class B) with 8x DS1 (unstructured), rear access
m_iu_gpon_2512_l_e: IU with 4 ports GPON (2.5G/1.2G, class
B), front access
m_iu10ge_1o_e: IU with uplink with optical 10G interface
m_iu1ge_10o_e: IU with 10x 1G interfaces.
7.4
Deleting an Existing Card
Command
slot card delete SLOTNUM
Mode Function
Config Deletes an existing card.
SLOTNUM: number of the slot.
7.5
Converting of IU_GPON Cards
Command
slot card convert SLOTNUM { m_iu_gpon_2512_e | m_iugpon_2512_l_e }
Mode Function
Config Converts an existing card.
SLOTNUMBER: number of the slot
m_iu_gpon_2512_e: converts card to IU_GPON_2512_E
(IU with 4 ports GPON (2.5G/1.2G, class B) with 8 x E1
(unstructured), front access
m_iu_gpon_l_e: converts card to IU_GPON_2512_L_E
(IU with 4 ports GPON (2.5G/1.2G, class B), front access.
7.6
Checking the MAC Table of Interface Unit Card
Command
show iu ADRESS mac table
show iu ADDRESS mac table vlan [ VLANID ]
Mode Function
Bridge Displays information of IU’s MAC table segmented per specified
GPON link or certain ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port[/ONU-ID].
Displays information of IU’s MAC table for specified GPON link or certain ONU that may be also segmented per VLAN.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]
VLANID: show only MAC addresses in specified VLAN.
7.7
Selecting Alarm Severity Profiles of Cards, Rack & Self
Command
card alarm-severity-profile SLOTNUM <1-10>
rack alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
shelf alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
Mode Function
Config Changes alarm severity profile.
SLOTNUM: number of the slot
1 - 10: index of the profile.
Changes rack alarm severity profile.
Changes shelf alarm severity profile.
Id:0900d8058023f600
shelf ext-alarm-input <1-8> <0-1> [ LINE ]
OLT Equipment Operation Manual CLI
7.8
Configuring External Alarms
Command
shelf ext-alarm-output <1-3> [ LINE ]
Mode
Config
Function
Changes usage string of an external alarm output.
1 - 3: number of the alarm output
LINE: new usage string.
Changes level and usage string of an external alarm input.
1 - 8: number of the alarm input
0 - 1: low or high active
LINE: new usage string.
7.9
Checking the Physical Tables
Command show table physical-container
show table physical-container PHYSINDEX
show table physical-card
show table physical-card PHYSINDEX
show table physical-entity
show table physical-entity PHYSINDEX
show table shelf
show table shelf SLOTNUM
show table physical-shelf show table physical-rack
show card config-state SLOTNUM
show objects temperature
Mode Function
Config
table.
PHYSINDEX: physical index to show information for.
Config Displays the slot usage and configuration for all slots.
Displays the slot usage and configuration.
SLOTNUM: slot number.
Config Displays the slot usage and configuration for all slots.
Config Displays the SNMP configuration of the rack.
Config Displays card specific information for specified slot.
SLOTNUM: slot number.
Config Displays the temperature alarm tresholds of the shelf.
Id:0900d8058023f600 63
64
CXU Board and Line Redundancy Operation Manual CLI
8 CXU Board and Line Redundancy
The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides CXU board redundancy to offer a high level of failure protection regarding to card errors, software failures, and when the uplink line fails. The shelf can be optionally equipped with a second CXU acting in standby mode until a failure condition of the active CXU or the operator trigger a switch-over. In all cases, the active CXU is responsible for the synchronization of the standby one. Measures of CXU board redundancy always implement also the possibility to establish uplink line redundancy for the 10-Gbps line and with reservations up to 4 x 1-Gbps lines.
The board redundancy needs following requirements:
• Both CXU cards must be of the same type.
•
In case of upgrading an OLT, a primary CXU with
older than release 2.02 must first be upgraded before the second (standby) board can be plugged-in.
Following redundancy aspects are supported:
• Switching is initiated autonomously by the CXU hardware in case of a watch-dog event (SW error on the currently active CXU).
• Switching can be initiated by the SW as result of a hardware state monitoring or on request of the management system.
g
Note that the standby CXU card must be first created in the slot 10, see
7.1 Creating a new Card for further information.
g
A plug-out of the currently active CXU board with the objective of initiating a switchover could result in an interruption of
’s control. Therefore, it must not be per-
formed. At first, execute a switchover command.
8.1
Checking Redundancy-States
To check the redundancy states and software consistence between of the equipped
CXU cards, use the following commands.
Command show redundancy-states
show table shelf SLOT
Mode Function
Config Displays the redundancy states of all plug-in units.
Shows slot usage and slot configuration of the running system.
SLOT: slot number to show information for.
reset card SLOT
8.2
Resetting a CXU
g
See following sections for further reset commands:
•
•
.
Use the following command to initiate a reset of a CXU. Be careful choosing the slot number.
Command Mode
Config Reset of the specified CXU.
SLOT: slot number.
Function
Id:0900d8058024353a
Operation Manual CLI CXU Board and Line Redundancy
8.3
Initiating a Switchover
The following commands initiate a manual switch-over. This may be done e.g. in the case of hardware maintenance purposes.
switchover SLOT
Command
switchover-forced SLOT
Mode Function
Config Switchover to the standby CXU if the standby unit has no error.
SLOT: slot number of the active CXU.
Switchover to the standby CXU is forced also when it is in inferior state than the active one.
8.4
Uplink Line Redundancy
Uplink line redundancy measures are supported for 10-GE lines and 1-GE lines.
g
Using uplink line redundancy requires an LAG (LACP) configuration on the OLT
(see
) and the aggregation switch(es). Note that configuration steps referring to logical ports must be performed using the default CXU slot#9.
In case of the 10-GE port, the LAG on the OLT contains only one line. The required cabling diagram using 1-GE line redundancy is shown in
. CXU#A is the active one in this case.
Aggregation
Switch/Combiner
Front Access Cables
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Figure 3
CXU#A
CXU#B
CXU & Line-Redundancy
(Line-Cross-Connect)
CXU and 1-GE Redundancy (Example)
Id:0900d8058024353a 65
66
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
9 ONU Equipment
equipment, use the commands described in the following sections:
•
•
•
•
•
.
g
For further information about how to configure the hiX5709 MDU equipment see chapter
.
9.1
ONT and MDU Types
The table below contains ONT/MDU types which are provided by the hiX 5750 R2.0.
Name
hiX5701-003 E-SFU hiX5702-001 SFU hiX5702-002 hiX5703-001
SFU
SFU hiX5703-003 hiX5704-001 hiX5705-001
G25A-001
SFU
SFU
SBU
SFU
G25A-002
G25A-003
G25C-001
G25E-001
SFU
SFU
SFU
SFU
G25E-002
G80RG-001
SFU
SFU-
RG hiX5709-001 MDU
1) hiX5709-003
Type Ethernet
10/100bT
Ethernet
10/100/
1000bT
1
1
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
1
1
4
16
16
POTS xDSL E1 CATV SIP H.248
AES FEC IGMP
Snoop
WiFi USB
2
2
4
4
8
8
2
2
2
2
48
96
2)
2)
24
32
3)
4)
2 1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 2
2)
3)
4)
Table 18
1)
ONT/MDU Types
4 slots for service boards
Max. number of ports, MDU equipped with:
SB_POTS24
SB_XDSL12 (12 VDSL2 and splitter)
SB_XDSL16 (16 VDSL2/ADSL2+, combo splitter) or SB_XDSL16P (16 VDSL2/ADSL2+, POTS splitter)
Id:0900d80580257da6
Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment
9.2
Creating an ONU
An ONU can be created in one of two modes:
• Configured serial number: In this mode the serial number, as printed on the ONU, must be set. If an ONU is detected with a serial number that is equal to the configured one, this ONU starts up with the associated configuration data set.
• Discover mode: Each ONU is assigned a unique password. The password is only transmitted upstream and cannot be changed from OLT side. If the OLT reference password is initialized with the appropriate command, the received ONU password can be compared with the local stored OLT reference password. If an ONU with unknown serial number is detected and the password “Reg ID” is matching with the stored one, the configuration will be completed with this ONU's serial number.
Command
create onu { hiX5701-001 | hiX5701-002 I hiX5701-003 I hiX5701-004 | hiX5702-001 | hiX5703-001 | hiX5703-003 | hiX5704-001 | hix5705-001 I hix 5705-003 | g25a-001 I g25a-002 | g25a-003 | g25c-001 | g25e-001 | g25e-002 | g50a-001 | g50a-002 | g80rg-001 | hiX5709-001 | hiX5709-003 }
ADDRESS { configured SERIAL_NUMBER
{ nopassword | password PASSWD } | discover REG_ID }
<1-10> { on I off } {0 I { 1 <1-444> } }
<0-1099560000> <0-1099560000> <0-1099560000>
<0-1099560000> <0-1099560000> <0-1099560000> LINE
Mode Function
Config Creates specific entries (ONU type), see list above.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
SERIAL_NUMBER: serial number of the ONU/ONT as hexadecimal number (8 signs if all is ASCII, 12 signs if the first 4 are ASCII and the remaining are HEX, 16 signs if all is
HEX), must be set in this mode with or without password.
PASSWD: Registration ID of the ONU/ONT (max .10 signs)
REG_ID: registration ID of the ONU/ONT (max. 10 signs) must be set in this mode
1 - 10: alarm severity profile
battery backup on/off. If “off”, no related
alarms (battery missing, battery failure, battery low) are generated.
0 - 1: security mode: 0 - no encryption. When encryption for the whole ONT is switched off, the NE automatically switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports.
1 -
encryption (of downstream payload)
1 - 444: time for periodical key switchover in units of 5 minutes from 1 (5 minutes) up to 444 (37 hours)
The bandwidth values in bps:
0 - 1099560000: fixed bandwidth allocated for all
interfaces of this ONU
0 - 1099560000: fixed bandwidth allocated for all POTS
(VoIP) interfaces of this ONU
0 - 1099560000: assured bandwidth allocated for all high priority realtime data interfaces of this ONU
0 - 1099560000: assured bandwidth allocated for all high priority priority non-realtime data interfaces of this ONU
0 - 1099560000: maximum bandwidth allocated for all high priority non-realtime data interfaces of this ONU
0 - 1099560000: maximum bandwidth allocated for all best effort data interfaces of this ONU
LINE: user data (max. 80 characters).
Example:
SWITCH#enable
SWITCH#configure terminal
SWITCH(config)#create onu g25e-001 3/1/0 configured
4349474707074602 nopassword 3 off 0 45000 45000 45000 45000 45000
28000000 YourString
ONU 3/1/0 created successful!
Id:0900d80580257da6 67
68
Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment
9.3
Modifying ONU Parameter
Command
modify onu configuremode ADDRESS SERIAL_NUMBER
[ PASSWD ]
modify onu discovermode ADDRESS PASSWD
modify onu password ADDRESS { set PASSWD | delete }
modify onu adminstate ADDRESS { unlock I lock }
modify onu alarm-severity-profile ADDRESS <1-10>
modify onu batterybackup ADDRESS { on I off }
modify onu securitymode ADDRESS <0-1>
modify onu securityuserdata ADDRESS { 128 I192 I 256 }
<1-144>
modify onu userdata ADDRESS LINE
Mode Function
Config Sets the configure mode for the ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
SERIAL_NUMBER: sets the new serial number of the ONU (8 signs if all is ASCII, 12 signs if the first 4 are ASCII and the remaining are HEX, 16 signs if all is HEX)
PASSWD: (optional) sets the new password or registration ID as hexadecimal (max. 20 signs for 10 bytes).
Config Modifies the discover mode for the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
PASSWD: set the new password or registration ID as hexadecimal (max. 20 signs for 10 bytes).
Config Modifies the password for the ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
PASSWD: password or registration ID of the ONU/ONT (max. 20 signs for 10 bytes)
delete: delete the set password.
Config Modifies the administrative state of the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Config Modifies the alarm severity profile of the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
1 - 10: index alarm severity profile.
Config Modifies the battery backup mode of the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: slot/port/ONU ID.
Config Modifies the security mode of the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
0 - 1: security mode: 0 - no encryption. When encryption for the whole ONT is switched off, the NE automatically switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports.
encryption (of downstream payload)
Config Modifies the security user data for the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
128/192/256: AES encryption with 128/192/256 bit g
The AES key length is fixed to 128 Bit.
1 - 144. time for periodical key switchover in 5 min steps from 5 min to 37 h
Config Modifies the user data of the specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
LINE: userdata (max. 80 characters).
9.4
Deleting an ONU
delete onu ADDRESS
Command Mode Function
Config Deletes specified entry.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Id:0900d80580257da6
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
9.5
Getting List of Unknown ONTs
Command
gpon get unknown-onu-list ADDRESS
Mode
Config
Function
Gets the current list of unknown ONTs at a GPON link.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port.
9.6
Replacing an ONU
The ONU replacement bases on commands described in other sections of this document. It is mentioned here also as example for these commands.
1. Verifying the Alarm List and the Unknown ONU List
The example below shows alarms indicated by an unknown ONU.
g
The registration ID of an unknown ONU will be displayed only if there is at least one
ONU configured in “discover” mode on the GPON link. The registration ID is displayed as long as the ONU is not configured.
SWITCH(config)# show alarm-list
Alarm List :
ID | Severity | Prof| Time and Date
| | Idx |
| rep src type | rep | Name
| | src |
---|----------|-----|---------------------------|-----------------|-----|-------------------------
80 | critical | 01 | Mon 14 Jul 2008, 13:34:34 | SyncSource
59 | critical | 01 | Mon 14 Jul 2008, 13:35:51 | Interface
| 01 | gponSyncClockSourceAlarm
| 201 | gponGponLineAlarmOnuMismatch
39 | critical | 01 | Mon 14 Jul 2008, 13:36:50 | Physical Entity | 270497 | gponGponOnuNotInstalled
All values are decimals...
SWITCH(config)# show gpon unknown-onus address | # || serial | registrationID
====================================================================
2/ 1 | 1 || 4349474707021259 | -- -- -- -- --
Id:0900d80580257da6 69
70
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
2. Verifying the Configuration of the Unknown ONU
SWITCH(config)# show onu table 2/1/1
-----------------------------------------------------------
OltSlot: 2, GponPort: 1, OnuId: 1
Configured onu type : G25A-001
Serialnumber method : 1 (configured mode)
Serialnumber (ASCII) : CIGG°°°°
Serialnumber (HEX) : 0x4349474707020000
Password/Reg-Id (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°°°
Password/Reg-Id (HEX) : 0x00000000000000000000
Equipment-Id (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
Equipment-Id (HEX) : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Version (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°°°°°°°
Version (HEX) : 0x0000000000000000000000000000
Vendor-Id (ASCII) : °°°°
Vendor-Id (HEX) : 0x00000000
Vendor product code : 0
Pptp index : 201
Physical index : 270369
Alarmseverity profile : 1
Onu is detected : 2 (false)
Adminstate : 1 (ONU unlocked)
Operstate : 2 (ONU disabled)
Security option :-1 (SecurityOption unknown)
Security mode : 0 (no encryption selected)
Key length : 128 (bit)
Key switching time : 1 (5 min)
Battery backup option :-1 (BackupOption unknown)
Battery backup mode : 2 (Backup disabled)
Traffic management option : 1 (cellRateControlled)
Powerlevel : 0
Pvid : 0
Number of Fans : 0
Distance : 0 metre
User data : 2/1/1_G25-A
-----------------------------------------------------------
Found 1 entrie(s)!
-----------------------------------------------------------
3. Configuring the ONU Registration-ID in Discover-Mode
At first, the unknown (replaced) ONU must be "locked". In order to configure the ONU registration ID, the serial number method must be set to “discover” mode. Note that the registration ID is only sent in upstream direction. Hence, the registration ID that is now set has to match with the ID that was directly configured on ONU before. This step should be finished with a configuration check.
Id:0900d80580257da6
Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH(config)# modify onu adminstate 2/1/1 lock
SWITCH(config)# modify onu discovermode 2/1/1 30303037303231323539
SWITCH(config)# show onu table 2/1/1
-----------------------------------------------------------
OltSlot: 2, GponPort: 1, OnuId: 1
Configured onu type : G25A-001
Serialnumber method : 2 (discover mode)
Serialnumber (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°
Serialnumber (HEX) : 0x0000000000000000
Password/Reg-Id (ASCII) : 0007021259
Password/Reg-Id (HEX) : 0x30303037303231323539
Equipment-Id (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°°
Equipment-Id (HEX) : 0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Version (ASCII) : °°°°°°°°°°°°°°
Version (HEX) : 0x0000000000000000000000000000
Vendor-Id (ASCII) : °°°°
Vendor-Id (HEX) : 0x00000000
Vendor product code : 0
Pptp index : 201
Physical index : 270369
Alarmseverity profile : 1
Onu is detected : 2 (false)
Adminstate : 2 (ONU locked)
Operstate : 2 (ONU disabled)
Security option :-1 (SecurityOption unknown)
Security mode : 0 (no encryption selected)
Key length : 128 (bit)
Key switching time : 1 (5 min)
Battery backup option :-1 (BackupOption unknown)
Battery backup mode : 2 (Backup disabled)
Traffic management option : 1 (cellRateControlled)
Powerlevel : 0
Pvid : 0
Number of Fans : 0
Distance : 0 metre
User data : 2/1/1_G25-A
-----------------------------------------------------------
Found 1 entrie(s)!
-----------------------------------------------------------
ONU Equipment
4. Unlocking the ONU
Unlock the ONU and wait until the discovery method is finished. The serial number is filled in and the “Serial number method” is set to “configured”. There are no further configuration steps required, the OLT ranges the replacement ONU with the original configuration data.
Id:0900d80580257da6 71
72
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH(config)# modify onu adminstate 2/1/1 unlock
SWITCH(config)# show onu table 2/1/1
-----------------------------------------------------------
OltSlot: 2, GponPort: 1, OnuId: 1
Configured onu type : G25A-001
Serialnumber method : 1 (configured mode)
Serialnumber (ASCII) : CIGG°°°Y
Serialnumber (HEX) : 0x4349474707021259
Password/Reg-Id (ASCII) : 0007021259
Password/Reg-Id (HEX) : 0x30303037303231323539
Equipment-Id (ASCII) : 00000000109-00120-05
Equipment-Id (HEX) : 0x30303030303030303130392D30303132302D3035
Version (ASCII) : 00109-00120-05
Version (HEX) : 0x30303130392D30303132302D3035
Vendor-Id (ASCII) : CIGG
Vendor-Id (HEX) : 0x43494747
Vendor product code : 0
Pptp index : 201
Physical index : 270369
Alarmseverity profile : 1
Onu is detected : 1 (true)
Adminstate : 1 (ONU unlocked)
Operstate : 2 (ONU disabled)
Security option : 1 (AES encryption implemented)
Security mode : 0 (no encryption selected)
Key length : 128 (bit)
Key switching time : 1 (5 min)
Battery backup option :-1 (BackupOption unknown)
Battery backup mode : 2 (Backup disabled)
Traffic management option : 1 (cellRateControlled)
Powerlevel : 3
Pvid : 0
Number of Fans : 0
Distance : 28 metre
User data : 2/1/1_G25-a
-----------------------------------------------------------
Found 1 entrie(s)!
-----------------------------------------------------------
9.7
Setting the Number of Fans
Command
modify onu fans ADDRESS <0-2>
Mode
Config
Function
Sets the number of ONU fans.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
0 - 2: fan number
0: without fan
1: fan unit equipped with 1 fan
2: fan unit equipped with 2 fans.
Id:0900d80580257da6
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
9.8
Synchronizing the ONU Time
Command
synchronize onu time ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config Synchronize the start time of all monitoring managed entities of this ONU with the reference time of the OLT. All ONU’s performance data are reset.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
9.9
Reset an ONU
Command
reset onu ADDRESS [ ignore-operstate ]
Mode Function
Config Resets a certain ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
ignore-operstate: ignore operstate of ONU (optional).
9.10
Performing the ONU Selftest
selftest onu ADDRESS
Command Mode Function
Config Triggers an ONU Selftest.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
9.11
Managing the Software Load
The ONT stores 2 images. One image is the active and committed load. This load is currently running and will be used after a reset. It is always available. The second image is inactive. It will be overwritten during a software download. After successful download process (the load is valid) the new load is automatically activated and committed (the images are swapped). With the following commands, this process can be further specified.
Command Mode Function
modify onu setcommittedload ADDRESS { stored-inactive I running-active I not-available } [ activate ] [ ignore-operstate ]
Config Sets the committed load of a line card.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
stored-inactive: commits the stored inactive load
running-active: commits the running active load
not-available: does not commit any load
activate: optional, activate inactive load
ignore-operstate: optional, does not check the operstate.
modify onu activate-inactive-load ADDRESS
[ ignore-operstate ]
Config Activates the inactive load of a line card.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
ignore-operstate: does not check the operstate.
9.12
Checking the List of Alarms
Command
show alarm-list-ont-addr ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config Displays the alarms with a certain ONT address (ONT and ONT cards).
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Id:0900d80580257da6 73
74
ONU Equipment
Command
show alarm-list-ont-card-addr ADDRESS
Operation Manual CLI
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Displays the alarms with a certain ONT card address.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
9.13
Checking the Configuration
Command Mode Function
show onu type { hiX5701-002 I hiX5701-003 I hiX5701-004 I hiX5702-001 | hiX5703-001 I hiX5703-003 I hiX5705-001 I hiX5705-003} | hix5709-001 | hix5709-003 | g25a-001 | g25a-002 | g25a-003 | g25c-001 | g25e-001 | g25e-002 | g50a-001 | g50a-002 | g80rg-001 }
[ ADDRESS ]
Config Search for the specified ONU type.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
show onu adminstate { unlocked I locked } [ ADDRESS ]
show onu operstat { enabled I disabled } [ ADDRESS ]
show onu serialnumber SERIAL_NUMBER
Config Displays ONU IDs with the specified administrative state.
unlocked: show unlocked ONUs
locked: show locked ONUs
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Config Displays ONU IDs with specified operational state.
enabled: show enabled ONUs
disabled: show disabled ONUs
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Config Search for the specified serial number of an ONU.
SERIAL_NUMBER: Enter the serial number.
show onu ids { used I free } [ ADDRESS ]
show gpon ont-config ADDRESS
show onu flags ADDRESS
show gpon unknown-onus
show onu table [ ADDRESS ]
Config Search for the specified ONU IDs on an interface.
used: for displaying ONU IDs, which are used on an interface
free: for displaying ONU IDs, which are not used on an interface
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Config Show a ONT configuration data.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Config Shows the flags for an ONU entry.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Config Shows all unknown ONUs.
show onu ONUINDEX mac table
show onu ONUINDEX mac table vlan [ VLANID ]
show ponpptp ont { table | list}
[ ADDRESS ]
Config Displays the ONU table of system.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Bridge Shows ONU specific information of MAC address table.
ONUINDEX: address OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Shows ONU specific information of MAC address table segmented per port.
VLANID: show only MAC addresses in one VLAN.
Config Displays PON interface on ONT/ONU.
table: table with config data
list: list
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
show table onu-physical-container ADDRESS
show table onu-physical-entity ADDRESS
show table onu-physical-rack ADDRESS
show table onu-physical-shelf ADDRESS
Config Displays
table for a specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Id:0900d80580257da6
Operation Manual CLI
Command
show table onu-physical-card ADDRESS
show onu-loads [ ADDRESS ]
show onu description ADDRESS LINE
show onu first-entry
show linecard table [ ADDRESS ]
show linecard first-entry
show linecard config-state
{ not-configured | running | failed | finished } [ ADDRESS ]
show port onu [ ONUS ]
show port onu saved-data
show port onu dte-dce ONUS
ONU Equipment
Mode Function
Config Displays SNMP table for a specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Config Shows load versions of MDU cards and ONUs.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Config Displays ONU IDs with the specified user data.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]]
LINE: The full matching user data.
Config Displays the first ONU table entry.
Config Displays the specified linecard entries.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID[/ONU-slot]]].
Displays first entry of linecard table.
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Exec/
Config
Shows the specified linecard entries, The linecard-table with the specified configuration state.
not-configured: show the not configured cards
running: show the cards, where configuration is running
failed: show the cards, where configuration has failed
finished: show the cards, where configuration has finished.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Displays the Ethernet interface on ONU.
ONUS: ONU address (slot/port/ONU ID).
Displays the saved ONU Ethernet configuration.
Displays the DTE/DCE status of Ethernet interfaces on ONU.
ONUS: ONU address (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID).
9.14
Checking the MAC Table
Use the following commands to examine the switch MAC addresses.
Command
show onu ONUINDEX mac table
show onu ONUINDEX mac table vlan [ VLANID ]
Mode Function
Bridge Shows ONU specific information about MAC table.
ONUINDEX: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Shows ONU specific information segmented per port or VLAN.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
VLANID: show only MAC addresses in one VLAN.
9.15
MDU hiX 5709
Use the commands described in the following sections to configure the hiX 5709
:
•
•
•
Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms
•
•
Checking the Configuration Data
.
Id:0900d80580257da6 75
76
ONU Equipment Operation Manual CLI
9.15.1
Creating of MDU Cards
Command Mode
mdu card create ADDRESS
{ m_sb_8p4ge_e | m_sb_24p_e | m_sbxdsl_12_e | m_sbxdsl_16_e | m_sbxdsl_16p_e | m_sbxdsl_16p_sl_e | m_ubgpon_2512_e | m_ubgpon_catv_e } { locked I unlocked }
Config
mdu card create <1-32> GPON_PORT ONU_ID
MDU_SLOT { m_sb_8p4ge_e | m_sb_24p_e | m_sbxdsl_12_e | m_sbxdsl_16_e | m_sbxdsl_16p_e | m_sbxdsl_16p_sl_e | m_ubgpon_2512_e | m_ubgpon_catv_e } { locked I unlocked }
mdu card delete ADDRESS
Function
Creates a new MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
m_sb_8p4ge_e: service board with 8x
front access
m_sb_24p_e: service board with 24x POTS, front access
m_sbxdsl_12_e: service board with 12x x
m_sbxdsl_16_e: service board with 16x xDSL, front access
sbxdsl_16p_e: service board with 16x xDSL and splitter, Annex
A POTS VDSL2, front access
sbxdsl_16p_sl_e: service board with 16x xDSL for splitter less applications, ADSL Annex A POTS, VDSL2 Region B, front access
uplink board, infrastructure and
cascading interfaces, front access
m_ubgpon_catv_e: GPON uplink board, infrastructure and cascading interfaces, CATV interface, front access
locked: set adminstate to locked
unlocked: set adminstate to unlocked.
Creates a new MDU.
1 - 32: MDU number
GPON_PORT: enter GPON port number
ONU_ID: enter ONU ID number
MDU_SLOT: enter MDU SLOT number.
Deletes a card.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
9.15.2
Changing the Admin State
Command
mdu card adminstate ADDRESS { locked I unlocked }
Mode
Config
Function
Changes the adminstate of a specified MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
locked: set adminstate to locked
unlocked: set adminstate to unlocked.
9.15.3
Setting of Alarm Severities and External Alarms
Command
mdu card alarm-severity-profile ADDRESS <1-10>
mdu rack alarm-severity-profile ADDRESS <1-10>
mdu shelf alarm-severity-profile ADDRESS <1-10>
mdu shelf ext-alarm-output ADDRESS <1-3> [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Changes the alarm severity profile of a specified MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
1 - 10: profile index.
Changes the rack alarm of a specified MDU.
Changes the shelf alarm of a specified MDU.
Config Changes the usage string of the external alarm output of a specified
MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
1 - 3: number of external alarm output
LINE: new usage string.
Id:0900d80580257da6
Operation Manual CLI ONU Equipment
Command Mode Function
mdu shelf ext-alarm-input ADDRESS <1-8> <0-1> [ LINE ] Config Changes the usage string of the external alarm input of a specified
MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot
1 - 8: number of external alarm input
0 - 1: input is low or high-active
LINE: new usage string.
9.15.4
Setting the Number of Fans
Command
modify onu fans ADDRESS <0-2>
Mode
Config
Function
Sets the number of MDU fans.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
0 - 2: fan number
0: without fan
1: fan unit equipped with 1 fan
2: fan unit equipped with 2 fans.
9.15.5
Checking the Configuration Data
Command
show onu card config-state ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config Displays state of configuration for a specified MDU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Id:0900d80580257da6 77
78
Ports Operation Manual CLI
10 Ports
Ports can be configured in Configuration mode and Bridge configuration mode. Execute the bridge command to change the system prompt from SWITCH(config)# to
SWITCH(bridge)#
.
The port configuration is described in following sections:
•
•
•
•
E1/DS1 Port Configuration and Test
•
•
•
•
•
.
10.1
General Configuration
Command
port PORTS { enable I disable I test }
port PORTS alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
port PORTS description LINE
clear port PORTS description
Mode
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables a port.
PORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
test: configures a port as test port.
Configures port specific alarm severity profile index.
1 - 10: profile index.
Port specific description.
LINE: text (max.number of characters is 100).
Clears specific description.
Command
port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1ll l xdsl | catv | ces } PORTS
{ enable I disable I test }
port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1ll l xdsl | ces } PORTS
alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1ll I xdsl | catv | ces } PORTS
description LINE
clear port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1ll I xdsl | catv | ces }
PORTS description
Mode
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables a port.
PORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
eth: Ethernet port
pots:
port
e1ds1ll:
port
port
test:: configures a port as test port.
Configures port alarm severity for.
1 - 10: alarm severity profile index.
Port specific description.
LINE: text (max. number of characters is 100).
Clears port specific description,
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command
gpon olt-alarm ADDRESS <1-10>
gpon ont-alarm ADDRESS <1-10>
Mode
Config
Function
Sets alarm severity profile for OLT interface:
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/OLT-port
1 - 10: alarm severity profile index.
Sets alarm severity profile for
/ONU interface:
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
1 - 10: alarm severity profile index.
10.2
GPON Port Configuration
This chapter is divided in the following sections:
•
•
•
•
GEM Traffic Description Profiles
•
•
.
10.2.1
T-CONTs
represents a logical connection group, since it accommodates GEM packets.
The
sets all bandwidth parameters according to the ONU type when it creates the
T-CONTs. Smallest bandwidth unit is always 510000 bps (an entered bandwidth value is rounded down to the next multiple of 510000).
Required bandwidth for one interface:
• E1 interface 2040000 bps
• DS1 interface 1530000 bps
• POTS-VoIP interface 113600 bps
• OMCI channel per ONU requires 38400 bps.
Type
1
2
3
4
Table 19
Fixed BW
X
Assured BW
X
X
T-CONT Bandwidth Types
Max. BW
X
X
CoS
TDM, VoIP
Data rt
Data hp
Data BE
Id:0900d80580257cd9 79
80
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Command
modify t-cont bandwidth { tdm | voip | data-be | data-hp I data-rt } TCONTS <0-1099560000> <0-1099560000>
<0-1099560000>
t-cont { tdm I voip I data-be I data-hp I data-rt } TCONTS
modify bandwidth <0-1099560000> <0-1099560000>
<0-1099560000>
modify t-cont { tdm | voip | data-be | data-hp I data-rt }
TCONTS bandwidth <0-1099560000> <0-1099560000>
<0-1099560000>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures bandwidth of T-CONT depending on its type. Note that there are some bandwidth values will be ignored and set to
ZERO.
tdm: time division multiplexing (1)
voip: voice over internet protocol (1)
data-rt: data-real time (2)
data-hp: data-high priority (3)
data-be: data-best effort (4)
TCONTS: assigned ONU address (slot/port/ONU-ID)
Use multiple of 510000 to configure the following bandwidth values.
0 - 1099560000: fixed bandwidth (bit/s), only valid for T-CONT type 1. Must be set to ZERO for other T-CONT types.
Configurable ranges:
- voip: 0-130050000
- tdm: 0-1099560000
0 - 1099560000: assured bandwidth (bit/s), only valid for
T-CONT types 2, and 3. Must be set to ZERO for other T-CONT types.
0 - 1099560000: maximum bandwidth (bit/s), only valid for
T-CONT types 3 and 4. Must be set to ZERO for other T-CONT types. g
The command fails in case of overbooking.
Command
show tcont { table I list } [ ADDRESS ] [ tdm I voip I data-be I data-hp I data-rt I data ]
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays transmission container.
table: table with config data
list: list with config data
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]]
tdm: time division multiplexing
voip: voice over Internet protocol
data-be: data - best effort
data-hp: data - high priority
data-rt: data - real time
data: all data.
10.2.2
DBA and Overbooking
Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) is a technique for allocating bandwidth based on current traffic requirements. If the DBA mechanism is used, the OLT can rearrange the upstream bandwidth to provide more resources for those ONTs that are tightly loaded with traffic. The OLT monitors the incoming traffic from the ONTs for each single
T-CONT. If the ONT has to send no traffic, it transmits GEM-idle frames. If the OLT observes that a certain ONT is sending at least one user GEM frame, it increases the bandwidth allocation for this ONT.
Command
gpon bamode ADDRESS { staticba I nsrdba }
Mode
Config
Function
Sets type of upstream bandwidth allocation on T-CONT level provided by the OLT.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/OLT-port
staticba: static BA
nsrdba: non status reporting dynamic BA.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
10.2.3
GEM Port GAL Profiles
g
port can only be modified if such
which are using it, were set in admin state “locked” or they are offline.
g
The command parameter priority-ID (1-8) is an internalal index to address GEM ports on an interface. By default, packets with a higher .1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher (or equal) priority-ID than packets with lower .1p priority.
Command
gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8> modify
gal-profile <1-16>
modify gemport gal-profile { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl }
GEMPORTS <1-8> <1-16>
modify gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8>
gal-profile <1-16>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures GEM adaption layer profile.
eth: Ethernet interface
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line interface
xdsl; xDSL port
GEMPORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONUslot/ONU-port
1- 8: priority-ID of GEM port
1-16: profile table index.
The following GAL profiles are related to a GEM IW TP. One default profile with index 1 always exists.
Command
gal-eth-profile create <1-65535>
create gal-eth-profile <1-65535>
gal-eth-profile delete <2-16>
delete gal-eth-profile <2-16>
gal-tdm-profile create { byte-stuffing I bit-stuffing I sync-residual-timestamp } LOF
create gal-tdm-profile { byte-stuffing I bit-stuffing I sync-residual-timestamp } LOF
gal-tdm-profile delete <2-16>
delete gal-tdm-profile <2-16>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Creates GEM adoption layer ethernet profile.
1 - 65535: payload size.
Bridge Deletes GEM adoption layer ethernet profile.
2 - 16: gal-eth-profile table index.
Bridge
Bridge
Creates GEM adoption layer time-division-multiplexing profile.
byte-stuffing: byte stuffing
bit-stuffing: bit stuffing
sync-residual-timestamp: synchronous residual time-stamp
: duration of the GEM frame loss integration period (ms).
Deletes GEM adaption layer time-division-multiplexing profile.
2 - 16: GAL-TDM-profile table index.
show gal-eth-prof table show gal-tdm-prof table
Command Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays
adaption layer Ethernet profile table.
Displays GEM adaption layer time-division-multiplexing profile table.
10.2.4
GEM Traffic Description Profiles
g
The traffic descriptor profile of a GEM port can only be modified if such ONTs/MDU cards, which are using it, were set in admin state “locked” or they are offline.
g
The command parameter priority-ID (1-8) is an internal index to address GEM ports on an interface. By default, packets with a higher .1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher (or equal) priority-ID than packets with lower .1p priority.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 81
82
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Command
create traffic-desc-profile <0-150000> <0-150000>
traffic-desc-profile create <0-150000> <0-150000>
gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8>
modify traffic-desc-profile <0-16>
modify gemport traffic-desc-profile { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8> <0-16>
modify gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS
<1-8> traffic-desc-profile <0-16>
traffic-desc-profile delete <1-16>
delete traffic-desc-profile <1-16>
Mode Function
Bridge Creates traffic description profile.
0 - 150000: SIR sustained information rate (kbps)
0 - 150000: PIR peak information rate (kbps).
Bridge Configures traffic descriptor profile of GEM port.
eth: Ethernet port
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line interface
xdsl: xDSL port
GEMPORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
1 - 8: priority-ID of GEM port
0 - 16: index of profile table (1-16) - 0 no profile used.
Bridge Deletes traffic description profile.
1 - 16: index of traffic description profile.
Command show traffic-desc-prof table
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows traffic description profile.
10.2.5
GEM Ports
This section describes the settings of security mode, alarm severity, and loop state.
g
on
port level requires an activation of AES for the ONU, see
.
Related commands are:
• modify onu securitymode for enabling/disabling AES
• modify onu securityuserdata for setting key update time
If encryption is switched off for an ONU, the
itself switches off the encryption for the affected GEM ports. This takes place without any notification.
g
The command parameter priority-ID (1-8) is an internal index to address GEM ports on an interface. By default, packets with a higher .1p priority will be forwarded over a GEM port with higher (or equal) priority-ID than packets with lower .1p priority.
Command
gemport all-of-ont ONUADDR modify security-mode
{ off | on }
modify gemport all-of-ont ONUADDR security-mode
{ off | on }
modify gemport all-of-ont security-mode ONUADDR
{ off | on }
gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl} GEMPORTS <1-8>
modify security-mode { off I on }
modify gemport security-mode { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl }
GEMPORTS <1-8> { off I on }
modify gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl } GEMPORTS
<1-8> security-mode { off I on }
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables GPON encryption method for all GEM ports of
ONT.
ONUADDR: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
off / on: no encryption / encryption
Configures encryption for specified GEM ports of ONT.
eth: Ethernet port
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line interface
xdsl: xDSL port
GEMPORTS: interface address (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-
ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
1 - 8: priority-ID of GEM port
off: no encryption
on: AES encryption.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI
Command
gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8>
modify alarm-severity-index <1-10>
modify gemport alarm-severity-index { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8> <1-10>
modify gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll | xdsl } GEMPORTS
<1-8> alarm-severity-index <1-10>
Mode
Bridge
gemport { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-8>
modify loopstate { loopback | no-loopback }
modify gemport loopstate { eth I voip I e1ds1ll I xdsl }
GEMPORTS <1-8> { loopback | no-loopback }
modify gemport { eth | voip | e1ds1ll | xdsl } GEMPORTS <1-
8> loopstate { loopback | no-loopback }
Bridge
Function
Configures alarm severity profile on GEM port.
eth: Ethernet interface
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line interface
xdsl: xDSL port
GEMPORTS: interface address (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-
ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
1 - 8: priority-ID of GEM port
1 - 10: severity table index.
Enables/disables loopback on GPON encapsulation method board.
eth: Ethernet interface
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line interface.
xdsl; xDSL port
GEMPORTS: interface address (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-
ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
1 - 8: priority-ID of GEM port
loopback: loopback enabled
no-loopback: loopback disabled.
Ports
Command
show gemport { table I list } [ ADDRESS ]
show gemport iftype { eth I voip I e1ds1II I xdsl } ADDRESS
<1-8>
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Config/
Bridge
Function
table: table with config data
list: list with config data
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID[/ONU-slot ] ] ].
Displays GEM port table of one specified interface.
eth: Ethernet interface
voip: voice over Internet protocol
e1ds1II:
interface
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/OLT-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
1 - 8: priority-ID of GEM port.
10.2.6
Forward Error Correction
FEC (Forward Error Correction) is supported for both upstream and downstream
transmission. When FEC is enabled, this results in a
but the overhead of transmission is increased about 7%.
Command
gpon fecmode ADDRESS { enable I disable }
gpon fecmode-ont ADDRESS { enable | disable }
Mode
Config
Function
Enable / disable FEC for downstream transmission.
If enabled, non - FEC supporting
s operate without FEC simultaneously with FEC supporting ONUs.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port.
Enable / disable FEC for upstream transmission.
Non - FEC supporting ONUs ignore the command.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 83
84
Ports Operation Manual CLI
10.3
Traffic Management
10.3.1
Priority Mapping
One mapper for 802.1p priority queues is associated with one physical ONT user interface or with an internal IP interface. There is a restriction in the priority mapper configuration. Upstream, the incoming tagged packets are mapped to GEM ports with GEM Port
ID values that differ in the last 0, 1, 2 or 3 LSB depending on ONT type. A priority mapper serves a group of 1, 2, 4 or 8 consecutive GEM Port ID values.
Command
prio-map-range { 1 I 2 I 4 I 8 }
modify prio-map-range { 1 I 2 I 4 I 8 }
priomapper { eth | xdsl } INTERFACE modify <0-8> <0-8>
<0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8>
modify priomapper { eth | xdsl } INTERFACE <0-8> <0-8>
<0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8> <0-8>
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures maximum numbers of GEM ports each priomapper can serve:
1, 2, 4, 8: max. number is 1 ... 8.
Configures .1p mapping.
eth: Ethernet port
xdsl: xDSL port
INTERFACE: OLT-slot/OLT-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 0
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 1
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 2
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 3
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 4
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 5
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 6
1- 8: select index of GEM port for .1p priority 7
0: drop.
Command show base-settings
show priomapper { table | list } [ ADDRESS ]
show priomapper iftype { eth | voip | e1ds1ll l xdsl }
ADDRESS
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays GPON MAC mode and prio map range.
Displays .1p priority mapper.
table: table with configuration data
list: list with configuration data
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID[/ONU-slot]]].
Displays .1p priority mapper for one specified interface.
eth: Ethernet interface
voip: internal voice over IP interface
e1ds1ll: E1 or DS1 leased line interface
xdsl: XDSL port
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port.
10.3.2
Queuing
An upstream priority queue is referenced by GEM ports.
Command
show queue { table I list } [ ADDRESS ]
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays priority queue (upstream) table/list with config data
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]]
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command
queue ADDRESS NUMBER modify <0-65535> <0-255>
{ enabled I disabled } TIME <0-65535> <0-65535>
modify queue ADDRESS NUMBER <0-65535> <0-255>
{ enabled I disabled } TIME <0-65535> <0-65535>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Modifies priority queue (upstream).
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
NUMBER: queue on ONT
0 - 65535: alloccated queue size in GEM block lengths
(Default value is 10)
0 - 255: queue weight for the WRR algorithm used by the traffic scheduler. (Default value is 1).
enabled: enable back pressure operation (default)
disabled: disable back pressure operation
TIME: back pressure time duration in which the customer terminal temporarily suspends sending data in microseconds.
(Default value is 0)
0 - 65535: back pressure start threshold (Default value is 8)
0 - 65535: back pressure stop threshold (Default value is 6)
Note: BackPressureStartThresh > BackPressureStopThresh.
10.3.3
Scheduling
The traffic scheduler accommodates upstream GEM packets after priority queue and transfers the GEM packets toward the T-CONT. The following command shows table
entries that are created automatically by the
.
Command
show scheduler { table I list } [ ADDRESS ]
Mode
Bridge
Function
Displays traffic scheduler (upstream) table/list with config data.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
10.4
Ethernet Port Configuration
10.4.1
CXU Ports
Command
port cu PORTS { enable I disable I test }
port cu PORTS description LINE
port cu PORTS alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables a port on CXU.
PORTS: port number (OLT-slot/OLT-port)
test: configures a port as test port.
Enables port specific description.
LINE: max. number of characters is 100.
Configures port alarm severity for CXU.
1 - 10: severity index.
10.4.2
Large Reach Ethernet (LRE) Port
Command
port lre PORTS { enable I disable I test }
port lre PORTS description LINE
port lre PORTS alarm-severity-profile <1-10>
Mode
Bridge
Function
port on CXU.
PORTS: port number (OLT-slot/OLT-port)
test: configures a port as test port.
port specific description.
LINE: max.number of characters is 100).
Configures LRE port specific alarm severity profile index.
1 - 10: profile index.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 85
Ports Operation Manual CLI
10.4.3
Type and Negotiation
Command
port type PORTS { electrical I optical }
port nego PORTS { force I auto }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures the port type.
PORTS: port number (OLT-slot/OLT-port)
electrical: internal electrical mode (default)
Configures the auto-negotiation of specified port.
force: auto-negotiation disabled
auto: auto-negotiation enabled.
g
Auto-nego is activated in 10/100BASE-TX ports by default.
Even when auto-nego was configured, the transmit rate or the duplex mode of the connected equipment can be changed furthermore. g
It is impossible to configure auto-nego in 100BASE-FX ports (external optical
).
10.4.4
Link Discovery
Command
port link-discovery chassis PORTS A.B.C.D
port link-discovery slot PORTS RMSLOT
port link-discovery port PORTS RMPORT
port link-discovery mode PORTS { none I manual I automatic }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures link discovery (remote shelf IP address) for a specified port.
PORTS: port number (OLT-slot/OLT-port)
A.B.C.D: remote chassis IP address.
Configures link discovery (slot value on remote shelf) for a specified port.
RMSLOT: remote slot number.
Configures link discovery (port value on remote shelf) for a specified port.
RMPORT: remote port number.
Configures link discovery (link discovery mode value) for a specified port.
none, manual, automatic: Set the mode.
10.5
E1/DS1 Port Configuration and Test
automatically creates the entries for each
interface with default settings.
The following commands can be used to modify these E1 /DS1 interface settings.
86 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command Mode
modify e1-config { local I remote } ADDRESS { normal I crc I unframed } { hdb3 I ami } { no I payload I line }
{ none I bit I message } { loop I local I through } { disabled I enabled }
Config
modify ds1-config { local I remote } ADDRESS { esf I d4 }
{ jbzs I b8zs I zbtsi } { no I payload I line} {none I robbedt I message }
{ loop I local I through } { ansi I att I none }
Config
Function
Modifies E1 interface configuration.
local: local interface
remote: remote interface
ADDRESS: local (OLT-slot/OLT-port) or remote (OLTslot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
normal: line type normal
crc: line type CRC
unframed: line type unframed - fixed set!
hdb3: line coding HDB3 - fixed set!
no: loopback config not in loopback state
payload: loopback config loop through the device
line: loopback config only looped back out
none: signal mode no bits are reserved
bit: signal mode channel associated signaling
message: signal mode common channel signaling
loop: transmit clock source recovered receive clock is used
local: transmit clock source local clock source is used
trough: transmit clock source uncovered receive clock from another interface
disabled: channelization is disabled
enabled: channelization is enabled.
Modifies DS1 interface configuration.
local: local interface
remote: remote interface
ADDRESS: local (OLT-slot/OLT-port) or remote (OLTslot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
esf: line type extended super frame
d4: line type AT & T D4 format
jbzs: line coding jammed bit zero suppression
b8zs: eight zero bits
zbtsi: zero byte time slot interchange
no: loopback config not in loopback state
payload: loopback config loop through the device
line: loopback config only looped back out
none: signal mode no bits are reserved
robbed: signal mode channel associated signaling
message: signal mode common channel signaling
loop: transmit clock source recovered receive clock is used
local: transmit clock source local clock source is used
trough: transmit clock source covered receive clock from another interface
disabled: channelization is disabled
enabled: channelization is enabled
Connecting of two E1/DS1 Interfaces
g
Note the following restrictions:
• At one GPON link can be connected not more than 8 E1/DS1-ONT interfaces.
The NE accepts no other connection commands.
• At all GPON links of one IU_GPON can be connected not more than 8 E1/DS1-
ONT interfaces.
• Only the following connections are possible:
1. and 2. E1 port of IU_GPON -> 1. GPON port of IU_GPON
3. and 4. E1 port of IU_GPON -> 2. GPON port of IU_GPON
5. and 6. E1 port of IU_GPON -> 3. GPON port of IU_GPON
7. and 8. E1 port of IU_GPON -> 4. GPON port of IU_GPON
Id:0900d80580257cd9 87
88
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
create e1ds1 connection ADDRESSOLT ADDESSSONT Config Creates connection between 2 E1DS1 interfaces of the same type.
ADDRESSOLT: OLT-slot/OLT-port for interface on OLT side
ADDRESSONT: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONT-slot/ONTport on ONT side.
delete e1ds1 connection CONNECTIONID Config Deletes connection between 2 E1DS1 interfaces of the same type.
CONNECTION: ID of existing connection.
Command
show e1ds1 connections [ [ OLT_SLOT [ [ OLT_PORT ] ] ] ]
Mode
Config
Function
Displays a table of connections between 2 E1DS1 interfaces.
OLT_SLOT: OLT-slot of the IU_GPON (optional)
OLT_PORT: OLT-port for E1DS1 interface (optional).
Configuring Loopback Test
Command
modify loopback-config-e1ds1 remote ADDRESS { no I payload I line }
Mode
Config
Function
Modifies loopback configuration of remote E1DS1 interface.
ADDRESS: remote address (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/
ONT-slot/ONT-port)
no: a device that is not capable of performing a loopback on the interface shall always return this as its value.
payload: the received signal at this interface is looped through the device.Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through framing function of the device.
line:The received signal at this interface does not go through the device (minimum penetration) but is looped back out.
10.6
POTS Configuration and Test
Command
pots changedata PORTS <0-1> <0-255> <0-255> <0-1>
RXGAIN TXGAIN <0-5> <0-2> <0-1>
pots getstateinfo PORTS
Mode Function
Bridge POTS port configuration.
PORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
0 - 1: alarm reporting control, 0=off. 1=on
0 - 255: alarm reporting control interval (0-254 in minutes, 255 for infinity)
0 - 4: impedance, 0=600 Ohm, 1=900 Ohm, 2=complex1,
3=complex2, 4=complex3, 255=invalid (ONU)
0 - 1: transmission path, 0=POTS full, 1=POTS part time
RXGAIN: Rx Gain in 0.1 dB steps from -120 (12 dB) to 60
(6 dB)
TXGAIN: Rx Gain in 0.1 dB steps from -60 (6 dB) to 120
(12 dB)
0 - 5: maintenance mode, 0=off, 1=test tone, 2=normal polarity, 3=reversed polarity, 4=send metering pulses,
5=send ringing pulses
0 - 2: metering signal type, 0=on, 1=silent reversal only,
2=frequency only
0 - 1: feeding, 0=ordinary phone, 1=pay phone.
Config POTS port state information.
PORTS: OLT slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command
show port pots PORTS table
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays POTS port configuration.
PORTS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port
10.7
CATV Port Configuration
g
For detailed information refer to the current release notes.
Command
modify catv ani adminstate ADDRESS { lock | unlock }
modify catv ani-config ADDRESS { off | on } <0-255> <0-5>
{ none | broadband | optical | <0-255> } AGCSETTINGS
modify catv uni-config ADDRESS { off | on } <0-255>
{ enable | disable } { bothBlocked | lowPassed | bothPassed }
Mode
Config
Config
Config
Function
Sets admin state of CATV port.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU- port.
Configures the ANI of CATV interface.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU- port
off: alarm reporting allowed immediately
on: alarm reporting inhibited
0 - 255: length of time in minutes. An interval value of 255 has the special meaning of 'infinity'.
0 - 5: indicates the frequency of the pilot channel receiver.
The unit is Hz. If SignalCapability =0 or 1, this attribute is undefined; If SignalCapability =2 or 3, this attribute is functionally read only; If SignalCapability =4 or 5, this attribute is read-write.
The following parameter allows the discovery and configuration of the ONT's AGC capabilities. It contains code points for the several AGC types. The ONT displays the currently used AGC mode. The OLT can discover new modes via the set command.The code points are:
none: no AGC is used (0)
broadband: broadband RF AGC is used (1)
optical: optical AGC is used (2)
0 - 255: 3-255, reserved for future use
AGCSETTINGS: indicates the measurement offset that the
ONT should use if using broadband RF signal level or total optical power as a basis for AGC.
Enter AGC value (Step-size of 0.1 dB).
Configures the UNI of CATV interface.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU- port
off: alarm reporting allowed immediately
on: alarm reporting inhibited
0 - 255: length of time in minutes. An interval value of 255 has the special meaning of 'infinity'.
Following parameter controls whether power is provided to an external equipment over the video PPTP.
enable: power over COAX
disable: disables power feed
Switching between two fixed pass band plans in order to differentiate the services delivered to the subscriber
bothBlocked: both frequency bands blocked
lowPassed: only low frequency band passed
bothPassed: both frequency bands passed.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 89
Ports Operation Manual CLI
show catv ani if-table show catv uni if-table
Command Mode
Config
Config
Function
Shows ANI interface table.
Shows UNI interface table.
10.8
Checking Port Configuration
show port { PORTS I all }
Command
show port PORTS description
show port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1II I xdsl | catv | ces} PORTS
description
show port link-discovery PORTS
show e1ds1 if-table local [ OLT_SLOT [ OLT_PORT ] ]
show e1ds1 if-table2 local [ OLT_SLOT [ OLT_PORT ] ]
show e1ds1 if-table remote [ OLT_SLOT [ GPON_PORT
[ ONU_ID [ ONT_SLOT [ ONT_PORT ] ] ] ] ]
show e1ds1 if-table2 remote [ OLT_SLOT [ GPON_PORT
[ ONU_ID [ ONT_SLOT [ ONT_PORT ] ] ] ] ]
show traffic-desc-prof table
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Config
Config
Function
Shows configured state of port.
PORTS: port number OLT-slot/OLT-port
all: shows all ports
Shows port specific description (max.number of characters is 100).
Shows port specific description.
gpon: GPON port
eth: Ethernet port
pots: POTS port
e1ds1ll: E1DS1 leased line port
xdsl: xDSL port
catv: CATV port
ces: CES port.
Shows configured link state of port.
Shows table of configured local E1DS1 interfaces.
OLT_SLOT: OLT-slot of the IU_GPON (optional)
OLT_PORT: OLT-port for E1DS1 interface (optional).
Shows table of configured remote E1DS1interfaces.
OLT_SLOT: OLT-slot of the IU_GPON (optional)
GPON_PORT: GPON-port from the IU_GPON
(optional)
ONU_ID: the ONU-ID (optional)
ONT_SLOT: the ONT-slot (optional)
ONT_PORT: ONT-port of E1DS1 interface (optional).
Shows traffic description profile table.
Example
Showing the state of Ethernet ports:
SWITCH(bridge)# show port 9/1-9/4
===============================================================
S/P TYPE ROLE PVID LINK NEGO DUPLEX SPEED FLOWCTRL SFP
===============================================================
9/1 ETH01 Uplk 1 Up/Up Auto Full/Full 10/10 Dis/Dis No/E1
9/2 ETH02 Uplk 1 Up/Up Auto Full/Full 1000/10 Dis/Dis No/E1
9/3 ETH03 Uplk 1 Up/Up Down Full/Full 100/10 Dis/Dis No/E1
9/4 ETH04 Uplk 1 Up/Up Down Full/Full 10/10 Dis/Dis No/E1
SWITCH(bridge)#
The information provided in Table 20
can be verified using the show port command.
Parameter
TYPE
Table 20
Shows type of port,
Description
Information displayed by Show Port Command
90 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI
Parameter
PVID
STATUS
MODE
NEGO
DUP
SPEED
FLOWCTRL
ROLE
Table 20
Description
Shows port VLAN-ID.
Shows status of port.
ADMIN is up/down status by user’s configuration and
OPER is the real connection status of the GPON.
Shows the status for the rate of the port, Duplex mode, auto-nego
Shows the auto-negotiation configuration of the port.
Shows the transmit rate of Ethernet port.
shows the full duplex mode of the port,
Shows flow control of port,
Shows the configured role of the port.
Information displayed by Show Port Command (Cont.)
Command
show ponpptp olt { table | list} [ ADDRESS ]
show ponpptp ont { table | list} [ ADDRESS ]
Mode
Config
Config
Function
Displays information of PON interface on OLT
table: table with config data
list: list,
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port].
Displays information of PON interface on ONT/ONU.
table: table with config data
list: list
ADDRESS: OLT-slot[/GPON-port[/ONU-ID]].
10.9
Port Statistics
10.9.1
Checking Port Statistics
In order to display traffic average of each port or interface
commands.
Command
show port statistics avg-pkt { PORTS I all }
show port statistics interface { PORTS I rcu }
show port statistics ethernet [ PORTS ]
show port statistics dot3 { PORTS I all }
show port state mirror PORTS
show port { gpon I eth I pots I e1ds1ll I voip I xdsl I catv
| ces } PORTS statistics interface
Mode
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows average packets statistic counters of specified port.
PORTS: port number OLT-slot/OLT-port
all: show all ports.
Shows MIB data of specified port.
PORTS: port number OLT-slot/OLT-port
rcu: redundant central unit.
Shows Ethernet statistic counters of specified port.
Shows DOT3 statistic counters of specified port.
Shows state information of mirrored port.
Shows port statistic.
port
eth: Ethernet port
voip:
interface
port
port.
Ports
Id:0900d80580257cd9 91
92
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Example:
Viewing interface MIB data.
SWITCH(bridge)#show port statistics interface 9/1 ifIndex 4 ifDescr Siemens-hiX5750-CCXUVR:1O:4E:E ifType 6 ifMtu 1500 ifSpeed 0 ifPhysAddress 08:00:06:26:1a:6d ifAdminStatus UP ifOperStatus DOWN ifLastChange 0 ifInOctets 0 ifInUcastPkts 0 ifInDiscards 0 ifInErrors 0 ifInUnknownProtos 0 ifOutOctets 0 ifOutUcastPkts 0 ifOutDiscards 0 ifOutErrors 0 ifName eth4 ifInMulticastPkts 0 ifInBroadcastPkts 0 ifOutMulticastPkts 0 ifOutBroadcastPkts 0 ifHCInOctets 0 ifHCInUcastPkts 0 ifHCInMulticastPkts 0 ifHCInBroadcastPkts 0 ifHCOutOctets 0 ifHCOutUcastPkts 0 ifHCOutMulticastPkts 0 ifHCOutBroadcastPkts 0 ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable 1 ifHighSpeed 0 ifPromiscuousMode 2 ifConnectorPresent 1 ifAlias ifCounterDiscontinuityTime 0
SWITCH(bridge)#
10.9.2
Clearing Port Statistics
Use the following commands to clear all recorded statistics of port.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command
clear port statistics interface { PORTS I all }
clear port statistics dot3 [ PORTS ]
clear port statistics ethernet [ PORTS ]
clear port statistics avg-pkt [ PORTS ]
Mode Function
Bridge Clears all recorded port statistics:
PORTS: port number OLT-slot/OLT-port
all: clears all information.
Clears all recorded port statistics.
Clears specified or all recorded port statistics.
Clears specified or all recorded port statistics.
10.10
Performance Monitoring
Use the commands that are described in the following chapters to configure PM objects
services. There are GTC PM managed entities related to
port, GAL Ethernet, ONU,
10.10.1
Configuring the Threshold Profiles
This profile contains threshold values for the performance monitoring parameters. A default profile with index 1 always exist.
Command create threshold-profile-wi
GALETHDISCFRAMES GEMLOSTPACKETS
GEMMISINSPACKETS GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS
<0-15>
modify threshold-profile <2-16>
GALETHDISCFRAMES GEMLOSTPACKETS
GEMMISINSPACKETS GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS
delete threshold-profile <2-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates a threshold profile with index.
GALETHDISCFRAMES: threshold GAL Ethernet disc frames
GEMLOSTPACKETS: threshold GEM lost packets
GEMMISINSPACKETS: threshold GEM miss inserted packets
GEMIMPAIREDBLOCKS: threshold GEM impaired blocks
0 - 15: profile index.
Modifies a threshold profile.
2 - 16: profile index
Deletes a threshold profile.
2 - 16: profile index.
10.10.2
Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects
The algorithms to calculate valid PM objects are the following:
•
GAL Ethernet Index:
slot * 0x08000000 + port * 0x00800000 + onuId * 0x00008000 + onuSlot * 0x00000400 + onuPort * 0x00000008 + gemPortPrio-ID
•
GEM Port Index:
slot * 0x08000000 + port * 0x00800000 + onuId * 0x00008000 + onuSlot * 0x00000400 + onuPort * 0x00000008 + gemPortPrio-ID
•
T-CONT Index:
slot * 0x80000 +
Id:0900d80580257cd9 93
Ports Operation Manual CLI port * 0x08000 + onuId * 0x00080 + serviceClass
Service classes are:0 = tdm1 = voip3 = data-be4 = data-nrt5 = data-rt
•
PON PPTP Index:
slot * 100 + port
•
Interface Index:
IfIndex = ((OltSlot - 1) * 10240000) + ((OltPort - 1) * 2560000) + ((OnuId + 1) * 10000)
+ (OntSlot * 100) + OntPort
•
Physical Index MDU Service Board (SB):
Left shelf side:
SB-CARD: Slot * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5 + OnuCard * 2 + 1
Right shelf side:
SB-CARD: (Slot - 2) * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5 + OnuCard * 2 + 1
•
ONU Physical Port:
Left shelf side:
ONU: Slot * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5 + 1
MDU: Slot * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5
Right shelf side:
ONU: (Slot - 2) * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5 + 1
MDU: (Slot - 2) * 2^17 + Port * 2^13 + OnuId * 2^5
94 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Ports Operation Manual CLI
10.10.3
Configuring of PM Objects
create pm-object <1-6> <1-4294967295> <1-3> <1-96>
<1-16>
Command
create pm-object { gem-port | gal-ethernet | onu | tcont | ponpptp } <1-4294967295> { olt | ont | no } <1-96> <1-16>
delete pm-object <1-1024>
modify pm-object <1-1024> {1 I 2 } <1-96> <1-16>
change adminstate pm-object <1-1024> { 1 I 2 }
ADMIN_STATE
Mode Function
Config Creates a PM object.
1 - 6: type of PM object (1=GEM port, 2=not used, 3=GAL Ethernet,
4=ONU, 5=T-CONT, 6=PonPptp)
1 - 4294967295: type index of PM object (GEM Port/GAL-Ethernet -
GEM port index; ONU - phys. index; TCONT - TCont Index; PON-
Pptp - Interface index)
1 - 3: endpoint of PM object (1-ONT; 2-OLT; 3-no endpoint)
If the PM data are collected for the managed entities GEM port, GAL
Ethernet, this attribute is used to select between monitoring points that are located at ONT or OLT. If the PM data are collected for the managed entities ONU, T-CONT or PonPptp, this attribute is don’t care.
1 - 96: history entry size
The default value is 1 and means at least one history entry is desired. In case of PM object creation the number of 15 min. entries is set and the number of 24 h entries is always 1.
1 - 16: index of threshold profile.
Creates a PM object of specified type,
gem-port: 1-GEM Port
gal-ethernet: 3-GAL Ethernet
onu: 4-ONU
tcont: 5- TCONT
ponpptp: 6-PON Pptp
1 - 4294967295: type index of PM object (GEM Port/GAL-Ethernet -
GEM port index; ONU - phys. index; TCONT - TCont Index; PON-
Pptp - Interface index)
olt: endpoint of PM object is the OLT
ont: endpoint of PM object is ONT
no: no endpoint
1 - 96: history entry size
1 - 16: index of threshold profile.
Deletes a PM object.
1 - 1024: index of the PM object.
Modifies a PM object.
1 - 1024: index of the PM object
1 | 2: interval type (15 min./24 h)
1 - 96: history entry size
1 - 16: index of threshold profile.
Config Used to activate and deactivate performance monitoring for both interval types of the PM object.
1 - 1024: index of the PM object
1 | 2: interval type (15 min./24 h)
ADMIN_STATE: 0 locked,1 active.
10.10.4
Displaying the PM Data
Command
show gpon-pm table
show gpon-pm table-list
show gpon-pm remaining-history-entries
Mode Function
Config Shows the whole GPON PM table.
Exec/
Config
Shows the whole GPON PM table in list format (Overview).
Config Shows the number of remaining history entries.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 95
96
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Command
show tcont pm-data <1-1024>
show tcont pm-object-list
show gemport pm-data <1-1024>
show gemport pm-object-list [ <1-1024> [ <1-1024> ] ]
show gal-eth pm-data <1-1024>
show gal-eth pm-object-list [ <1-1024> [ <1-1024> ] ]
show ponpptp pm-data <1-1024>
show ponpptp pm-object-list
show onu pm_records [ <1-1024> ]
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows list of PM data for TCONT.
1 - 1024: PM object index.
Displays all T-CONT PM objects.
Shows GPON encapsulation method port.
pm-data: list PM data for gemport
1 - 1024: PM object index.
Shows GPON encapsulation method port.
pm-object-list: list PM objects
1 - 1024: start index for searching, shows all if left blank
1 - 1024: end index for searching, shows only the first if left blank.
Config/
Bridge
Shows GPON adaption layer Ethernet.
data for gal-eth (gemport)
1 - 1024: PM object index.
Shows GPON adaption layer Ethernet.
pm-object-list: list PM objects
1 - 1024: start index for searching, shows all if left blank
1 - 1024: end index for searching, shows only the first if left blank.
Config Show PM data for PON PPTP,
1 - 1024: PM object index.
Config Show all PON PPTP PM objects.
Config Displays the ONU PM record table.
1 - 1024: PM object index.
10.11
Payload-Counters
Payload-counters allow the operator to have a differentiated view on the current status
of Ethernet traffic on the optical link between IU_GPON and
in upstream and downstream direction. Several counters can be set in the configuration that count the number of payload bytes of a specific traffic flow up to a total of 2
64
.
10.11.1
Configuring of Payload-Counter
In order to prepare payload-counters in the configuration, the following steps are required:
1.
2. Modifying the configuration as described in the sections
•
Assigning the User Ports to Counter Group
•
Assigning of Multicast/Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group
•
3.
Activating the Configuration with Payload-Counters
.
10.11.1.1
Loading the Configuration
Before a command that configure the payload-counters for a particular traffic flow through the GPON link can be executed, the configuration needs to be loaded from
CXU’s persistent memory. When the configuration is loaded for the first time, the groups of counters are not assigned (default). Consecutively, the last activated configuration is available.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI
Command
modify payload-counter ADDRESS config load
Mode Function
Config Loads the configuration from background. Necessary before all further payload-counter configurations.
ADDRESS: IU_GPON port (OLT-slot/GPON-port).
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 config load
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config config for pon link 2/1 is available
PAYLOAD-COUNTER VLAN TABLE counter# | vlan
---------+--------
1 | none
2 | none
3 |
4 |
5 | none none none
6 |
7 |
8 | none none none
PAYLOAD-COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group : none vlan mapping bit : invalid
PAYLOAD-COUNTER UNICAST CONFIGURATION
| interface type | address
|| counter | vlan
|| group | mapping
-----------+---------------++----------+-------ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 || none | invalid ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 2 || none | invalid ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 3 || ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 4 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 5/ 1 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 2/ 1 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 2 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 3 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 4 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 || none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid none | invalid
Ports
Id:0900d80580257cd9 97
98
Ports Operation Manual CLI
PAYLOAD-COUNTER NAMES
1 ""
2 ""
3 ""
4 ""
...
64 ""
10.11.1.2
Naming of Counter Groups
Each counter group can be marked with a specific name. Use the following command to configure names for counter groups. Changes made by this command take effect immediately, i.e. without the necessity of activation and they remain valid independently of executing a config load command.
Command
modify payload-counter ADDRESS set config-name
<1-64> [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Configures name for specified counter group.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port as specified with config load command
1 - 64 : counter group
LINE: name for counter group (max. 24 characters)
Use this command without LINE option to delete the name of specified counter group.
Example:
Setting the name of counter group number 4 to “name with spaces including spaces)
“ (24 characters
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set counter-name 4 test with spaces
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config names
PAYLOAD-COUNTER NAMES
1 ""
2 "nsn 2"
3 "nsn 3"
4 "name with spaces
5 ""
...
63 "nsn63"
64 ""
"
10.11.1.3
Assigning the User Ports to Counter Group
Use the following set of commands in order to modify the configuration so that counter groups are assigned to unicast traffic flows on the path between IU_GPON port and
port. Each of up to 64 counter groups consist of 8 counters for downstream respectively upstream. One counter group may be assigned to one or more UNI ports. The number of bytes through the addressed ports is counted in the dedicated group.
Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports g
Note the following remarks for the usage of set and clear commands:
• The sequence of entering the commands decides about the operative configuration. This means that the last executed command overwrites settings of the previous one (e.g. uc command after onu command and vice versa). Hence, in this case there is no necessity to enter a clear command between.
• All configuration changes caused by these commands are only temporary as long as the activate command is not executed.
•
VLANFLAG has to be considered only if the
mode”
operation, see 13.1 Setting the GPON MAC Mode
.
• OLTADDRESS must be the same IU_GPON port that was specified in
ADDRESS of config load command.
• The clear commands cancel for the addressed ports the assignment of counter groups. This is the default status that will be reported as “none”.
Command
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set interface
{ ces | eth | voip | xdsl } ADDRESS <1-64> <0-1>
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set onu-card
ADDRESS <1-64> <0-1>
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set onu ADDRESS
<1-64> <0-1>
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set uc <1-64> <0-1>
Mode Function
Config Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via one
ONU port of specified interface type.
OLTADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port
eth, voip, xdsl, ces: type of interface can be eth, voip, xdsl, ces
(Circuit Emulation Services - whole Ethernet traffic encapsulat-
ing ONU’s TDM traffic of unstructured least lines
)
ADDRESS: address from UNI port (OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-
ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port)
1 - 64 : counter group
0 - 1: flag controls whether the used counter depends on VLAN
or not, see 10.11.1.5 Mapping VLAN to Counter
.
1: true - count VLAN traffic enable
0: false - count VLAN traffic disable.
Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all ports of specified ONU-card.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all ports of specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID
Modifies the configuration for counting unicast bytes via all
USED/CONFIGURED interfaces of loaded GPON link.
Use the following commands to clear the payload-counters associated with the
ports.
Command Mode Function
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear interface
{ ces | eth | voip | xdsl } ADDRESS
Config Clears the configuration for one ONU port of specified interface type.
OLTADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port
eth, voip, xdsl, ces: type of interface
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ ONU-port.
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear onu-
card ADDRESS
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear onu
ADDRESS
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear uc
Clears the configuration for all ports of specified ONU-card.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot.
Clears the configuration for all ports of specified ONU.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONU-ID.
Clears the configuration for all USED/CONFIGURED unicast interfaces.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 99
Ports Operation Manual CLI
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set interface eth
2/1/24/4/3 13 1
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config uc
PAYLOAD-COUNTER UNICAST CONFIGURATION
| interface || counter | vlan type | address || group | mapping
------------+----------------++---------+-------ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 || 52 | invalid ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 2 || ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 3 || ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 4 ||
52 | invalid
52 | invalid
52 | invalid
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 || 52 | invalid
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 5/ 1 || none | invalid
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 2/ 1 || 11 | valid ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 2 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 3 || none | invalid none | invalid
13 | valid ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 4 || none | invalid
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 || none | invalid
10.11.1.4
Assigning of Multicast/Broadcast Traffic to Counter Group
Use the following commands to configure payload-counters for MC /BC traffic flow through the GPON link.
Command Mode Function
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set mc <1-64> <0-1> Config Modifies the configuration for counting multicast bytes.
OLTADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port
1 - 64 : counter group
0 - 1: flag controls whether the used counter depends on
VLAN or not, see 10.11.1.5 Mapping VLAN to Counter
1: true - count VLAN traffic enable
0: false - count VLAN traffic disable.
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear mc Clears the configuration for counting multicast bytes.
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set mc 23 1
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config mc
PAYLOAD-COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group : vlan mapping bit :
23
valid
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 clear mc
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config mc
PAYLOAD-COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group : none vlan mapping bit : invalid
100 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
10.11.1.5
Mapping VLAN to Counter
The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to use counters for a certain
traffic:
1. The “enhanced
mode” is set for OLT’s VLAN operation
2. VLANFLAG is set true for the addressed ports.
In case of former “MAC mode” and “
mode”, or if the VLANFLAG is set to false, the whole interface traffic will be always counted in the first counter of group.
g
Note that the configured relation between VLAN and counter is valid for all counter groups of the chosen GPON link.
Use the following commands to allocate payload-counters for VLAN related services.
Command Mode Function
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS set vlan <1-8> <1-4094> Config Modifies the configuration for counter assigned to VLAN.
OLTADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port
1 - 8: counter in group
1 - 4094: VLAN-ID.
modify payload-counter OLTADDRESS clear vlan <1-8> Clears the assignment of counter to VLANs.
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 1 100
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 2 300
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 3 400
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 4 600
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 5 800
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 set vlan 7 1000
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config vlan
PAYLOAD-COUNTER VLAN TABLE counter# | vlan
----------+--------
1 | 100
2 |
3 |
4 |
300
400
600
5 |
6 |
800 none
7 | 1000
8 | none
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 clear vlan 7
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config vlan
PAYLOAD-COUNTER VLAN TABLE counter# | vlan
----------+--------
1 | 100
2 |
3 |
4 |
300
400
600
Id:0900d80580257cd9 101
Ports Operation Manual CLI
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
800 none none none
10.11.1.6
Activating the Configuration with Payload-Counters
When all required set and clear commands were entered, there is the necessity to activate the new configuration for following reasons:
• In order that the modified configuration can be restored after the active CXU or the
IU_GPON have been rebooted, it must be stored back into CXU’s persistent memory. Otherwise, all made changes will be lost.
• Without activation, the counter settings will be overwritten when a new temporary configuration (for another GPON link or same as before) is loaded from background.
• If the config load command is executed the next time, then the new configuration will be loaded.
Use the following command to activate the new configuration. g
On active IU_GPON, the counting starts immediately from zero.
Command
modify payload-counter ADDRESS config activate
Mode Function
Config Activates the new configuration. The CXU sets the new configuration on IU_GPON.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port.
Example
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter 2/1 config activate
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter config config for pon link 2/1 is available
PAYLOAD-COUNTER VLAN TABLE counter# | vlan
----------+--------
1 | 100
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
300
400
600
800 none none none
PAYLOAD-COUNTER MULTICAST CONFIGURATION counter group : vlan mapping bit :
23
valid
PAYLOAD-COUNTER UNICAST CONFIGURATION
102 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI type
|
|
interface
address
|| counter | vlan
|| group | mapping
------------+----------------++---------+---------+-------ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 || 63 | invalid ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 2 || 63 | invalid ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 3 || ethernet | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 4 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 1/ 1 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/20/ 5/ 1 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 2/ 1 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 2 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 3 || ethernet | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 4 ||
VoIP | 2/ 1/24/ 4/ 1 ||
63 | invalid
63 | invalid
63 | invalid
63 | invalid
2 | valid none | invalid none | invalid
12 | valid none | invalid none | invalid
PAYLOAD-COUNTER NAMES
1 ""
2 "nsn 2"
...
63 "nsn63"
64 ""
Ports
10.11.1.7
Checking the Configuration
Use the following command to verify the payload-counters of loaded configuration.
Command Mode Function
show payload-counter config [ names | ponlink | vlan | mc | uc [ ADDRESS ] ]
Config Shows specified of all payload-counter information.
names: names of counter groups
ponlink: currently loaded GPON link
vlan: assignment of VLANs to the counter of groups
mc: counter group for multicast/broadcast traffic and the VLAN flag
uc: assignment of counter groups to user ports and the corresponding VLAN flags
ADDRESS: limits the shown user ports as specified by slot/port/ONU-ID[/ONU-slot].
10.11.2
Checking the Payload-Counter Values
Perform the following tasks in order to get information about the status of payloadcounters:
1.
Getting and Resetting the Payload-Counter Values
2.
.
g
payload-counter values will be not saved in the history. This means:
• During operation, only such data, which were released by the last executed get command, can be displayed.
• Rebooting the active CXU causes the loss of counters.
Id:0900d80580257cd9 103
Ports Operation Manual CLI
10.11.2.1
Getting and Resetting the Payload-Counter Values
Data may get from all counters or from a particular counter, with or without resetting the counters, by using the following commands.
g
Note that reset commands are executed without displaying any information.
Command Mode Function
modify payload-counter get single ADDRESS <1-64> <1-8> <0-1> Config Gets the value from ONE counter.
ADDRESS: slot/port
1 - 64 : counter group
1 - 8: counter in group
0 -1: flag controls whether counters are reset after the data have been got or not
1: true - reset counter
0: false - no reset.
modify payload-counter reset single ADDRESS <1-64> <1-8>
modify payload-counter get all ADDRESS <0-1>
modify payload-counter reset all ADDRESS
Config
Resets the current counter value to ZERO.
Gets all counter values from specified GPON link.
Resets all current counter values from GPON link to
ZERO.
Examples
Get counter 4 of group 2 without reset:
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter get single 2/1 2 4 0
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter counter single single PAYLOAD COUNTER ponlink 2/1 counter group 2 "nsn 2" counter 4 time of request : 2008-06-09 11:10:30 upstream : downstream:
0
0
Reset counter 4 of group 2:
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter reset single 2/1 2 4
Reset of all counter on GPON link 2/1:
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter reset all 2/1
10.11.2.2
Displaying the Counter Values
After executing the last get command, use the following commands to display the counter information. g
Note the following remarks:
• Not assigned counter groups are marked as UNUSED.
• Counters without assigned VLAN are not displayed
• For each used counter group, the total is displayed.
104 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI Ports
Command Mode Function
show payload-counter counter ponlink [ <1-64> [ <1-64> ] ] Config Shows information for all or specified counter groups from last
"get all" request.
1 - 64: counter group - start-index group1 for show
1 - 64: counter group - end-index group2 for show -- show only group1 if goup2 is left blank.
show payload-counter counter single
Shows the counter information from last "get single" request.
Examples
The following examples illustrates the reports for the case that the OLT runs in enhanced MAC mode.
1. Displaying of all counter groups which were got and reset:
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter get all 2/1 1
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter counter ponlink
PAYLOAD COUNTER for ponlink 2/1 time of last request: 2008-06-09 11:09:15 group | # | vlan || upstream | downstream
===============================================================
1 ""
| | UNUSED ||
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
2 "nsn 2"
| 1 | all/ 100 ||
| 2 | 300 ||
0 |
0 |
0
0
| 3 |
| 4 |
| 5 |
400 ||
600 ||
800 ||
0 |
0 |
0 |
0
0
0
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
| | S U M || 0 | 0
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
3 "nsn 3"
| | UNUSED ||
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
4 "name with spaces "
| | UNUSED ||
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
...
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
62
|
""
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
63 "nsn63"
Id:0900d80580257cd9 105
Ports Operation Manual CLI
| 1 | all/ 100 ||
| 2 | 300 ||
| 3 |
| 4 |
| 5 |
400 ||
600 ||
800 ||
| | S U M ||
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
64 ""
| | UNUSED ||
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
2. Displaying of the used payload-counters of single counter group #32:
0
0
0
0
0
0
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter counter ponlink 32
PAYLOAD COUNTER for ponlink 2/1 time of last request: 2008-06-09 11:09:15 group | # | vlan || upstream | downstream
===============================================================
32 ""
------|---|----------||-----------------------|----------------
| 1 | all/ 100 || 0 | 0
| 2 | 300 || 0 | 0
| 3 |
| 4 |
| 5 |
400 ||
600 ||
800 ||
0 |
0 |
0 |
0
0
0
| | S U M || 0 | 0
3. Displaying of the payload-counter #1 of group #63
SWITCH(config)# modify payload-counter get single 2/1 63 1 0
SWITCH(config)# show payload-counter counter single single PAYLOAD COUNTER ponlink 2/1 counter group 63 "nsn63" counter 1 time of request : 2008-06-09 11:11:03 upstream : 0 downstream: 0
106 Id:0900d80580257cd9
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
11 XDSL
This chapter contains all needed information for line configuration, line supervision, and
2+ and
2 interfaces. In the hiX 5750 R2.0, xDSL functionality is provided by the hiX 5709
which supports VDSL2 and ADSL2+ standards via service boards. In order to configure the xDSL services following steps are necessary:
1. Configuring of XDSL profiles
•
•
•
•
•
2.
3.
.
Note the following hints and conditions of application before starting ADSL configuration:
• 1 : 1 relation between
and bridge port
• 1 to 8 VCC, bridge ports per physical port
• 1 to 2 channels per physical port possible
• By default exist 1 channel, 1 VCC, bridge port per physical port
• VCC can be assigned to any channel
• Additional channel can be created/deleted by operator (switch between single and dual latency)
• Before deleting a channel the assigned VCCs/bridge ports must be deleted or assigned to another channel (no unassigned VCC with invalid used channel possible)
• Additional VCCs and bridge ports can be created/deleted by operator (no automatic creation or deletion with channel)
• To switch the configuration from ADSL2+ to VDSL2, not more than 1 VCC/bridge port must be assigned to each channel. Additional VCC/bridge ports must be deleted by the operator before.
11.1
Line Profiles
This profile includes common attributes describing both ends of the line. It is required for all physical xDSL interfaces.
g
This characters are not allowed for profilename (size 1..32): space : ? , leading integer.
11.1.1
Creating/Deleting a Profile
Command
xdsl add line-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl delete line-config-profile PROFILE
Mode Function
Bridge Creates xDSL line-config profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Deletes xDSL line-config profile.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 107
XDSL
Command
xdsl duplicate line-config-profile SOURCE-PROFILE
NEW-PROFILE
Operation Manual CLI
Mode Function
Bridge Copies a line profile.
SOURCE-PROFILE: name of origin line profile.
NEW-PROFILE: name of new line profile.
11.1.2
Configuration
The commands configuring the line profile are contained in the sections:
•
VDSL2 Profile, GS Standard, Bandplan
•
•
Rate Mode, RX Power, Max. Aggregate Power
•
Max. nominal PSD, Bit-Swapping, Subcarrier Mask
•
•
•
•
.
g
Before parameters of line profile can be modified, the port has to be in locked state. g
Preconditions for profile modification are:
• The profile should not be in use by active ports.
• A modification of VDSL2 profile number, in a way that it causes new subcarrier spacing is not allowed for profiles, which are assigned to a VDSL2 line.
• A modification of GS standard, in a way that it causes a new DSL standard
(VDSL2 -> ADSL2+ or back) is not allowed for profiles, which are assigned to a
DSL line.
• The activation of ADSL2+ and VDSL2 standard’s inside one profile is not allowed.
VDSL2 Profile, GS Standard, Bandplan
A clear target of the VDSL2 standard was to adopt a single line code in cooperation with established DSL standardization bodies. Therefore, VDSL2 is based on both the VDSL1 and ADSL2/ADSL2+ recommendations. It is spectrally compatible with existing services and enables multimode operability with ADSL2 and ADSL2+. The hiX 5750 R2.0 uses
VDSL2 configuration profiles and bandplans to meet regional service provider requirements. VDSL2 also defines asymmetric (Plan 998) and symmetric (Plan 997) bandplans for the transmission in upstream and downstream direction. As in ADSL, the lower part of the spectra is allocated for POTS and ISDN service and a splitter is used to separate such frequencies from the VDSL2 band. Annex A specifies bandplans for the North American region and enables VDSL2 to be deployed with POTS service. Annex B specifies bandplans for Europe and enables VDSL2 deployment with underlying POTS and ISDN services. Annex C describes VDSL2 found primarily in Japan.
g
A mix of enabled VDSL and ADSL standards, or ADSL POTS and ISDN standards will be rejected by the NE.
g
Refer to the current release notes for information about supported xDSL
bandplans and profiles. Note that the possibility of settings can change with new firmware updates for the DSL chipset.
108 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
The HiX 5709-003 MDU is prepared to provide via its xDSL service boards the following bandplans and profiles:
• Profiles: 8b, 12a, 17a + US0 (17b), 30a (SB_xDSL12 only)
• Band plan: 998
• VDSL2 over ISDN - PSD:
– B8-6/998-M2x-B
– B8-8/998E17-M2x-NUS0
– B8-12/998ADE17-M2x-B
– B8-15/998ADE30-M2x-NUS0-M
• VDSL2 over POTS - PSD:
– B8-4/998-M2x-A
– B8-11/998ADE17-M2x-A
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE use-profile-
number { profile8a I profile8b I profile8c | profile8d I
profile12a I profile12b I profile17a I profile17b |
profile30a }
Mode Function
Bridge Selects VDSL2 profile which should be used for basic parameter configuration on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
profile8a: 8A (8.8 MHz bandwidth, 2048 tones, 17.5 dBm line power)
profile8b: 8B (8.8 MHz bandwidth, 2048 tones, 20.5 dBm line power)
profile8c: 8C (8.5 MHz Bandwidth, 1972 Tones, 11.5 dBm Line Power)
profile8d: 8D (8.8 MHz bandwidth, 2048 tones, 14.5 dBm line power)
profile12a: 12A (12 MHz bandwidth, 2783 tones, 14.5 dBm line power)
profile12b: 12B (12 MHz bandwidth, 2783 tones, 14.5 dBm line power)
profile17a: 17A (17 MHz bandwidth, 4096 tones, 14.5 dBm line power)
profile17b: 17A + US0
profile30a: 30A (30 MHz bandwidth, 3479 tones, 14.5 dBm line power)
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE profile-gs-
standard { ansi-t1-413 | adsl-pots | adsl-isdn | adsl2-pots | adsl2-isdn | reach-ext-adsl2-pots-m1| reach-ext-adsl2-pots-m2 | ext-up-adsl2-pots | adsl2plus-pots | adsl2plus-isdn | ext-up-adsl2plus-pots | vdsl2-region-a | vdsl2-region-b | vdsl2-region-c }
Bridge Configures the used standard compliance (selects either single mode or combine all and system selects) on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
ansi-t1-413: ANSI T1.413-1998 Standard
adsl-isdn: G.992.1 ADSL ISDN non overlapped
adsl-pots: G.992.1 ADSL POTS non overlapped
adsl2-pots: G.992.3 ADSL2 POTS non overlapped
adsl2-isdn: G.992.3 ADSL2 ISDN non overlapped
reach-ext-adsl2-pots-m1: G.992.3 Reach Ext ADSL2 POTS non overlapped M1
reach-ext-adsl2-pots-m2: G.992.3 Reach Ext ADSL2 POTS non overlapped M2
ext-up-adsl2-pots: G.992.3 Ext Up ADSL2 POTS non overlapped
adsl2plus-pots: G.992.5 ADSL2+ POTS non overlapped
ext-up-adsl2plus-pots: G.992.5 Ext Up ADSL2+ POTS non overlapped
adsl2plus-isdn: G.992.5 ADSL2+ ISDN non overlapped
vdsl2-region-a: G.993.2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region A
vdsl2-region-b: G.993.2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region B
vdsl2-region-c : G.993.2 VDSL2 non overlapped Region C
Id:0900d80580256ef1 109
XDSL Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
band-plan-number {itu-annexa-m1-eu32 | itu-annexa-m9-eu64 | itu-annexa-m1-adlu32 | itu-annexa-m9-adlu64 | 997-m1c-a-7 | 997-m1x-m-8 |
997-m1x-m | 997-m2x-m-8 | 997-m2x-a | 997-m2x-m |
998-m1x-a | 998-m1x-b | 998-m1x-nus0 | 998-m2x-a |
998-m2x-m | 998-m2x-m17 | 998-m2x-b |
998-m2x-b17 | 998-m2x-nus0 | 998-m2x-nus017 | itu-annexc | itu-annexc-8k | 997e30-m2x-nus0 | itu-annexc-1m1 | itu-annexc-8k-1m1 | 998e17-m2x-a |
998e17-m2x-nus0 | anfp-cal0-long | anfp-cal0-medium | anfp-cal0-short | anfp-cal0e-short | korea-fttcab | korea-fttcab-8k | hanaro-fttcab-8k | ituannexc-fttex-a | itu-annexc-fttex-m | itu-annexc-fttcab-a | itu-annexc-fttcab-a-8k | itu-annexc-fttcab-m | itu-annexc-fttcab-m-8k | itu-annexa-m10-eu128 | annexa-m1-eu32 | annexa-m2-eu36 | annexa-m3-eu40 | annexa-m4-eu44 | annexa-m5-eu48 | annexa-m6-eu52 | annexa-m7-eu56 | annexa-m8-eu60 | annexa-m9-eu64 | annexa-eu128 | annexa-m1-adlu32 | annexa-m2-adlu36 | annexa-m3-adlu40 | annexa-m4-adlu44 | annexa-m5-adlu48 | annexa-m6-adlu52 | annexa-m7-adlu56 | annexa-m8-adlu60 | annexa-m9-adlu64 | annexa-adlu128 | annexb-997-m1c-a-7 | annexb-997-m1x-m-8 | annexb-997-m1x-m | annexb-997-m2x-m-8 | annexb-997-m2x-a | annexb-997-m2x-m | annexb-997-hpe17-m1-nus0 | annexb-997-hpe30-m1-nus0 | annexb-997-e17-m2x-nus0 | annexb-997-e30-m2x-nus0 | annexb-998-m1x-a | annexb-998-m1x-b | annexb-998-m1x-nus0 | annexb-998-m2x-a | annexb-998-m2x-m | annexb-998-m2x-b | annexb-998-m2x-nus0 | annexb-998-e17-m2x-nus0 | annexb-998-e17-m2x-nus0-m | annexb-998-ade17-m2x-nus0-m | annexb-998-ade17-m2x-a | annexb-998-ade17-m2x-b | annexb-998-e30-m2x-nus0 | annexb-998-e30-m2x-nus0-m | annexb-998-ade30-m2x-nus0-m | annexb-998-ade30-m2x-nus0-a | annexb-998-ade17-m2x-m | annexb-998-e17-m2x-a | itu-vdsl2-annexc-fttcab-a | itu-vdsl2-annexc-fttcab-m | itu-vdsl2-annexc-fttex-a | itu-vdsl2-annexc-fttex-m | itu-vdsl2-annexc-o-adsl | itu-vdsl2-annexc-o-tcmisdn | ansi-fttcab-m1 | ansi-fttcab-m2 | ansi-fttex-m1 | ansi-fttex-m2 | etsi-fttcab-pcab-m1 | etsi-fttcab-pcab-m2 | etsi-fttex-p1-m1-o-isdn | etsi-fttex-p1-m2-o-isdn | etsi-fttex-p2-m1-o-pots | etsi-fttex-p2-m2-o-pots | itu-vdsl1-annexe-e2-pcaba-m1 | hanaro-fttcab | anfp-cal0 }
Bridge Selects the band plan number which should be used for basic parameter configuration.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Enter a supported band plan.
110 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
Line Type
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE linetype
{ no-channel | fast-only | interleaved-only | fast-or-interleaved | fast-and-interleaved }
Mode Function
Bridge Configures channelization of the line i.e. which channel type(s) are supported.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
no-channel: no channels exist.
fast-only: only fast channel exists.
interleaved-only: only interleaved channel exists.
fast-or-interleaved: either fast or interleaved channel exists (only one at a time)
fast-and-interleaved: both fast and interleaved channels exist.
Rate Mode, RX Power, Max. Aggregate Power
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ down-rate-mode I up-rate-mode }
{ fixed I adapt-at-init I adapt-at-runtime }
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE max-up-rx-pwr
MAX_RCV_POWER
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ down-max-pwr I up-max-pwr } <0-255>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures rate mode on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-rate-mode: rate selection behaviour downstream
up-rate-mode: rate selection behaviour upstream
fixed: force to configured rate
adapt-at-init: adapt to line quality
adapt-to-runtime: seamless rate adapts during runtime based upon line quality
Bridge Configures max. Rx power upstream on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
MAX_RCV_POWER: value from 0 to 25.5 dBm in steps of 0.1 dBm (default
25.5 dBm)
Bridge Configures max. aggregate power on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-max-pwr: max. aggregate downstream power
up-max-pwr: max. aggregate upstream power
fixed: force to configured rate
0 - 255: value from 0 to 25.5 dBm in steps of 0.1 dBm (default 0 dBm)
Max. nominal PSD, Bit-Swapping, Subcarrier Mask
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ down-max-nom-psd | up-max-nom-psd }
MAX_NOM_PSD
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ down-bitswap I up-bitswap } { enable I disable }
Mode Function
Bridge
during initialization and showtime.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-max-nom-psd: max. nominal transmit PSD in downstream direction during initialization and showtime.
up-max-nom-psd: max. nominal transmit PSD in upstream direction during initialization and showtime.
MAX_NOM_PSD: Value between -600...-300 in 0.1 dBm/Hz.
Bridge Enables/disables downstream/upstream bit swapping on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 111
XDSL Operation Manual CLI
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
custom-subc-mask { upstream | downstream }
[ BINSET ]
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
subcarrier-mask-use { enable | disable }
SNR Magin Values
Mode Function
Bridge Sets user selection for any of the 512 ADSL bins (1 bit per Bin).
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
upstream: upstream subcarrier mask
downstream: downstream subcarrier mask
BINSET: 128 values like 123456789ABCDEF (CR resets mask to 64 x FF)
- only for ADSL.
Depending on the used standard, only a subset of bin's will be used.
Example: G992.1 (ADSL) AnnexA bin 1-32 related to US and bin 33-256 related to DS direction. G992.1 (ADSL) AnnexB bin 1-64 related to US and bin 65-256 related to DS direction. For G.992.3, G.992.4, and G.992.5, it is defined in the corresponding recommendations.
Bridge Enables/Disables usage of the subcarrier mask.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ down-max-snr-mgn I down-min-snr-mgn I down-tgt-snr-mgn I up-max-snr-mgn I up-min-snr-mgn I up-tgt-snr-mgn } <0-310>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ vtuc-down-snr-mgn I vtuc-up-snr-mgn I vtur-down-snr-mgn I vtur-up-snr-mgn } <0-310>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ vtuc-down-snr-time I vtuc-up-snr-time I vtur-down-snr-time I vtur-up-snr-time } <0-16383>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ msg-min-up | msg-min-down } <4-248>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures max./min SNR margin on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-max-snr-mgn: max. downstream SNR margin
down-min-snr-mgn: min. downstream SNR margin
down-tgt-snr-mgn: target downstream SNR margin the tranceiver must achieve
up-max-snr-mgn: max. upstream SNR margin
up-min-snr-mgn: min. upstream SNR margin
up-tgt-snr-mgn: target upstream SNR margin the tranceiver must achieve
0 - 310: value from 0-31 dBm in steps of 0.1dBm
Bridge Sets SNR margin for rate downshift/upshift on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
vtuc-down-snr-mgn: SNR margin for rate downshift
vtuc-up-snr-mgn: SNR margin for rate upshift VTU-C (upstream)
vtur-down-snr-mgn: SNR margin for rate downshift VTU-R (downstream)
tur-up-snr-mgn: SNR margin for rate upshift VTU-R (downstream))
0 - 310: value from 0-31 dBm in steps of 0.1dBm
Bridge Sets SNR margin the downshift/upshift min. time on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
vtuc-down-snr-time: min. time that current margin < DownshiftSnrMgnbefore downshift
vtuc-up-snr-time: min. time that current margin > UpshiftSnrMgnbefore upshift VTU-C (upstream) occurs.
vtur-down-snr-time: min. time that current margin < DownshiftSnrMgnbefore downshift VTU-R (downstream) occurs.
vtur-up-snr-time: min. time that current margin > UpshiftSnrMgnbefore upshift VTU-R (downstream) occurs.
0 - 16383: value in seconds
Bridge Configures the min. rate of message based overhead maintained by the xTU in the upstream / downstream direction
PROFILE: enter the profile name
4 - 248: value in kbps
Power Back-off (PBO)
To improve spectral compatibility, VDSL systems on short lines need to reduce their transmit PSDs such that the performance of other broadband systems will not be unfairly compromised. The process of reducing the PSDs of VDSL according to frequency and electrical loop lengths is known as power back-off (PBO).
Downstream PBO
112 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE { down-pbo-esel I down-pbo-esel-min } <0-512>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE down-pbo-mus
<0-255>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE down-pbo-fmin
<0-2048>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE down-pbo-fmax
<32-4095>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE dpbo-epsd add
<1-4095> <0-255>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures power backoff assumed electrical length of xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-pbo-esel: downstream power backoff assumed electrical length
0 - 255.5: values in steps of 0.5 dB (0 = PBO disabled)
down-pbo-esel-min: downstream power backoff assumed minimum electrical length.
0 - 512: values in steps of 0.5 dB (default 512). If this value is not 512
(default) and DownPboEsel is not zero, DownPboEsel >= DownPboEselMin is required!
Bridge Sets min. usable receive signal PSD on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
0 - 255: values in steps of 0.5 dB/Hz (-127.5 to 0 dB/Hz)
Bridge Sets start value of frequency range where PBO is applied on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
0- 2048: value*4.3125 kHz
Bridge Sets end value of frequency range where PBO is applied on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
32 - 4095: value*4.3125 kHz
Bridge Adds one subcarrier/level pair (PSD mask) on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 4095: subcarrier index
0 - 255: PSD mask leve
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE dpbo-epsd
delete index <1-16>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE dpbo-epsd delete
subcarrier
<1-4095>
Bridge Deletes one entry (pair subcarrier/level ) by index on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 16: EPSD mask index
Bridge Deletes one entry (pair subcarrier/level ) by subcarrier on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 4095: EPSD subcarrier index
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE { down-pbo-escma I down-pbo-escmb I down-pbo-escmc } <0-640>
Bridge Configures cabel model parameter on xDSL line in terms of three scalars
DPBOESCMA, DPBOESCMB and DPBOESCMC that are used to estimate the frequency dependent loss of E-side cables calculated from the DPBOESEL parameter using the formula: ESCM(f) = (DPBOESCMA
+ DPBOESCMB * sqrt(f) + DPBOESCMC * f) *DPBOESCL where ESCM is expressed in dB and f is expressed in MHz.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
down-pbo-escma: cabel model parameter A (fixed part of ESCM(f) equation). Default ESCMa: 270-> 0.0546875.
down-pbo-escmb: cabel model parameter B (linear part of ESCM(f) equation). Default ESCMb: 490 -> 0.9140625.
down-pbo-escmc: cabel model parameter C (square root part of
ESCM(f) equation). Default ESCMc: 264 -> 0.03125
0 -640: value in multiples of 2E-8, the effective range for ESCMx is:
-1 (coded as 0) .. 1.5 (coded as 640) with stepping 2E-8.
Upstream PBO
Id:0900d80580256ef1 113
XDSL Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE up-pboa { us1 I us2 I us3 I us4 | us5 } <4000-8095>
Bridge Configures the value A in the reference PSD on xDSL line -
PSDREF(f)= -A - B * sqrt(f). The value is given for each US band except
US0. Each single value consists of 2 octets. First couple of octets representing the value for band US1. Second for band US2, third for US3, fourth for US4 and the last couple represent the value for US5. All values can be set, but only if the respective band is realy in use the
values will be taken, otherwise
will ignore the settings. The simultaneous setting of values of UPBOA = 40 dBm/Hz and UPBOB = 0 dBm/Hz for a band shall cause UPBO to be disabled. This are the default setting for all band's.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
us1: UPBOA for US1 band
us2: UPBOA for US2 band
us3: UPBOA for US3 band
us4: UPBOA for US4 band
us5 UPBOA for US5 band
4000 - 8095: value in 0.01 dBm/Hz (40 to 80.95)
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE up-pbob { us1| us2 | us3 | us4 | us5 } <0-4095>
Bridge Configures the value B in the reference PSD on xDSL line -
PSDREF(f)= -A - B * sqrt(f). The value is given for each US band except
US0. Each single value consists of 2 octets. First couple of octets representing the value band US1. Second for band US2, third for US3, fourth for US4 and the last couple represent the value for US5. All values can be set, but only if the respective band is realy in use the values will be taken, otherwise NE will ignore the settings. The simultaneous setting of values of UPBOA = 40 dBm/Hz and UPBOB = 0 dBm/Hz for a band shall cause UPBO to be disabled. This are the default setting for all band's.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
us1: UPBOB for US1 band
us2: UPBOB for US2 band
us3: UPBOB for US3 band
us4: UPBOB for US4 band
us5 UPBOA for US5 band
0 - 4095: Value in 0.01 dBm/Hz (if 0 + up-pboa=4000 => UPBO disabled for this band)
Power Managment
The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides power management saving power at three levels
(L0/L2/L3). The L2 level enables statistical power saving at the xDSL transceiver unit in the central office (xTU-C) by rapidly entering and exiting low power mode based on
Internet traffic running over the xDSL connection. For example, when large files are being downloaded, ADSL2 operates in full power mode (called "L0" power mode) in order to maximize the download speed. When Internet traffic decreases, such as when a user is reading a long text page, ADSL2 systems can transit into L2 low power mode, in which the data rate is significantly decreased and overall power consumption is reduced. The L3 power mode enables overall power savings at the xTU-C by entering into sleep mode when the connection is not being used for extended periods of time. L3 is the sleep mode that enables overall power savings at both the xTU-C and the remote xDSL transceiver unit
(xTU-R) when the connection is not being used for extended periods of time.
114 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ pwr-mgmt-l0time I pwr-mgmt-l2time } <0-255>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures the L0/L2 time on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
pwr-mgmt-l0time: minimum time between an exit from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state.
pwr-mgmt-l2time: minimum time between an Entry into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the L2 state and between two consecutive
Power Trims in the L2 State.
0 - 255: range in seconds
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
{ pwr-mgmt-l2atpr | pwr-mgmt-l2atprt } <0-31>
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE pwr-mgmt-mode
{ disabled | l3-enabled | l1-l2-enabled | l1-l2-l3-enabled }
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE pwr-mgmt-l2rate
<8000-1024000>
Bridge Configures the maximum aggregate transmit power reduction.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
pwr-mgmt-l2atpr: maximum aggregate transmit power reduction performed through a single Power Trim,
pwr-mgmt-l2atprt: total max. aggregate transmit power reduction performed in L2 state (L2 req.s + Power Trims.
0 - 31: value in dB (step 10 dB)
Bridge Configures the enabled power management state and where the line may autonomously transition to.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
disabled: none
l3-enabled: idle state
l1-l2-enabled: low power state
l1-l2-l3-enabled: both idle and low power state
Bridge Configures the power management L2 rate.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
8000 - 1024000: L2 rate value in bps.
Loop Length and Burst Mode
Command
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE up-pbo-ko
{ enable I disable }
Mode
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE up-pbo-kl <0-1280> Bridge Configures the upstream electrical loop length expressed in dB at 1
MHz on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
0 - 1280: value insteps of 0.1 dB (0=0 dB ...1280=128 dB)
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables usage of electrical loop length on xDSL line. If not enabled, the electrical loop length shall be autonomously derived be the xTU's. Default value is disabled.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE boost-mode
{ enable I disable }
Bridge Enables/disables usage of boost mode on xDSL line. If disabled, the
UPBO standard mode is used with the LOSS function calculated according to G.997.1.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
11.1.3
Checking of Profiles
Command show xdsl line-config-profile
show xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE
show xdsl line-config-profile PROFILE margin
Mode Function
Privieged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows all configured line profiles.
Shows one configured line profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Shows all SNR margins of selected profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 115
XDSL
Command show xdsl line-config-info
show xdsl line-config-info PROFILE
Operation Manual CLI
Mode Function
Privieged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows all line-config profiles and their assigned ports.
Shows one line-config profile and its assigned ports.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
11.2
Channel Profile
The channel profile provides all settings of data rates, interleaving delay, performance monitoring, and error handling. In order to remove errors, the hiX 5750 R2.0 provides impulse noise protection (INP) values up to 16.
11.2.1
Creating/Deleting a Profile
g
If the channel profile for channel 2 should be deleted, the
assignment has to be checked and corrected. In case of ADSL mode, all available VCC TP’s has to be moved to channel 1. In case of VDSL2 mode, the VCC TP which was assigned to channel 2 has to be deleted first.
Command
xdsl add chan-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl delete chan-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl duplicate chan-config-profile SOURCE-PROFILE
NEW-PROFILE
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Creates a channel profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Deletes the specified channel profile.
Copies a channel profile.
SOURCE-PROFILE: name origin channel profile.
NEW-PROFILE: name new channel profile
11.2.2
Configuration
g
The port has to be in locked state, before parameters can be modified.
Command
xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE
{ datarate-min-ds | datarate-min-us | datarate-min-resds | datarate-min-res-us | datarate-max-ds | datarate-max-us | datarate-min-low-pwr-ds)
<32-103980>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures the maximum and minimum data rate of downtream / upstream channel.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
datarate-min-ds: Min. data rate of downstream channel
datarate-min-us: Min. data rate of upstream channel
datarate-min-res-ds: Min. reserved data rate of downstream channel
(only used in dynamic RA mode)
datarate-min-res-us: Min. reserved data rate of upstream channel
(only used in dynamic RA mode
datarate-max-ds: Max. data rate of downstream channel
datarate-max-us: Max. data rate of upstream channel
datarate-min-low-pwr-ds: Min. data rate of downstream channel in low power state
32 - 103980: data rate in kbps.
g
Be aware, that for an ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ profile, the definied maximum values for datarates could not be used. For lines using an ADSL standard the maximum datarate value in downstream direction is limited to 32736 kbps, in upstream direction to 3520 kbps.
116 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
Command
xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE
{ max-interdelay-ds | max-interdelay-us } <0-255>
xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE { min-inp-ds | mininp-us } { off | halfsymbol | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7| 8 |
9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 }
xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE
{ max-bit-errorrate-ds | max-bit-errorrate-us } { 10E-7 |
10E-5 | 10E-3 }
xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE
{ thresh-downshift-ds | thresh-upshift-ds | thresh-downshift-us | thresh-upshift-us } <0-1000000>
Mode Function
Bridge Configures maximum interleave delay in milliseconds on downstream / upstream direction introduced by the PMS-TC on downstream / upstream direction. The xTUs shall choose the S (factor) and D (depth) values such that the actual one-way xDSL channel interleave delay is as close as possible to, but less than or equal to this parameter.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
max-interdelay-ds: Max. interleave delay for downstream channel.
max-interdelay-us: Max. interleave delay for upstream channel.
0 - 255: value in milliseconds
There are three special values defined:
0 -> indicates no delay bound is being imposed;
1 -> indicates the Fast Latency Path shall be used in the G.992.1 and S and D shall be selected such that
S <= 1 and D = 1 in ITU-T G.992.2, G.992.3, G.992.4, G.992.5 and
G.993.2;
255 -> indicates a delay bound of 1 ms in ITU-T G.993.2 same as value
1 for other recommendations. If the value 1 or 255 is selected, then the configured value for channel profile min INPDs should be “off” (0).
Bridge Configures minimum Impulse noise protection (INP) on xDSL line.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
off: off
halfsymbol: 0.5 symbol.
0: 0 symbol (= off)
1...16: 1 symbol ... 16 symbols
Bridge Configures maximum value for allowed bit error rate for the bearer channel.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
max-bit-errorrate-ds: maximum value for allowed bit error rate on downstream direction.
max-bit-errorrate-us: maximum value for allowed bit error rate on upstream direction
Bridge Configures rate change threshold causing a downshift/upshift trap on downstream/upstream channel.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
thresh-downshift-ds: rate change threshold causing a downshift trap on downstream channel.
thresh-downshift-us: rate change threshold causing a downshift trap on upstream channel.
thresh-upshift-ds: rate change threshold causing an upshift trap on downstream channel.
thresh-upshift-us: rate change threshold causing an upshift trap on upstream channel.
0 - 1000000: rate change threshold in bps.
11.2.3
Checking of Profiles
Command show xdsl chan-config-profile
show xdsl chan-config-profile PROFILE
show xdsl chan-config-info
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows all configured channel profiles.
Shows one configured channel profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Shows information of xDSL channel config profiles.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 117
XDSL
Command
show xdsl chan-config-info PROFILE
Operation Manual CLI
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows information of xDSL channel config profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
11.3
Notch Profile
The VDSL spectrum covers a number of Handheld Amateur Radio (HAM) radio bands.
To avoid interference it is necessary to introduce power control (notching) in one or more of these bands.The hiX 5750 R2.0 does not use RFI band masks. This feature is supported by the notch profiles. The standard notches defined in the VDSL spectrum representing the subcarrier-indices if a spacing of 4.3125 kHz is used (profiles 8A .. 17A) are provided in the following table:
HAM
Band
GMDSS
Table 21
Start Frequency
1810 kHz
3500 kHz
7000 kHz
10100 kHz
14000 kHz
2173 kHz
4200 kHz
6300 kHz
2342
3246
504
974
1461
Start Subcarrier
417
811
1623
End Frequency
2000 kHz
3800 kHz (ETSI),
4000 kHz (ANSI)
7100 kHz (ETSI),
7300 kHz (ANSI)
10150 kHz
14350 kHz
2191 kHz
4215 kHz
6320 kHz
End Subcarrier
464
881
1670
2354
3328
508
977
1466
RFI in VDSL Spectrum
11.3.1
Creating/Deleting a Profile
Command
xdsl add notch-config-profile PROFILE
Mode Function
Bridge Create Notch profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Delete a specified Notch profile.
xdsl delete notch-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl duplicate notch-config-profile SOURCE-PROFILE
NEW-PROFILE
Bridge Copies a notch profile.
SOURCE-PROFILE: name of origin notch profile.
NEW-PROFILE: name of new profile.
11.3.2
Configuration
g
General restriction for notch profile configuraion and assignment:
•
Inside of one notch profile, the
will not accept a subcarrier overlapping – otherwise the configuration will be rejected.
• Be aware, that the NE can handle only 16 notches per line at time (RFI band's
+ used notches).
118 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
• A modification of an existing notch profile is not allowed, if this profile is already in use (that means, this profile is assigned directly to a XDSL line).
Command
xdsl notch-config-profile PROFILE add-notch
<1-4095> <2-4095>
xdsl notch-config-profile PROFILE delete-notch
<1-16>
Mode Function
Bridge Add one Notch to the table, (up to 16 Notches possible).
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 4095: start index of subcarrier for Notch
2 - 4095: stop index of subcarrier for Notch
Bridge Delete one Notch from the Notch profile table.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 16: Notch index
11.3.3
Checking of Profiles
Command show xdsl notch-config-profile
show xdsl notch-config-profile PROFILE
show xdsl notch-config-info
show xdsl notch-config-info PROFILE
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows all configured notch profiles.
Shows one configured notch profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Shows all notch-config profiles and their assigned ports.
Shows one notch-config profile and its assigned ports.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
11.4
PSD Mask Profiles
To provide coexistence with other services PSD masks can be configured for VDSL2 regional bandplan annexes.
11.4.1
Creating/Deleting a Profile
g
A downstream PSD profile could support up to 32 breakpoints. A upstream profile could support up to 16 breakpoints.
When a new PSD profile is created, all breakpoints are zero. The table below contains a set of default breakpoints according to the VDSL2 specification G.993.2.
Downstream
Index Subcarrier Level dBm/Hz
65
256
376
-39.5
-39.5
-49.5
Upsteem
Index Subcarrier Level dBm/Hz
32
63
882
-38.0
-38.0
-54.5
Table 22
Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G.993.2
Id:0900d80580256ef1 119
XDSL
705
857
1218
1959
2795
4083
Table 22
Downstream
-52.5
-54.0
-55.5
-58.0
-59.5
-59.5
1193
1984
2318
2770
Upsteem
-55.5
-58.0
-58.5
-59.5
Default PSD Mask Profile for VDSL2 G.993.2 (Cont.)
Operation Manual CLI
Command
xdsl add psd-config-profile PROFILE { downstream I upstream }
xdsl delete psd-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl duplicate psd-config-profile SOURCE-PROFILE
NEW-PROFILE
Mode Function
Bridge Creates PSD mask profile (max. number of index is 32). Usage of profile for upstream or downstream direction .
g
This parameter can only be set during profile creation!
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Deletes specified PSD mask profile.
g
The profile should not be in use by any line.
Bridge Copies a PSD profile.
SOURCE-PROFILE: name origin PSD profile.
NEW-PROFILE: name new PSD profile.
11.4.2
Configuration
xdsl psd-config-profile PROFILE add-psd <1-4095>
<0-195>
Command
xdsl psd-config-profile PROFILE delete-psd index
<1-32>
xdsl psd-config-profile PROFILE delete-psd subcarrier
<1-4095>
Mode Function
Bridge Adds one PSD breakpoint to the table,
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 4095: index of subcarrier, where breakpoint will be placed
0 - 195: PSD mask level 0 to -97.5 dBm/Hz (coded as 0 to 195) in steps of 0.5 dBm/Hz
Bridge Deletes one PSD mask from the PSD mask profile by mask index.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 32: PSD mask index
Bridge Deletes one PSD mask from the PSD mask profile by subcarrier index.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
1 - 4095: subcarrier index
11.4.3
Checking of Profiles
Command show xdsl psd-config-profile
show xdsl psd-config-profile PROFILE
show xdsl psd-config-info
show xdsl psd-config-info PROFILE
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows all configured PSD profiles.
Shows selected PSD profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Show all PSD profiles with assigned ports
Shows PSD profile and its assigned ports.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
120 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI XDSL
11.5
Alarm Profile
11.5.1
Creating/Deleting a Profile
Command
xdsl add alarm-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl delete alarm-config-profile PROFILE
xdsl duplicate alarm-config-profile SOURCE-PROFILE
NEW-PROFILE
Mode Function
Bridge Creates the new alarm-config profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Deletes the alarm-config profile.
Bridge Duplicates the alarm-config profile.
SOURCE-PROFILE: enter source profile name.
NEW-PROFILE: enter new profile name.
11.5.2
Configuration
Command
xdsl alarm-config-profile PROFILE { thres-lofs I thres-loss I thres-lprs I thres-lols I thres-es I thres-ses I thresuas } <0-900}
xdsl alarm-config-profile PROFILE { opstate-notify I initfailure-notify } { enable I disabe }
Mode Function
Bridge Configure the alarm threshold profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
thres-lofs: loss of frame seconds alarm threshold
thres-loss: loss of signal seconds alarm threshold
thres-lrps: loss of power seconds alarm threshold
thres-lols: loss of link seconds alarm threshold
thres-es: errored seconds alrm threshold
thres-ses: severely errored seconds alarm thresholdthresuas: unavailable seconds alarm threshold
0 - 900: value in seconds
Enable/disable the the state notification.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
opstate-notify: operation state notification
initfailure-notify: init failure notification
11.5.3
Checking of Profiles
Command show xdsl alarm-config-profile
show xdsl alarm-config-profile PROFILE
show xdsl alarm-config-info
show xdsl alarm-config-info PROFILE
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Show all configured alarm profiles
Show one configured alarm profile.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
Show all alarm-config profiles and their assigned ports.
Show one alarm-config profile and its assigned ports.
PROFILE: enter the profile name.
11.5.4
Verifying the Running XDSL Profiles
Use the following commands to examine the currently on system running xDSL profiles.
Command
show running-config xdsl all-profiles
show running-config xdsl { line-profile | chan-profile | alarm-profile | notch-profile | psd-profile }
Mode Function
Config Shows all current xDSL profiles.
Exec/
Config
Shows specified current xDSL profile.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 121
XDSL Operation Manual CLI
11.6
Configuring of LRE-Port
The VDSL technologies base on Ethernet in the Fist Mile (EFM) to end users (so called
Long Reach Ethernet - LRE) to provide a complete suite of IP based services.
Therefore, the access network can be simplified into an end-to-end Ethernet access architecture that provides the preconditions of features such as VLAN-per-service and
DHCP authentication using Option 82.
11.6.1
Assigning xDSL Profiles to Port (EFM)
g
Note the following requirements before changing the used DSL-Standard via line profile:
• Enabling ADSL2 and VDSL2 standard is not supported inside of one single profile at the same time
• If the subscriber port is of ADSL2, a switch over to a VDSL2 mode is not possible.
Command
lre PORTS xdsl line-config [ PROFILE ]
lre PORTS xdsl chan-config { channel1 | channel2 }
[ PROFILE ]
lre PORTS xdsl notch-config [ PROFILE ]
lre PORTS xdsl psd-config { up I down } [ PROFILE ]
lre PORTS xdsl alarm-config [ PROFILE ]
Mode Function
Bridge Assigns xDSL line-config profile to specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
PROFILE: enter line profile name.
Sets channel profile for channel1/channel2. Channel1 is always available, channel2 only in dual latency mode.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
PROFILE: enter the channel profile name.
g
Profile name for channel 1 must be set, profile name for channel2 can be left empty.
Assigns xDSL Notch profile to specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
PROFILE: enter notch profile name or nothing if profile has to be removed from port.
Assigns PSD upstream/downstream profile to specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
PROFILE: enter PSD profile name (or nothing to reassign profile from ports).
Assigns the alarm profile to specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
PROFILE: enter alarm profile name.
11.6.2
ATM Configuration
In addition to EFM the classical
transport can be used. The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports
ATM networks with virtual channel (VC). A VC can be configured by virtual circuit identifier (VCI) and virtual path identifier (VPI).
122 Id:0900d80580256ef1
XDSL Operation Manual CLI
Configuring of Virtual Channel
Command Mode Function
lre PORTS xdsl atm vc create vpi <0-255> vci <32-65535> Bridge Creates a VC by VCI and VPI on specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
0 - 255: range VPI values (default is 1)
32 - 65535: range VCI values (default is 32)
lre PORTS xdsl atm vc delete vpi <0-255> vci <32-65535> Deletes a VC specified by VCI and VPI.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
0 - 255: VPI values
32 - 65535: VCI values
lre PORTS xdsl atm vcc <1-8> vpi <0-255> vci <32-65535>
lre PORTS xdsl atm vcc <1-8> encap { llc | vc-mux }
Configures VCC TP on specified port.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 8: index
0 - 255: VPI values
32 - 65535: VCI values
Sets the used encapsulation over ATM adaption layer 5 (AAL5) to LLC or VC-MUX.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 8: index VCC
lre PORTS xdsl atm vcc <1-8> alarmseverity <1-10> Sets alarm severity value for specified VCC.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 8: index VCC
1 - 10: index alarm severity
Checking of VC Configuration
Command
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp-overview
Mode
Privileged/
Global/
Bridge
Function
detailed information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows VCC TP information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
11.6.3
Checking the XDSL Configuration of LRE Port
Command
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl line-config-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl line-table
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl line-conf
show lre PORTS xdsl band-table
Mode Function
Privieged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows xDSL line configuration information for a specified port.
PORT-ADDRESS: slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows xDSL line status information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows line table configuration.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Show xDSL line band table
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Id:0900d80580256ef1 123
XDSL
Command
show lre PORTS xdsl chan-table
show lre PORTS xdsl chan-config-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl chan-table
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl notch-config-info
show lre PORTS xdsl psd-config-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl alarm-config-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl alarm-table
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp-info
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl atm vcctp-overview
show lre PORTS xdsl phys-table detail { xtuc | xtur }
show lre PORTS xdsl phys-table linerates
show lre PORTS xdsl phys-table alarm
Operation Manual CLI
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows xDSL channel status information
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
port xDSL channel config profile information.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Shows xDSL channel status information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows LRE port xDSL notch config information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows LRE port xDSL PSD profile information.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Shows the xDSL relation between ports and assigned alarm profiles.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Privileged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows xDSL alarm status information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows VCC TP information.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Privileged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows detailed information of xDSL physical status.
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
xtuc: VDSL LIU = vtuC
xtur: VDSL modem = vtuR
Shows xDSL physical status: only linerates (up/downstream)
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows xDSL physical status: alarm/failure state
PORTS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
show liudb version
11.7
Verifying of the XDSL Databases
Use the following commands in order to get information about the values stored in xDSL databases.
Command
show xdsldb { line-tbl | name-table | phys-tbl | chan-tbl | band-tbl | vcc-tbl | alm-tbl | xdsl-port-tbl | operstate | db-checksum }
Mode
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows information about a specified xDSL database table,
line-tbl: line table
name-table: profile name table
phys-tbl: physical table
chan-tbl: channel table
band-tbl: line-band table
table
alm-tbl: alarm table
xdsl-port-tbl: port table
operstate: card operstate
db-checksum: checksum.
Shows version of the line interface unit.
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
124 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI
Command
show xdsldb xdslMode PROFILEINDEX
Mode
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows information about the xDSL mode.
PROFILEINDEX: profile name index from line profile.
XDSL
11.8
DELT Configuration
DELT(Dual Ended Line Test) allows to test a single line on xTU-C/xTU-R side. Result data are requested from the xDSL interface, where DELT was running before.
Command
lre PORTS xdsl delt { force | inhibit }
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt status
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt all { downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt bit-allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt gain-allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt snr-allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt qln-allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt hlin-allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
Mode
Privieged/
Global/
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables DELT mode on selected ports.
PORTS: slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
force: force loop diagnostics by xTU-C
inhibit: stop loop diagnostics process
Shows information about port DELT status.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
Shows all subcarrier group values of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier group (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier group (press ENTER to show only one).
Privieged/
Global/
Bridge
Shows Bit allocation table for different subcarriers of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier (press ENTER to show only one).
Shows Bit allocation table for different subcarriers of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier (press ENTER to show only one).
The gain value is represented as a multiple of 1/512 on linear scale.
allocation table for different subcarrier groups of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier group (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier group (press ENTER to show only one).
Shows Quiet Line Noise allocation table for different subcarrier groups of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier group (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier group (press ENTER to show only one).
Shows H(f) linear representation for subcarrier groups of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier group (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier group (press ENTER to show only one).
Id:0900d80580256ef1 125
XDSL
Command
show lre PORT-ADDRESS xdsl delt hlog -allocation
{ downstream | upstream } [ <1-4096> [ <1-4096> ] ]
Operation Manual CLI
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows H(f) logarithmic representation for subcarrier groups of one port for downstream/upstream direction.
PORT-ADDRESS: enter slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot.
1 - 4096: start subcarrier group (press ENTER to show all),
1 - 4096: end subcarrier group (press ENTER to show only one).
126 Id:0900d80580256ef1
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
12 Voice over IP
type, it is possible to provide VoIP service via
Megaco/H.248. The protocol version is valid for a whole ONT/ONT card (MDU service board).
illustrates the relations between the configuration modules.
RTC Profile
MGC
PM Data
H.248
VoIP Media
Profile
MG User
Data
MGC Config
Data
VoIP Voice
CTP
Dial Plan
Mapping
Dial Plan
Profile
SIP
RTP
PM Data
Call Control
PM Data
VoIP Line
Status
Physical Path
Termination Point POTS
SIP User
Data
SIP Agent
Config Data
Application
Service Profile
Features
Access
Codes Profile
SIP
PM Data
TCP/UTP
Config Data
IP Host
Config Data
Port
Figure 4
VoIP Configuration Structure
12.1
VoIP Profiles
12.1.1
RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) Profile
To configure the RTP profile, use the following commands.
Id:0900d8058023f697 127
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
create voip voip rtp-profile-table-entry <1-16> LOCPORTMIN
LOCPORTMAX <0-255> { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } [ LINE ]
Config Creates RTP profile table entries.
1 - 16: table entry index
LOCPORTMIN: base RTP port used for voice traffic
(0..65535), default 50000
LOCPORTMAX: top end range RTP port used for voice traffic, must be greater than base RTP port
0 - 255: diffserv code point to be used for outgoing RTP packets, default: expedited forwarding=46
Events according to RFC 2833 disable (0) or enable (1):
0 | 1: piggyback events
0 I 1: tone events
events
LINE: the whole line (up to 64 characters allowed) will be taken as profile name, spaces included.
Modifies RTP profile table entry.
modify voip voip rtp-profile-table-entry <1-16> LOCPORTMIN
LOCPORTMAX <0-255> { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } { 0 I 1 } [ LINE ]
delete voip voip rtp-profile-table-entry <1-16> Deletes RTP profile table entry.
12.1.2
VoIP Media Profile
The media profile table contains entries for the connection to the media gateway controller (soft-switch) that controls the signaling messages.
Use the following commands to configure the media profile table.
create voip voip media-profile-table-entry <1-16> <0-1>
<0-1> <0-1> <0-1> <1-16> { 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 255 } { on I off }
<0-999> [ LINE ]
Command
modify voip voip media-profile-table-entry <1-16> <0-1>
<0-1> <0-1> <0-1> <1-16> { 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 255 } { on | off }
<0-999> [ LINE ]
modify voip voip media-profile-table-entry-name <1-16>
[ LINE ]
modify voip voip media-profile-pstn-protocol-variant
<1-16> <0-999>
delete voip voip media-profile-table-entry <1-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates media profile table.
1 - 16: table entry index
Specified codec selection as defined in RFC 3551is 0-PCMU.
Silence suppression (0=off, 1=on):
0 - 1: 1st order
0 - 1: 2nd order
0 - 1: 3rd order
0 - 1: 4th order
1 - 16: pointer to the
Voice service prof announce type:
1: silence
2: recorder tone
3: fast busy
4: voice announcement
255: not applicable
on/off: echo cancellation indication
protocol variant controls which variant of POTS signaling must be used on the associated UNIs (ISO 3166 country code), e.g 124 Canada, 156 China, 276 Germany, 414
Kuwait, 840 USA
LINE: descriptive profile name (size max. 20), the whole line until
CR will be pressed, spaces included.
Modifies media profile table entry.
Modifies media profile name.
Modifies media profile PSTN protocol variant.
Valid after reboot or lock/unlock of ONT.
Deletes media profile table.
128 Id:0900d8058023f697
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
12.1.3
Checking the Media and RTP Profiles
To show media and RTP profiles, use the following commands.
Command Function Mode
Config
Config
12.2
VoIP IP Host
The following two configuration data tables contain the information about services based
that are offered from the IP hosts. The entries of these tables are
unconditionally required for such
s which provide TCP/UDP IP services. Additional,
the IP host configuration allows further features to support through the ONTs. There is usually one entry per ONT card, i.e., only one source TCP / UDP port used for commu-
(soft-switch) is supported. Table indices are the IP interface of the
ONT (first index) and the TCP / UDP port (second index).
12.2.1
IP Host Configuration Table
Creating/Deleting an IP Host Configuration Table
The IP host’s config-data-table contains configuration data of IP interfaces. There is one table entry per ONT card that is providing IP host services.
Use the following commands to create or delete an IP host’s config-data-table by means of the interface index or the ONT address.
Command
create voip ip-host config-data-table INDEX
create voip ip-host config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
delete voip ip-host config-data-table INDEX
delete voip ip-host config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config Creates a VoIP IP-host config table.
INDEX: Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
Deletes a VoIP IP-host config table.
Configuring the IP Host Parameters
Use the following commands to configure the VoIP options of ONT interfaces that provide IP host services, e.g. servises based on TCP and UDP.
Command
modify voip ip-host ip-options INDEX OPTIONS
modify voip ip-host-addr ip-options ADDRESS OPTIONS
Mode Function
Config Modifies IP related options.
INDEX: interface index of ONT card, which provides IP host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
OPTIONS: this attribute is a bit-field that is used to enable (0) or disable (1) IP related options.
The options are assigned as follows:
(default = 0)
0x2 = Respond to PINGs (default = 0)
0x4 = Respond to Trace Route messages.
Id:0900d8058023f697 129
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
modify voip ip-host ont-identifier INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip ip-host-addr ont-identifier ADRESS [ LINE ]
modify voip ip-host ip-mask-gateway INDEX
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
modify voip ip-host-addr ip-mask-gateway ADDRESS
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
modify voip ip-host dns-server INDEX A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
modify voip ip-host -addr dns-server ADDRESS
A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
Mode Function
Config Modifies ONT identifier string.
INDEX: physical index of ONT card providing IP-Host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
LINE: identifier string (up to 25 Byte).
Config Modifies the IP address, mask, default gateway.
INDEX: interface index of ONT card providing IP-host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
A.B.C.D: address used for all IP services hosted by the ONT
A.B.C.D: subnet mask for IP services hosted by the ONT
A.B.C.D: default gateway address used for all IP services hosted by this ONT.
If values are set, they will override any values returned in DHCP.
Config Modifies primary, secondary DNS server.
INDEX: interface index of ONT card providing IP-Host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
A.B.C.D: address of primary DNS server
A.B.C.D: address of secondary DNS server.
If values are set, they will override any values returned in DHCP.
Updating/Retrieving an IP Host Configuration Table
Use the following commands to show the update/retrieve the IP host’s config-data-table.
Command
update voip ip-host config-data-table INDEX
update voip ip-host config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
retrieve voip ip-host config-data-table INDEX
retrieve voip ip-host config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode Function
Exec/
Config
Updates VoIP IP-host config table.
INDEX: Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
Exec/
Config
Retrieves VoIP IP-host config table.
INDEX: Interface index of ONT which provides IP host services
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
12.2.2
Configuring the TCP/UDP Port Table
Use the following commands to configure the TCP/UDP port.
Command
create voip ip-host tcp-udp-port IF_INDEX
PORT_ID PROTOCOL DIFFSERVFIELD
modify voip ip-host tcp-udp-port tosdiffser IF_INDEX
PORT_ID VAL
delete voip ip-host tcp-udp-port IF_INDEX PORT_ID
Mode Function
Config
port.
IF_INDEX: physical interface index of IP host service - primary index of ONT
PORT_ID: port ID of TCP/UDP port (1..65535)
Default value is 2944 for text message formats and 2955 for binary message formats.
PROTOCOL: protocol type available as defined by IANA.
Default value is UDP (0x11).
/diffserv field of the IPv4 header.
The contents of this attribute may contain the Type of Service as per RFC 1349 or the
. Valid values for DSCP are as defined by IANA. Default value is 0x0.
Modifies TCP/UDP port parameter.
VAL: value for TOS/diffserv field.
Deletes TCP/UDP port.
130 Id:0900d8058023f697
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
create voip ip-host tcp-udp-port-addr ADRESS
PORT_ID PROTOCOL DIFFSERVFIELD
modify voip ip-host tcp-udp-port-addr tosdiffser
ADDRESS PORT_ID VAL
delete voip ip-host tcp-udp-port-addr ADDRESS PORT_ID
Mode Function
Config Creates TCP/UDP ports.
ADDRESS: slot/port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
Modifies TCP/UDP port parameter.
Deletes TCP/UDP port address.
12.2.3
Checking the Configuration
To show configuration data, use the following commands.
Command show voip ip-host config-data-table
show voip ip-host config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
show voip ip-host tcp-udp-table
show voip ip-host tcp-udp-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode
Exec/
Config
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the whole VoIP IP host config data table.
Shows the specified VoIP IP host config data table.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
Shows the whole VoIP IP host TCP UDP table.
Shows the specified VoIP IP host TCP UDP table.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
12.3
VoIP Configuration Data Table
The VoIP configuration data table contains information about VoIP services per gateway. There is one table entry per ONT card that is providing VoIP services. Table entries are automatically created/deleted by the NE.
12.3.1
Modifying the VoIP Configuration Data Table
To modify entries of configuration data table, use the following commands.
modify voip voip config-data-signaling-protocol-used
PHYS_INDEX PROTOCOL
modify voip voip config-data-signaling-protocol-used-addr
ADDRESS PROTOCOL
Command
modify voip voip config-data-configures-method
PHYS_INDEX METHOD
modify voip voip config-data-configured-method-addr
ADDRESS METHOD
modify voip voip config-data-server-address PHYS_INDEX
[ LINE ]
modify voip voip config-data-server-address-addr ADDRESS
LINE
Mode Function
Config Modifies used signaling protocol.
PHYS_INDEX: physical index
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
PROTOCOL: type of VoIP signaling protocol used for ONT.
Only one type of protocol is allowed. Valid values are:
0x00 = None, 0x01 = SIP, 0x02 = H.248, 0x03 = MGCP,
Config Modifies configured method in config table entry.
PHYS_INDEX: physical index
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
METHOD: method indicates to the ONT, which method should be used to configure the VoIP service of the ONT.
0x00 the ONT default (do not configure). indicate use of 0x01
, 0x02 configuration file retrieval, 0x03 TR-69, 0x04
sipping config framework for VoIP service configuration of the ONT. 0x05 - 0xF0 are reserved for future use.
0xF1 - 0xFF are reserved for proprietary vendor configuration methods.
Config Modifies server address in config table entry.
PHYS_INDEX: physical index
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
LINE: server address to contact using the method indicated in the above attribute. The whole line will be taken until CR .
Id:0900d8058023f697 131
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
modify voip voip config-data-alarm-severity PHYS_INDEX
<1-10>
modify voip voip config-data-alarm-severity-addr ADDRESS
<1-10>
Mode Function
Config Modifies alarm severity in config table entry.
PHYS_INDEX: physical index
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
1 - 10: alarm severity index.
12.3.2
Checking the VoIP Configuration Data Table
To show configuration data, use the following commands.
Command Mode Function
Config ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot.
show voip voip config-data-table-addr ADDRESS
12.4
Voice CTP (Connection Termination Point) Table
A CTP table entry is automatically created and will be numbered identically with the
POTS PPTP.
12.4.1
Modifying the Voice CTP Table
To modify entries of voice CTP table, use the following commands.
Command Mode Function
modify voip voip voice-ctp-table-entry IF_INDEX <1-16>
modify voip voip voice-ctp-table-entry-addr ADDRESS <1-16>
Config
table entry.
IF_INDEX: physical index
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number
(POTS port number 1..max.)
1 - 16: VoIP media profile table.
12.4.2
Checking the Voice CTP Table
To show configuration data, use the following commands.
Command
show voip voip voice-ctp-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port (POTS port number 1..max.).
12.5
Line Status Table
A line status table entry is automatically created and will be numbered identically with the POTS PPTP. It contains status information related to the VoIP session for the specified POTS port.
12.5.1
Retrieving the Line Status
Use following commands to retrieve the line status.
132 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
Command
retrieve voip voip line-status-table IF_INDEX
retrieve voip voip line-status-table-addr ADRESS
Mode Function
Config Retrieves the line status table.
IF_INDEX: interface index of the
port
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1..max.).
12.5.2
Checking the Line Status
To show line status data, use the following commands.
Command
show voip voip line-status-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ port (POTS port number 1..max.).
12.6
Performance Monitoring
The following tables contain the completed 15-minute and 24-hours interval performance monitoring data collected with regard to the Call Control channel. All the attribute
counters are only updated at the end of each period or on request, see 12.6.3 Updating the PM Data
.
g
See 10.10.2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object
indexes.
12.6.1
Configuring of Call-Control PM
The call control table contains an entry for each call control PM object related to a POTS
PPTP supporting VoiP. This table contains the current performance monitoring data of the running 15-minute interval collected with regard to the Call Control channel.
Call-Control Thresholds
The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring. Use the following commands to configure the call control thresholds. One call control table always exist and cannot be deleted. The thresholds are used to send a notification to the management system when the actual counter crosses this value. The notification 'on' will be sent at the crossing of the threshold by the actual counter; the notification 'off' will be sent at the end of the 15 min period, since that is when the actual counters are reset to 0
Id:0900d8058023f697 133
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
create voip-performance callctrl threshold <2-16>
SETFAIL SETTIMER TERMFAIL PORTREL PORTOFFHOCK
SEVPTR
modify voip-performance callctrl threshold <1-16>
SETFAIL SETTIMER TERMFAIL PORTREL PORTOFFHOCK
SEVPTR
delete voip-performance callctrl threshold <2-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates VoIP performance call control ’threshold’ object.
2 - 16: table index
SETFAIL: threshold for call setup failures
SETTIMER: threshold for call setup timer longest time period of a single call setup
TERMFAIL: threshold for terminated calls number of calls that were terminated with cause
PORTREL: threshold for abandon calls number of analog port releases without dialing
PORTOFFHOCK: Threshold for off-hock timer - longest time period of a single off-hock
SEVPTR: pointer to alarm-severity profile.
Modifies VoIP performance ’threshold’ table.
1 - 16: table index.
Deletes VoIP performance ’threshold’ table.
Call-Control Objects
To configure call control objects, use the following commands.
Command
create voip-performance callctrl object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
modify voip-performance callctrl object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
delete voip-performance callctrl object INDEX
Mode Function
Config Creates VoIP performance ’call control’ object.
INDEX: object index
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring (admin state
15min/24hrs)
0 - 96: number of history entries configured for the
object and the
15min interval
0 - 1: number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval
1 - 16: pointer to ’threshold’ object.
Modifies VoIP performance ’call control’ object.
Deletes VoIP performance ’call control’ object.
Verifying Call-Control Configuration Data
To show call control configuration data, use the following commands.
Command
show voip-performance callctrl threshold-table
Mode Function
Config
Shows the whole call control threshold table.
12.6.2
Configuring of RTP PM
RTP Objects
The table contains an entry for each RTP monitoring PM object related to a POTS PPTP supporting VoiP. To configure RTP monitoring objects, use the following commands.
134 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
Command
create voip-performance rtpmon object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
Mode Function
Config
monitoring threshold’ table.
INDEX: object index
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 15min/24hrs)
0 - 96: number of history entries configured for the
and the 15min interval
0 - 1: number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval
1 - 16: pointer to ’threshold’ object.
Modifies VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring object table.
modify voip-performance rtpmon object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
delete voip-performance rtpmon object INDEX Deletes VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring threshold’ table.
RTP Thresholds
The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring. To configure
RTP thresholds, use the following commands.
Command
create voip-performance rtpmon threshold <2-16>
RTPERRORS LOSS JITTER RTCPTIME BUFFUNDER
BUFFOVER SEVPTR
Mode Function
Config Creates VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring threshold’ object.
2 - 16: table index
RTPERRORS: threshold for RTP errors
LOSS: threshold for fraction of Loss from total packets
JITTER: threshold for max jitter
RTCPTIME: threshold for time between RTCP packets
BUFFERUNDER: threshold for buffer underflow
BUFFEROVER: threshold for buffer overflow
SEVPTR: pointer to alarm-severity profile.
Modifies VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring threshold’ object.
1 - 16: table index.
modify voip-performance rtpmon threshold <1-16>
RTPERRORS LOSS JITTER RTCPTIME BUFFUNDER
BUFFOVER SEVPTR
delete voip-performance rtpmon threshold <2-16> Config Deletes VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring threshold’ object.
Verifying RTP Configuration
To verify the RTP configuration, use the following commands.
Command
show voip-performance rtpmon threshold-table
Mode Function
Config
Shows the whole RTP monitoring threshold table.
12.6.3
Updating the PM Data
Use the following commands to update the PM data.
Command
update voip-performance callctrl current-data INDEX
update voip-performance rtpmon current-data INDEX
Mode Function
Config Updates VoIP performance ’call control’ object.
INDEX: physical index of the ONU card.
Updates VoIP performance ’RTP monitoring’ object.
Id:0900d8058023f697 135
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
12.6.4
Checking the Current and History PM Data
Use the following commands to verify the PM data.
Command Mode Function
show voip-performance callctrl history-data-table [ INDEX ]
show voip-performance rtpmon current-data-table show voip-performance rtpmon history-data-table
Config
Exec/
Config
Shows the whole call control history data table.
INDEX: interface index of POTS port.
Shows the whole RTP monitoring current data table.
Shows the whole RTP monitoring history data table.
12.7
Megaco/H.248 Protocol
12.7.1
MGC Configuration Data Table
To configure the H.248 MGC configuration data table, use the following commands.
Command
modify voip mgc-config-data-table-entry <1-16>
UDP_TCP_PTR PROTOCOL_VERSION MESSAGE_FORMAT
MAX_RETRY_TIME
MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS SERVICE_CHANGE_DELAY
Mode Function
create voip mgc-config-data-table-entry
UDP_TCP_PTR PROTOCOL_VERSION MESSAGE_FORMAT
MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS [ <2-16> ]
Config Creates
config data table entries.
config data table
(Default value is 2944 for text message formats and 2955 for binary message formats.)
PROTOCOL_VERSION: protocol version of Megaco Protocol being used
MESSAGE_FORMAT: 0=text long (default), 1= text short,
2=binary
MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS: max. number of times a message is retransmitted to the MGC, default=0
2 - 16: table entry index or CR for automatically generated index.
Modifies MGC config data table entries.
1 - 16: table entry index
MAX_RETRY_ATTEMPTS: max. number of times a message is retransmitted to the MGC
SERVICE_CHANGE_DELAY: service change delay.
Deletes MGC config data table entry.
delete voip mgc-config-data-table-entry <2-16>
modify voip mgc-config-data-table profile-name <1-16>
[ LINE ]
modify voip mgc-config-data-table primary-mgc <1-16>
[ LINE ]
Config Modifies config data table profile name.
1 - 16: profile index
LINE: profile name (up to 64 characters, spaces included)
Config Modifies primary MGC (soft-switch) controlling the signal messages.
1 - 16: profile index
LINE: the name (IP address or resolved name CR , the whole line will be taken as name, spaces included)
Modifies secondary MGC (soft-switch).
modify voip mgc-config-data-table secondary-mgc <1-16>
[ LINE ]
modify voip mgc-config-data-table termination-id-base
<1-16> [ LINE ]
Config Modifies base string for the H.248 physical termination ID.
1 - 16: profile index
LINE: up to 25 chars will be taken as termination ID base, spaces included.
12.7.2
MGC User Data
Use the following commands to modify MGC user data.
136 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
Command
modify voip mgc-user-data mgc-pointer INDEX <1-16>
modify voip mgc-user-data-addr mgc-pointer ADDRESS
<1-16>
modify voip mgc-user-data user-url INDEX LINE
modify voip mgc-user-data-addr user-url ADDRESS LINE
Mode Function
Config
MGC config data table entries.
INDEX: index of user data table (
PPPT)
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1..max.)
1 - 16: table entry index.
Config Modifies user URL.
INDEX: index of user data (POTS PPPT)
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1..max.)
LINE: new user URL; until CR , the whole line will be taken as organization name spaces included, maximum 256 characters
12.7.3
MGC Performance Monitoring
The MGC monitor object table contains an entry for each H.248 agent PM object. Index for PM objects is the physical index of the ONT containing the H.248 agent. One ONT contains one H.248 agent. All MGC user data table entries of one ONT must use the same MGC configuration data entry (only one profile per ONT possible). Since one MGC configuration data entry can be used for several ONTs, MGC configuration data table and MGC monitor object table have different indices.
g
See 10.10.2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object
indexes.
Configuring of MGC Objects
To configure MGC objects, use the following commands.
Command
create voip-performance mgcmon object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
Mode Function
Config
INDEX: object index
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 15min/24hrs)
0 - 96: number of history entries configured for the
and the 15min interval
0 - 1: number of history entries configured for the PM object and the 24hrs interval
1 - 16: pointer to ’threshold’ object.
Modifies VoIP performance ’MGC monitoring’ object.
modify voip-performance mgcmon object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
delete voip-performance mgcmon object INDEX Deletes VoIP performance ’MGC monitoring’ object.
Configuring of MGC Thresholds
The table entries are thresholds for Call Control performance monitoring. To configure
MGC thresholds, use the following commands.
Id:0900d8058023f697 137
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
create voip-performance mgcmon threshold <2-16>
PROTERRORS TRANSPLOSS SEVPTR
modify voip-performance mgcmon threshold <1-16>
PROTERRORS TRANSPLOSS SEVPTR
delete voip-performance mgcmon threshold <2-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates VoIP performance ’MGC monitoring threshold’ object.
2 - 16: table index
PROTERRORS: threshold for protocol errors
TRANSPLOSS: threshold for transport losses
SEVPTR: pointer to alarm-severity profile.
Modifies VoIP performance ’MGC monitoring threshold’ table.
1 - 16: table index.
Modifies VoIP performance ’MGC monitoring threshold’ table.
Verifying the MGC PM Configuration
To show MGC configuration data, use the following commands.
Command Mode Function
show voip-performance mgcmon object-table-index INDEX
show voip-performance mgcmon threshold-table
Config
Shows the MGC monitoring object table.
INDEX: physical index of the ONT card.
Shows the whole MGC monitoring threshold table.
Updating the MGC PM Data
Use the following command to update the MGC performance monitoring data.
Command
update voip-performance mgcmon current-data INDEX
Mode Function
Config Updates VoIP performance ’mgc monitoring’ object.
Checking the MGC PM Data
Use the following commands to verify the MGC performance monitoring data.
Command show voip-performance mgcmon current-data-table
show voip-performance mgcmon current-data-table-index
INDEX
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the whole MGC monitoring current data table.
Shows the MGC monitoring current data table for specified
ONT.
INDEX: physical index of the ONT card.
show voip-performance mgcmon history-data-table-index
INDEX
Config
Shows the MGC monitoring history data table for specified
ONT.
INDEX: physical index of the ONT card.
12.7.4
Checking the MGC Configuration and User Table
Command show voip mgc user-data-table
show voip mgc user-data-table-addr ADDRESS
show voip mgc config-data-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the whole MGC user data table or specified table.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1..max.).
Shows the whole MGC config data table.
138 Id:0900d8058023f697
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
12.8
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
12.8.1
SIP Profiles
This section describes the following SIP profile tables:
•
•
•
.
Feature Access Codes Profile
The feature access codes define administrable feature access codes for the VoIP subscribers. A table entry can be referenced by the VoIP Voice CTP object. One default profile always exists.
To configure the feature access profile table use the following commands.
Command
create voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
[ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
profile-name INDEX [ LINE]
delete voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
INDEX
Mode Function
Config Create the feature access codes profile table.
LINE: descriptive name for profile handling (Size 0..64).
Modifies the profile name.
INDEX: index of profile
LINE: descriptive name for profile handling.
Deletes the feature access codes profile table.
To modify entries of feature access profile table, use the following commands.
Command modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
cancel-call-waiting INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
call-hold INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
call-park INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
cids-activate INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
cids-deactivate INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
do-not-disturb-activation INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
do-not-disturb-deactivation INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
do-not-disturb-pin-change INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
emergency-service-number INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip feature-access-codes-profile-table-entry
intercom-service INDEX [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Modifies table entry ’cancel call waiting’
INDEX: index of profile
LINE: new code for specified parameter, size 0..5
Modifies table entry ’call hold’.
Modifies table entry ’call park’.
Modifies table entry ’cids activate’.
Modifies table entry ’cids deactivate’.
Modifies table entry ’do no not disturb activation’.
Modifies table entry ’do no not disturb deactivation’.
Modifies table entry ’do no not disturb pin change’.
Modifies table entry ’emergency service number’.
Modifies table entry ’intercom service’.
Id:0900d8058023f697 139
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
To show the feature access codes table use the following command:
Command show voip sip fac-codes-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the feature access codes table
Dial Plan Profile
A dial plan profile may be referenced by a SIP user data entry.
To configure a dial plan profile table, use the following commands.
Command
create voip sip dial-plan-profile-table-entry
<0-65535> <0-65535> <0-3>
modify voip sip dial-plan-profile-table-entry INDEX
<0-65535> <0-65535> <0-3>
modify voip sip dial-plan-profile-table-entry profile-name
INDEX [ LINE ]
delete voip sip dial-plan-profile-table-entry INDEX
Mode Function
Config Creates a dial plan profile table.
0 - 65535: critical dial time-out, common value (default in OMCI) is 4000 ms
0 - 65535: partial dial time-out, common value (default in OMCI) is 16000 ms
0 - 3: dial plan format , 0...not defined, 1...H248, 2...NSC, 3...venor specific format.
Modifies a dial plan profile table entry.
INDEX: entry index.
Modifies a dial plan profile name.
LINE: descriptive name for profile handling.
Deletes a dial plan profile table.
To modify a dial plan profile token, use the following command.
Command Mode Function
modify voip sip dial-plan-profile-table-entry dialplan-token
INDEX [ LINE ]
Config Modifies a dial plan profile table entry ’dialplan token’.
INDEX: entry index
LINE: new dial plan token, see Dial Plan Token Format
.
To show the dial plan profile profile table, use the following command.
Command show voip sip dial-plan-profile-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the network dial plan profile table.
Dial Plan Token Format
g
Configuring of dial plan token is only possible for the ONTs G25A and G25E.
The format of dial plan is selected to 1 (H.248).
• Valid characters are:
– 0,1,2,3,...,9
– *,#,(,), |
– x
– . and T
All the dial plan profiles will be concatenated at the creation sequence instead of at alphabet sequence.
• The dial plan begins with "(" and ends with ")". Each item in the dial plan is delimited by "|", e.g. (1234|**##|x.T).
140 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
• A dial plan completes by integrating several separate dial plan token. A dial plan token is a component of the whole dial plan. The length of dial plan token is limited to 28 Byte. For example, with the token:
Token 1: (***xx|*xx*x.#|*xx*x.*xx#|
Token 2: *xx*x.*x#|*31*xxxxxxxx|
Token 3: *xx#|#xx#|*#xx#|#001|x.T) the whole dial plan forms:
(***xx|*xx*x.#|*xx*x.*xx#|*xx*x.*x#|*31*xxxxxxxx|*xx#|#xx#|*#xx#|#001|x.T)
• The two POTS ports of ONT share one dial plan. After lock/unlock the ONT the new dial plan takes effect.
• The ONT uses its default dial plan before any other dial plan is configured.
The current default dial plan is:
(***xx|*xx*x.#|*xx*x.*xx#|*xx*x.*x#|*31*xxxxxxxx|*xx#|#xx#|*#xx#|#001|x.T)
• Configure empty dial plan to the ONT will not replace the current dial plan, although the empty dial plan can be stored in ONT, when the ONT reboots the default dial plan will take effect.
• In addition, in the three dial plan profiles, “Critical dial timeout”, and “Partial dial timeout” are different from each other. In such condition, the last one takes effect.
Application Service Profile
This table defines attributes of calling features used in conjunction with a VoIP line service. An entry may be referenced by one or more entries of the SIP user data table.
One default profile always exists. To configure the application service profile table, use the following commands.
Id:0900d8058023f697 141
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command
create voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry <0-63>
<0-63> <0-255> <0-15> <0-3> [ LINE ]
modify voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry <0-63>
<0-63> <0-255> <0-15> <0-3>
modify voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry
profile-name INDEX [ LINE ]
delete voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry INDEX
Mode Function
Config Creates application service profile table.
Bit clear is disabled and bit set is enabled.
0 - 63: CID features, a bitmap of caller ID features, the bit position values are:
0x01 Calling Number,
0x02 Calling Name,
0x04 CID blocking (both number and name),
0x08 CID number- Permanent presentation status for number
(0 = Public, 1 = Private),
0x10 CID name - Permanent presentation status for name
(0 = Public, 1 = Private),
0x20 - Anonymous CID blocking (ACR),
0x40 - 0x80 not used, is set to 0.
0 - 63: call waiting features, the bit position values are:
0x01 Call waiting,
0x02 Caller ID Announcement,
0x04 - 0x80 not used, is set to 0.
0 - 255: call processing features, the bit position values are:
0x0001 - 3way,
0x0002 - Call transfer,
0x0004 - Call hold,
0x0008 - Call park,
0x0010 - Do not disturb,
0x0020 - Flash on Emergency Service call. (Flash is to be processed during an Emergency Service call),
0x0040 - Emergency Service originating hold (determines if a call clearing is to be performed on an on-hook during and Emergency
Service call),
0x0080 6way,
0x0100 - 0x8000 not used, is set to 0.
0 - 15: call presentation features, the bit position values are:
0x0001 - Message Waiting Indication Splash Ring,
0x0002 Message Waiting Indication Special Dial tone,
0x0004 - Message Waiting Indication Visual Indication,
0x0008 - Call Forwarding Indication,
0x0010 - 0x8000 not used, is set to 0.
0 - 3: direct connect features, the bit position values are:
0x01 - direct connect feature enabled,
0x02 - dial tone feature delay option
LINE: profile name.
Modifies application service profile table entry.
Modifies profile name of application service profile table.
INDEX: index of profile
LINE: descriptive name for profile handling
Deletes application service profile table.
INDEX: index.
To modify the application service profile table entries, use the following commands.
142 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
Command modify voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry
direct-connect-uri INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry
conference-factory-uri INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip appl-service-profile-table-entry
bridge-line-agent-uri INDEX [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Modifies table entry ’direct connect uri’.
INDEX: index of profile
LINE: new direct connect URI.
Modifies table entry ’service conference factory’.
LINE: new service-conference-factory.
Modifies table entry ’bridge line agent uri’.
LINE: new direct connect URI.
To show the application service profile table, use the following command.
Command show vip sip appl-service-profile-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the application service profile table.
12.8.2
SIP Agent
The VoIP SIP agent configuration data table contains the configuration attributes necessary to establish communication for signaling between a SIP user agent and a SIP server. Each entry may be referenced by one or more SIP user data entries. Each entry is related to one or more TCP/UDP configuration data entries. One default profile always exists. All table entries of one ONT card must use the same profile (only one profile per
ONT card possible).
Configuring a SIP Agent
To configure the
agent configuration data table, use the following commands.
Command
create voip sip agent-config-data-table EXP_TIME
START_TIME UDP_TCP_PTR [ OPT ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table profile-name
INDEX [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Creates SIP agent configuration table.
EXP_TIME: SIP Registration Expiration
START_TIME: time (sec.) prior to time-out that SIP agent should start registration process
UDP_TCP_PTR: TCP/UDP service used for communication service with SIP proxy server
OPT: parameter for startup configuration only, can not be used for normal configuration.
Modifies the profile name of the agent configuration data table.
INDEX: profile index
LINE: descriptive name for profile handling.
Deletes SIP agent configuration table.
delete voip sip agent-config-data-table INDEX
Modifying the SIP Agent Parameters
To modify an entry of specified SIP agent profile index, use the following commands.
Command
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
IF_INDEX EXP_TIME START_TIME
Mode Function
Config Modifies the agent configuration data table.
IF_INDEX: interface index (similar to
/
EXP_TIME: SIP Registration Expiration
START_TIME: time (sec.) prior to time-out that SIP agent should start registration process.
Id:0900d8058023f697 143
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Command modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
proxy-ip-address INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
outband-proxy-ip-address INDEX [ LINE]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
primary-sip-dns INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
secondary-sip-dns INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
primary-sip-dns-addr INDEX A.B.C.D
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
secondary-sip-dns-addr INDEX A.B.C.D
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
host-part-uri INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
sip-registrar INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
sip-softswitch INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip agent-config-data-table
udp-tcp-ptr INDEX PTR
Mode Function
Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
INDEX: profile index
LINE: IP address or URI of the SIP proxy server for SIP signaling messages.
Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
LINE: IP address or URI of the SIP outband proxy server.
Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
LINE: IP address of the SIP primary
.
If this value is zero, the Primary SIP DNS should not be used.
Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
LINE: IP address of the SIP secondary DNS.
If this value is zero, the Secondary SIP DNS should not be used.
Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
A.B.C.D: IP address of the SIP primary DNS.
Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
A.B.C.D: IP address of the SIP secondary DNS.
Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
LINE: IP address of the SIP host part URI.
Config Modifies an IP address in the agent configuration data table.
LINE: IP address or name of the SIP registrar server for SIP signaling messages. Examples: '10.10.10.10' and 'proxy.voip.net'.
Config Modifies the agent configuration data table.
LINE: SIP gateways softswitch vendor (4
alphabetical characters [A-Z]) as defined in ANSI T1.220. All NULL characters indicates no particular vendor.
Config Associates the SIP agent with the TCP/UDP service to be used for communication with the SIP proxy server. Default value is 0 unless the IP port is associated. The attribute represents the second index of the VoIP TCP/UDP config data table (the
TCP/UDP port).
PTR: UDP/TCP pointer.
Checking the SIP Agent Configuration
To show SIP agent configuration data table, use the following command.
Command show voip sip agent-config-data-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the agent configuration data table.
Checking the SIP Agent Status
To check the SIP agent status, use the following command.
Command
get voip sip agent-status ADDRESS
Mode Function
Config SIP agent status.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1...max.).
144 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
12.8.3
SIP User Data Table
Configuring the SIP User Data Table
The table contains the user specific configuration attributes associated with a specific
VoIP CTP. Table entries are created and deleted by the NE. An entry exists for each
POTS UNI port using SIP protocol for a VoIP service offering. Table index is the interface index (of the POTS PPTP). All SIP user data entries related to one ONT must refer
the same VoIP SIP agent configuration data table entry, see 12.8.2 SIP Agent
.
user data parameters, use the following commands.
Command
modify voip sip user-data-table IF_INDEX
PTR PWD TME A_PTR FC_PTR REL_TMR ROH_TMR
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr ADDRESS
PTR PWD TME A_PTR FC_PTR RL_RMR ROH_TMR
modify voip sip user-data-table user-part-aor INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr user-part-aor ADDRESS
[ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table display-name INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr display-name ADDRESS
[ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table voice-mail-server-sip-uri INDEX
[ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr voice-mail-server-sip-uri
ADDRESS [ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table user-name INDEX [ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr user-name ADDRESS
[ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table user-password ADDRESS [ LINE ]
modify voip sip user-data-table-addr user-password ADDRESS
[ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Modifies SIP user data table.
IF_INDEX: interface index (
PPTP)
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number
(POTS port number 1 to max.)
PTR: pointer to SIP agent config data table
PWD: pointer to authentication security method table
(0xFFFF no user name/Password)
TME: voice mail server subscription time (sec.)
A_PTR: pointer to application service profile table (0xFFFF no application services profile is available)
FC_PTR: pointer to access code table (0xFFFF no feature access code table is available)
REL_TMR: release timer (sec.) - 0: use internal default
ROH_PTR: receive off-hook condition time (sec.).
Modifies SIP user identification part.
LINE: user identification part of the address of records.
This can take the form of an alphanumeric string or the directory number used to reference the user in the network.
Modifies SIP display name.
LINE: customer ID used for outgoing SIP messages display attribute in ASCII string format (Size 0..25).
Modifies SIP voice mail server SIP URI.
LINE: IP address or URI of the SIP voice mail server for SIP signaling messages.
Modifies SIP user name.
LINE: a SIP user name used for authentication.
Modifies SIP user password.
LINE: a SIP user password used for authentication.
Verifying SIP User Data Table
To show SIP user data parameters, use the following commands.
Command show voip sip user-data-table
show voip sip user-data-table-addr ADDRESS
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Displays SIP user data table.
Displays SIP user data table.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1 to max.).
Id:0900d8058023f697 145
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
12.8.4
SIP User Dial Plan Mapping
This table maps SIP user data entries to user dial plan entries. First table index is the
IF-Index of the SIP user data entry. Second table index is the pointer to a user dial plan
. Each SIP user data entry can refer to a flexible number of user dial plan entries.
Configuring of SIP User Dial Plan Mapping
To configure SIP user dial mapping table entries, use the following commands.
Command
create voip sip user-dialplan-mapping-table-entry-addr
ADDRESS DIAL_PLAN_INDEX
create voip sip user-dialplan-mapping-table-entry IF_INDEX
DIAL_PLAN_INDEX
Mode Function
Config Creates a user dial mapping table entry.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1 to max. )
IF_INDEX: interface index of SIP user data entry (primary index)
DIAL_PLAN_INDEX: user dial plan index.
Deletes a user dial mapping table entry.
delete voip sip user-dialplan-mapping-table-entry IF_INDEX
DIAL_PLAN_INDEX
delete voip sip user-dialplan-mapping-table-entry-addr
ADDRESS DIAL_PLAN_INDEX
Verifying the SIP User Dialplan Mappings
To verify SIP user dial mapping table, use the following command.
Command show voip sip user-dialplan-mapping-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows the user dialplan mapping table.
12.8.5
SIP Performance Monitoring
Configuring of PM Thresholds
To configure VoIP SIP performance thresholds, use the following commands.
Command
create voip-performance sip-agent-pm threshold <2-16>
RXINVITEREQ RXIVITREQRETRANS RXNONIVITEREQ
RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS RXRESP RXRESPRTRANS
SEVERITY
modify voip-performance sip-agent-pm threshold <1-16>
RXINVITEREQ RXIVITREQRETRANS RXNONIVITEREQ
RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS RXRESP RXRESPRTRANS
SEVERITY
delete voip-performance sip-agent-init-pm threshold
<2-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
2 - 16: table index
RXINVITEREQ: threshold for ReceiveInviteReq
RXIVITREQRETRANS: threshold for ReceiveInviteReqRetrans
RXNONIVITEREQ: threshold for ReceiveNonInviteReq
RXNONINVITEREQRETRANS: threshold for ReceiveNonInviteReqRetrans
RXRESP: threshold for ReceiveResp
RXRESPRTRANS: threshold for ReceiveRespretrans
SEVERITY: pointer to alarm severity alarm.
Modifies threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
1 - 16: table index.
Deletes threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
146 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI Voice over IP
Command
create voip-performance sip-call-init-pm threshold
<2-16> FAILEDTOCONNECT FAILEDTOVALIDATE
TIMEOUT FAILURERECEIVED FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE
SEVERITY
modify voip-performance sip-call-init-pm threshold
<1-16> FAILEDTOCONNECT FAILEDTOVALIDATE
TIMEOUT FAILURERECEIVED FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE
SEVERITY
delete voip-performance sip-call-init-pm threshold <2-16>
Mode Function
Config Creates threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
2 - 16: table index
FAILEDTOCONNECT: threshold for FailedToConnect
FAILEDTOVALIDATE: threshold for FAILEDTO Validate
TIMEOUT: threshold for Time-out
FAILURERECEIVED: threshold for FailureReceived
FALILEDTOAUTENTICATE: threshold for FailedTAuthorizstion
SEVERITY: pointer to alarm severity alarm.
Modifies threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
1 - 16: table index.
Deletes threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
Configuring of PM Objects
To configure VoIP SIP performance objects, use the following commands.
g
See 10.10.2 Calculation Algorithms for PM Objects for information on the PM object
indexes.
<1-16>
Command
create voip-performance sip-agent-pm object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
create voip-performance sip-agent-pm object-addr
ADDRESS { lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1>
modify voip-performance sip-agent-pm object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> 1-16>
modify voip-performance sip-agent-pm object-addr
ADDRESS { lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1>
<1-16>
delete voip-performance sip-call-agent-pm object INDEX
delete voip-performance sip-call-agent-pm object-addr
ADDRESS
create voip-performance sip-call-init-pm object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
modify voip-performance sip-call-init-pm object INDEX
{ lock I unlock } { lock I unlock } <0-96> <0-1> <1-16>
delete voip-performance sip-call-init-pm object INDEX
Mode Function
Config
agent performance monitoring.
INDEX: object index, physical index of ONT card
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT slot
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 15 min.)
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 24 h)
0 - 96: history size 15 min., number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type
0 - 1: history size 24 h., number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type
1 - 16: pointer to the threshold object.
Modifies the SIP agent performance monitoring object table.
Deletes object table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
Config Creates SIP agent performance monitoring.
INDEX: object index, physical index of ONT card
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 15 min.)
lock/unlock: deactivates/activates performance monitoring
(admin state 24 h.)
0 - 96: history size 15 min., number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type
0 - 1: history size 24 h, number of history entries for the PM object and the interval type
1 - 16: pointer to the threshold object.
Modifies SIP agent performance monitoring.
Deletes object table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
Id:0900d8058023f697 147
Voice over IP Operation Manual CLI
Checking the SIP Agent PM Tables
To show VoIP SIP performance objects, use the following commands.
Command show voip-performance sip-agent-pm object-table show voip-performance sip-call-init-pm object-table show voip-performance sip-agent-pm threshold-table show voip-performance sip-call-init-pm threshold-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Displays object table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
Displays object table for SIP call init monitoring.
Displays threshold table for SIP agent performance monitoring.
Displays threshold table for SIP call init monitoring.
Updating and Verifying SIP Agent PM Data
To update VoIP SIP performance data, use the following command.
Command
update voip-performance sip-agent-pm current-data
INDEX
Mode Function
Config Updates the SIP agent PM current data table.
INDEX: object index.
To show VoIP SIP performance data, use the following commands.
Command show voip-performance sip-agent-pm current-data-table show voip-performance sip-agent-pm history-data-table show voip-performance sip-call-init-pm current-data-table show voip-performance sip-agent-pm history-data-table
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Displays current data table for SIP agent PM.
Displays history data table for SIP agent PM.
Displays current data table for SIP call init monitoring.
Displays history data table for SIP call init monitoring.
12.8.6
Checking the User Status Information
Use the following commands to check information about a single SIP user (POTS port).
Command
get voip sip user-status port ADDRESS
show voip sip user-status port ADDRESS
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Starts a request of the SIP user status attributes for the specified port.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/port number (POTS port number 1 to max. ).
Shows the attributes of operation state, voice server status, and SIP agent status for the specified port.
Use the following commands to check information about all SIP users (POTS ports) of an ONT.
Command
get voip sip user-status onu ADDRESS
show voip sip user-status onu ADDRESS
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Starts a request of the SIP user status attributes for all user ports of specified ONT.
ADDRESS: OLT-slot/GPON-port/ONT-ID/ONT-slot/ONT-port.
Shows the attributes of operation state, voice server status, and
SIP agent status for all user ports of specified ONT.
Use the following command to stop a running SIP user status request.
148 Id:0900d8058023f697
Operation Manual CLI
Command clear get voip sip user-status
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Stops a running SIP user status request.
12.8.7
Verifying SIP Error Codes
To show SIP error codes, use the following command.
Command show sip error-codes
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows all possible error codes for SIP.
Voice over IP
Id:0900d8058023f697 149
MAC Operation Manual CLI
13 MAC
13.1
Setting the GPON MAC Mode
g
Before changing the MAC mode, the CXU must be unlocked and all interface units
(IU_GPON, IU_1x10G, IU_10x1G ) must be locked.
Command
gpon-mac-mode { vid I mac | enhanced-mac }
modify gpon-mac-mode { vid I mac | enhanced-mac }
show base-settings
Mode Function
Bridge Configures the GPON
mode (all IUs must be locked).
mode) mapping of VLANs to
stream and upstream) by the outer tag. VLAN translation between subscriber VLANs and service based VLANs is not possible.
mac: (MAC mode) downstream: mapping of MAC address to GEM ID is learned from upstream frames. VLAN translation between subscriber VLANs and service based VLANs is possible.
enhanced-mac: The enhanced MAC functionality supports 1:1 (VLAN cross-connect = VLAN per customer and service) and N:1 (VLAN per service, common for all subscriber) switching models per GPON port of OLT simultaneously (MAC mode and VID mode per one port).
Configures the GPON MAC mode (all IUs must be locked).
vid: (VLAN mode) mapping of VLANs to GEM ID is configured
(downstream and upstream).
mac: (MAC mode) downstream: mapping of MAC address to GEM ID is learned from upstream frames.
enhanced-mac: MAC mode with special features, see above.
Config/
Bridge
Displays GPON MAC mode and prio map range.
Example:
SWITCH(config)# show base-settings gpon mac mode : (enhanced) mac prio map range : 4
SWITCH(config)#
13.2
Configuring of Priority Mapping Profiles
The priority mapping profile defines the translation from a tag priority to another, depending on the MAC mode was defined for a certain VLAN.
Use the following command to set the priorities of traffic flows in an “enhanced MAC mode” environment.
Command
prioprofilemap modify INPRIOOUT OUTPRIOOUT
show prioprofilemap
Mode Function
Bridge Modifies a entry of the priority mapping profile.
INPRIOOUT: 0..7 with 0 = not applicable for this MAC mode
OUTPRIOOUT: 0..7
If the
is single tagged, OUTPRIOOUT means the only tag at the
NNI. In this case INPRIOOUT is not used.
Bridge Shows information about the current priority mapping for VLANs in cross-connect.
Example:
SWITCH(config)#
SWITCH(config)# bridge
150 Id:0900d8058023fad7
MAC Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH(bridge)# show prioprofilemap
Prio in | Inner prio | Outer prio
-----------------------------------
0 | 0 | 0
1 | 1 | 1
2 | 2 | 2
3 | 3 | 3
4 | 4 | 4
5 | 5 | 5
6 | 6 | 6
7 | 7 | 7
SWITCH(bridge)#
13.3
Configuring of CoS Mapping Profiles
mapping profile sets for the inner VLAN the priorities per GEM port of the ONU.
The MAC mode defined for a certain VLAN depends on the priority values of this profile.
Use the following commands to configure the CoS mapping profile.
Command
cosprofilemap INPRIOOUT
no cosprofilemap COSPROFILE
show cosprofilemap [ COSPROFILE ]
Mode Function
Bridge Creates a CoS mapping profile with an index given by system.
The maximum number of profiles is 64.
INPRIOOUT: 4 character string of priority values.
Valid values are from 0..7.
Setting of default profile: 0, 2, 4, 6.
Deletes the specified CoS profile.
COSPROFILE: profile index.
A profile that is assigned to a VLAN cannot be deleted.
Bridge Shows information about all or specified CoS mapping profile.
COSPROFILE: profile index.
Examples:
Verifying the CoS mapping profiles with show-command (only default profile #1 is present):
SWITCH(bridge)# show cosprofilemap
Profile | Number | Inner prio Out
------------------------------------
1 |
|
|
0
1
2
|
|
|
0
2
4
| 3 | 6
Creating a CoS mapping profile (profile index #2) with priority values 0, 1, 2, 3:
SWITCH(bridge)# cosprofilemap 0123
SWITCH(bridge)# show cosprofilemap
Profile | Number | Inner prio Out
------------------------------------
Id:0900d8058023fad7 151
MAC Operation Manual CLI
1 |
|
0
1
|
|
0
2
|
|
2
3
|
|
4
6
------------------------------------
2 |
|
0
1
|
|
0
1
|
|
2
3
|
|
2
3
Deleting the CoS mapping profile #2:
SWITCH(bridge)# no cosprofilemap 2
SWITCH(bridge)# show cosprofilemap
Profile | Number | Inner prio Out
------------------------------------
1 | 0 | 0
| 1 | 2
|
|
2
3
|
|
4
6
13.4
Configuring of Enhanced MAC Modes
The following commands configure the VLAN ID mapping table which determines the translation from a tagged VLAN to another in order to define rules of traffic aggregation, security in the last mile and traffic shaping.
g
If in an OLT running in enhanced MAC mode IU_GPON cards that were offline configured start up, the VLANs using this MAC mode will be sent to such IU_GPONs.
For online configuration the enhanced MAC mode must be enabled and the
IU_GPONs must be ready for service.
13.4.1
N : 1 Bridge Mode
In an N:1 VLAN scenario, several subscriber share one VLAN for one service. The CoS classification depends on the .1p priority bits.
Use the following command to configure the enhanced MAC mode 1.
Command
enhanced-mode nto1-ChangeVlanPerC-tag VLANID
CHANGEDVID PRIOPROFILE
Mode Function
Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table.
MAC mode 1 (N:1) - changing VLAN per c-tag.
VLANID: VLAN-ID (customer c-tag)
CHANGEDVID: VLAN-ID (service s-tag)
PRIOPROFILE: index of priority mapping profile.
13.4.2
1: 1 VLAN Cross-Connect Mode
The c-tag incoming from UNI side contains the service information. That means the user frame is already tagged with a VLAN-ID per service. The inner c-tag contains the UNI information and the outer s-tag contains the service information. Therefore, the GPON-
MAC provides two translation tables. The first one is used for the translation of the c-tag
152 Id:0900d8058023fad7
Operation Manual CLI MAC information into the related s-tag information at the NNI. The second one is needed, to translate the ID part of GEM-port, which is related to the UNI-port, into the inner s-tag
VID at the NNI side.
Therefore, the configuration of 1:1 cross-connect (CC) mode is divided into the two configuration tasks:
– per GPON port
– per subscriber port
The following commands must be used always in conjunction to configure the enhanced
MAC mode 2.
Command Mode Function
enhanced-mode 1to1-CCAddOuterPerC-tag VLANID PONPORT
OUTERVID PRIOPROFILE
Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table.
MAC mode 2 (1:1- cross-connect by adding outer tag
(service tag) per c-tag.
VLANID: port VID
PONPORT: slot/port
OUTERVID: service VID
PRIOPROFILE: index of priority mapping profile.
enhanced-mode 1to1-CCChangeInnerPerPort { VLANID | all }
SUBSCRPORT INNERVID COSPROFILE
Bridge Adds or modifies an entry in the VLAN mapping table.
all: all VLANs
VLANID: port VID
SUBSCRPORT: slot/port/ONU-ID/ONU-slot / ONU-port
INNERVID: inner VLAN-ID
COSPROFILE: CoS profile index 1..64,
13.4.3
Disabling the Enhanced MAC Mode of VLAN
To disable the enhanced mode of a VLAN, use the following command.
Command
no enhanced-mode VLANIDS [ PORT ]
Mode Function
Bridge Deletes an entry in the VLAN mapping table.
VLANIDS: specify VLANs
PORT: slot/port [ /ONU-ID/ONU-slot/ONU-port ].
13.4.4
Checking VLAN Mapping Information
Command
show vidmap { database | subscriber } [ VLANID ]
Mode
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows information of all or specified VLAN.
database: shows all configured VID map table entries
subscriber: shows the translation for the subscriber, depending on the VLAN table.
13.4.5
Modifying the MAC Mode of VLAN
Use the following commands to read or modify the MAC mode parameters of a VLAN.
Id:0900d8058023fad7 153
MAC Operation Manual CLI
macmode VLANID MODE
Command
show macmode VLANID
Mode Function
Bridge Defines a behavior per VLAN, based on configurations defined by the previous prioprofilemap command.
Modifies the MAC mode value of specified VLAN.
VLANID: enter the VLAN-ID
MODE: number of MAC mode to be new set for the specified
VLAN:
1 = N:1 bridge mode
2 = 1:1 VLAN cross-connect mode with tagged uses frames.
Config/
Bridge
Shows the current MAC mode of specified VLAN-ID.
Changing a VLAN to Enhanced MAC Mode
Perform the following tasks in order to change the MAC mode of VLAN:
1. Check if the VLAN fulfills the requirements for the new MAC mode.
2. Change the GPON MAC mode. The existing VID mapping entries will be deleted automatically.
3. Create default VID mapping entries.
Example:
The following commands set the MAC in enhanced mode and assign the MAC mode 2 to VLAN 100:
SWITCH(bridge)#gpon-mac-mode enhanced-mac
SWITCH(bridge)#show base-settings
SWITCH(bridge)#macmode 100 2
SWITCH(bridge)#show macmode 100
13.5
MAC Table
There are two hardware address types that are registered in a MAC table: dynamic MAC addresses and static MAC addresses. A static MAC address can be configured by the operator and remains unaffected even after the system was rebooted. Dynamic MAC address entries of this table are formed during a learning process in upstream direction.
13.5.1
Dynamic Addresses
Enabling of Address Learning
Dynamic addresses are automatically added to the MAC table and dropped from it when they are not in use.
Command
mac learning-uplink { enable I disable }
Mode Function
Bridge MAC learning configuration (only uplinks affected).
enable (default) / disable MAC address learning on uplink ports .
MAC Aging-Time
If an
was not accessed during a specified interval called “MAC aging-time”, its reg-
istered MAC address will be deleted from the table.
154 Id:0900d8058023fad7
Operation Manual CLI MAC
Command
mac aging-time <10-4080>
show mac aging-time
Mode Function
Bridge Sets the maximum amount of time a dynamically "learned".
MAC address remains in the MAC table.
10 - 4080: aging time in seconds (default value is 300 s).
Bridge Shows the aging time.
Clearing dynamically Addresses
A dynamic address can also be deleted manually from MAC table when it is unnecessary.
Command
clear mac
clear mac NAME
clear mac NAME PORT
clear mac NAME PORT XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Mode
Bridge
Function
Deletes the specified dynamically address(es) from MAC table.
NAME: enter the bridge name
PORT: enter the port number
XX.XX...: enter the MAC address.
13.5.2
Static Addresses
From Bridge configuration mode, use the following command to manage static address entries of a MAC table.
Command
mac NAME PORT XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Mode Function
Bridge Registers static address in MAC table.
NAME: enter the bridge name
PORT: enter the port number
XX:XX...: enter the MAC address.
Example of registering the MAC address 00:01:02:9a:61:17 in port 12 of MAC table for
VLAN 1:
SWITCH(bridge)#mac 1 12 00:01:02:9a:61:17
SWITCH(bridge)#
Unnecessary static MAC addresses will not be removed regardless after the cycle of
MAC aging time. They have to be removed manually. In another case, if an static MAC address needs to be assigned to a new port, this MAC address must first be deleted from the MAC address table in order to assign it afterwards to the other interface.
Command
no mac
no mac NAME
no mac NAME PORT
no mac NAME PORT XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Mode
Bridge
Function
Deletes the specified static address(es) from MAC table.
NAME: enter the bridge name.
PORT: enter the port number.
XX.XX...: enter the MAC address.
13.5.3
Showing MAC Table Information
g
Up to 32k (CXU_VR) of MAC addresses can be registered in a MAC table. Hence, it is difficult to find out the information you need at one sight. When the show command is executed, only a small number of addresses will be displayed. If the line
Id:0900d8058023fad7 155
MAC Operation Manual CLI
-more- appears, press any key to search more. After you have found the needed information, press q
to go back to the system prompt without displaying the other table entries.
Command
show mac vlan NAME
show mac vlan NAME PORT
show mac vlan NAME PORT detail
Mode
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Shows MAC addresses selected by VLAN (MAC address learned at IU only are invisible).
NAME: VLAN name
PORT: port number.
Shows MAC table details with ONU index, selection by VLAN
(MAC addresses learned at IU only are invisible),
NAME: VLAN name
PORT: port number.
Example of showing the MAC address of destination, specified port number, VLAN ID, and time the address is registered in table.
The first table entry is the switches own MAC address and hence is the permission static.
SWITCH (bridge)#
show mac 1 12 port (id)
mac addr permission in use eth24(12) 00:01:02:9a:61:1a
static
0.00 eth24(12) 00:10:5a:84:46:76
OK 0.01 eth24(12) 00:d0:cb:0a:a0:b7
OK 0.15
(omitted)
SWITCH (bridge)#
156 Id:0900d8058023fad7
Bridges Operation Manual CLI
14 Bridges
The bridge configuration is described in the following chapters:
•
•
•
.
14.1
Configuring the Bridge Base
This chapter describes commands which are set the switching mode, tagging mode, and residential mode of
14.1.1
Common Bridge Base Commands
The following command takes effect without restriction of a specific OLT card.
Command
bridgebase outerEtherType ETHERTYPE
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets QinQ encapsulation configurable outer tag ethertype without CXU specific scope.
ETHERTYPE: 0x8100, 0x88a8, 0x9100 or 0x9200.
14.1.2
CXU Bridge
Command
bridgebase cxu bridgemode { basic I diffserv I enhanced }
bridgebase cxu switching-mode { independent-vlan-learning I shared-vlan-learning I vlan-switching }
bridgebase cxu taggingmode { single I double }
bridgebase cxu residential-mode { on I off }
bridgebase cxu outertagging PVID PRIORITY
bridgebase cxu outerEtherType ETHERTYPE
bridgebase cxu dlf-filter { enable I disable }
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures the general mode of the CXU bridge that will influence some QoS-features.
Configures bridgebase outer tagging.
vlan-switching: no learning of MAC addresses, all frames are flooded in their VLANs
independent-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses.
MAC addresses must be unique for all VLANs.
shared-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs. MAC addresses must be unique in one
VLAN.
Configures the taggingmode of CXU.
single: bridgebase tagging mode - single
double: bridgebase tagging mode - double.
residential mode.
on: internal routing of frames between subscribers is disabled (default setting)
off: internal routing of frames between subscribers is enabled if not separated by VLAN.
Sets the outertag defaults.
PRIORITY: default outer tag priority.
Sets QinQ encapsulation configurable outer tag ethertype with/without CXU specific scope.
ETHERTYPE: 0x8100, 0x88a8, 0x9100 or 0x9200
Configures destination-lockup-failure filter.
enable: destination-MAC unknown unicast towards subscriber ports blocked.
disable: destination-MAC unknown unicast towards subscriber ports allowed.
Id:0900d8058025fb9e 157
Bridges
show bridgebase cxu
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Displays bridge base for CXU.
Operation Manual CLI
14.1.3
Bridge of Interface Unit
Command
bridgebase iu IUSLOT switching-mode
{ independent-vlan-learning | shared-vlan-learning | vlan-switching }
bridgebase iu IUSLOT bridgemode { basic I diffserv I enhanced }
bridgebase iu IUSLOT taggingmode { single I double }
bridgebase iu IUSLOT residential-mode { on I off }
show bridgebase iu IUSLOT
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures bridgebase IU outertagging.
IUSLOT: slot in main shelf
vlan-switching: no learning of MAC addresses, all frames are flooded in their VLANs (switch key VLAN)
independent-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses. MAC addresses must be unique for all
VLANs (switch key MAC+ VLAN)
shared-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs. MAC addresses must be unique in one VLAN (switch key MAC).
Configures general mode of the bridge that will influence some QoS-features.
IUSLOT: slot in main shelf.
Configures bridgebase IU tagging mode. Double tagging affects only the GPON uplink interfaces, not the hiG interlink interfaces to CXU.
IUSLOT: slot in main shelf
single: bridgebase tagging mode - single
double: bridgebase tagging mode - double.
Configures bridgebase IU residential mode.
IUSLOT: slot in main shelf
on: no traffic between GPON links possible (default)
off: traffic between GPON links possible.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Displays bridge base for IUs on specified slot:
IUSLOT: slot in main shelf.
14.1.4
ONU Bridge
Command
bridgebase onu ONU switching-mode
{ independent-vlan-learning | shared-vlan-learning | vlan-switching }
bridgebase onu ONU residential-mode { on I off }
show bridgebase onu [ ONU ]
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures bridgebase ONU switching mode.
ONU: ONU address (IU slot/GPON link/ONU ID)
vlan-switching: no learning of MAC addresses, all frames are flooded in their VLANs (switch key VLAN)
independent-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses. MAC addresses must be unique for all
VLANs (switch key MAC+ VLAN)
shared-vlan-learning: bridge learns MAC addresses and all existing VLANs. MAC addresses must be unique in one VLAN (switch key MAC).
ONU: ONU address (IU slot/GPON link/ONU ID)
on: no traffic between GPON links possible
off: traffic between GPON links possible.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Displays bridge base for ONU.
ONU: address (IU slot/GPON link/ONU ID).
158 Id:0900d8058025fb9e
Bridges Operation Manual CLI
14.2
Configuring of Bridge Ports
14.2.1
Tagging Rules
Tagging rules are defined for upstream direction. Each table entry represents a tagging rule, consisting of a filtering part and a treatment part. The filtering part must be unique.
There are three categories of rules: zero-tag, single-tag and double-tag rules. Logically, these categories are separate, and apply to their respective incoming frame types.
Single tag rules have a filter outer prio = 15. zero-tag rules have both filter priority fields = 15.
The tagging rule table has 3 default entries that list the default treatment (of normal forwarding) for untagged, single tagged, and double tagged frames. As an exception to the ordered processing, these default rules are always considered as a last resort for frames that do not match any other applicable rule. The 3 default entries can neither be deleted nor modified.
Use the following commands to configure tagging rules.
Id:0900d8058025fb9e 159
Bridges Operation Manual CLI
Command
taggingrule <1-255> create <0-15>
<0-4096> <0-7> <0-15> <0-4096> <0-7>
<0-3> <0-2> <0-15> <0-4097> <0-7> <0-15>
<0-4097> <0-7>
Mode Function
taggingrule create <0-15> <0-4096> <0-7>
<0-15> <0-4096> <0-7> <0-3> <0-2> <0-15>
<0-4097> <0-7> <0-15> <0-4097> <0-7>
Bridge Creates an entry of tagging rule table (free running rule index).
0 - 15: filter outer prio
0-7: the given outer priority to filter the received frames
8: indicates not to filter on outer priority
14: indicates the default filter when no other double-tag rule in this table applies
15: indicates that this entry is not a double-tag rule and all other outer tag filter fields should be ignored.
0 - 4096: filter outer VID (0..4094, 4096 indicates not to filter on the outer VID)
0 - 7: filter outer TPID
0: do not filter on outer TPID field
4: outer TPID = 8100
5: outer TPID = input TPID, “don’t care” about DE bit
6: outer TPID = input TPID, DE=0
7: outer TPID = input TPID, DE=1
0 - 15: filter inner prio
0-7: the given inner priority value to filter the received frames
8: indicates not to filter on inner priority
14: indicates the default filter when no other one-tag rule in this table applies
15: indicates that this entry is the no-tag rule
0 - 4096: filter inner VID (0..4094, 4096: indicates not to filter on the inner VID)
0 - 7: filter inner TPID
0: do not filter on inner TPID field
4: inner TPID = 8100
5: inner TPID = input TPID, “don’t care” about DE bit
6: inner TPID = input TPID, DE=0
7: inner TPID = input TPID, DE=1
0 - 3: filter EtherType
0 - 2: indicates that 0, 1, or 2 treat tags, respectively, are to be removed. If one tag is specified, then it is the outer tag that should be removed.
0 - 15: treat outer prio
0-7: the given priority to insert in the outer VLAN tag
8: the outer priority is to be copied from the inner priority of the received frame
9: the outer priority is to be copied from the outer priority of the received frame
15: do not add an outer tag
0 - 4097: treat outer VID (0..4094; 4096: the outer VID is to be copied from the inner VID of the received frame; 4097: the outer VID is to be copied from the outer
VID of the received frame)
0 - 7: treat outer TPID
0: TPID (and DE, if present) copied from inner tag of received frame
1: TPID (and DE, if present) copied from outer tag of received frame
2: TPID = output TPID, and DE copied fron inner tag of received frame
3: TPID = output TPID, and DE copied from outer tag of received frame
4: TPID = 0x8100
6: TPID = output TPID, DE=0
7: TPID = output TPID, DE=1
0 - 15: treat inner prio
0-7: the given priority to insert in the inner VLAN tag
8: the inner priority is to be copied from the inner priority of the received frame
9: the inner priority is to be copied from the outer priority of the received frame
15: do not add an inner tag
0 - 4097: treat inner VID (0..4094; 4096: the inner VID is to be copied from the inner VID of the received frame; 4097: the inner VID is to be copied from the outer
VID of the received frame)
0 - 7: treat inner TPID, meaning of values as specified for treat outer TPID.
Creates an entry of tagging rule table with specific index.
1 - 255: index of tagging rule.
160 Id:0900d8058025fb9e
Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode
taggingrule modify <1-255> <0-15>
<0-4096> <0-7> <0-15> <0-4096> <0-7>
<0-3> <0-2> <0-15> <0-4097> <0-7> <0-15>
<0-4097> <0-7>
Bridge Modifies values of specified tagging rule.
taggingrule delete <1-255> Deletes the specified tagging rule.
Function
Use the following command to verify the tagging rule table.
show taggingrule table
Command Mode
Bridge
Function
Displays information of tagging rule table.
Bridges
14.2.2
Enhanced Tagging Profile
An enhanced tagging profile contains a list of tagging rules that are assigned to ONT subscriber bridge ports.
Each upstream incoming packet is matched against each rule in list order. The first rule that matches the packet is selected as the active rule, and the packet is then treated according to that rule.
If enabled, the operation performed in the downstream direction is the inverse of that performed in the upstream direction. For one-to-one VLAN mappings, the inverse is trivially defined. Multi-to-one mappings are possible, however, these are treated as follows:
• If the multi-to-one mapping results from multiple operation rules producing the same
-side tag configuration, then the first rule in the list will be used to define the inverse operation.
• If the multi-to-one mapping results from “Don’t care” fields in the filter being replaced with provisioned fields in the ANI-side tags, then the inverse is defined to set the corresponding fields on the ANI-side with their lowest value.
Command
enhtagprofile create NAME ITPID OTIPD <0-1> RULELIST
enhtagprofile <1-65535> create NAME ITPID OTIPD <0-1> RULELIST
Mode
Bridge
enhtagprofile modify <1-65535> ITPID OTIPD <0-1> RULELIST
enhtagprofile delete <1-65535>
Function
Creates an enhanced tagging profile, Besides a free running profile index, an enhanced tagging profile can be also created through a specific index.
NAME: name of profile
ITPID: inner TPID value for operations on the input
(filtering) side of the profile
OTIPD: outer TPID for operations on the output (tagging) side of the profile.
Typical values for ITPID ans OTIPD include 0x8a88 and 0x9100.
0 - 1: downstream mode
0 - downstream operation is performed as described above.
1 - no operation is performed in the downstream direction
RULELIST: index of tagging rule table (1.. 255)
1 - 65535: index of enhanced tagging profile.
Modifies parameters of specified enhanced tagging profile.
Deletes the specified enhanced tagging profile.
Use the following command to verify the enhanced tagging profiles.
Id:0900d8058025fb9e 161
Bridges Operation Manual CLI
show enhtagprofile table
Command Mode
Bridge
Function
Displays information of enhanced tagging profiles.
14.2.3
DSCP-to-Dot1p Mapping Profile
to .1p mapping profile is necessary dependent on the configured tagging mode
of the bridge port (see 14.2.4 Bridge Port Parameters
) as follows. If ingress packets are already tagged (tagging mode is “tagged”) and the port priority is DSCP, the profile will be used to filter frames with allowed .1p priority bits. If the tagging mode is set
“untagged” or “transparent” and the port priority is DSCP, a tag will be added to user’s upstream frames. One default profile always exists and cannot be deleted but modified.
Use the following commands to manage up to 16 DSCP to .1p mapping profiles.
dscp-dot1p-map-profile create [ [PROFID [ [DSCPPOS
DSCPFIELD ] ] ]
Command
dscp-dot1p-map-profile modify PROFID DSCPPOS DSCPFIELD
dscp-dot1p-map-profile delete PROFID
show dscp-dot1p-map-profile [ PROFID ]
Mode
Bridge
Function
Creates a new profile.
PROFID: profile ID (1 to 16) of DSCP-dot1p-mapprofile (0 means looking for next free entry)
DSCPPOS: start index in map table for next parameter
(undeclared .1p elements have prio 0)
DSCPFIELD: character string with characters between 0 and 7, e.g. 112270123.
Modifies a profile.
Deletes a profile.
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Displays DSCP .1p map profile.
14.2.4
Bridge Port Parameters
Use the following commands to configure the ONT bridge port parameters.
Command
bridgeport PORTS taggingmode { off I tagged I untagged I transparent | enhanced }
bridgeport PORTS enhtaggprof <1-65535>
no bridgeport PORTS enhtaggprof
bridgeport PORTS pvid PVIDS
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures bridge port tagging mode.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
off: untagged, tagged and double tagged frames are forwarded unchanged
tagged: tagged and double tagged frames are forwarded, untagged frames are dropped
untagged: untagged frames are forwarded, tagged and double tagged frames are dropped
transparent: add a tag frame, untagged -> tagged, tagged -> double tagged (0x8100) Q-in-Q
enhanced: ONT bridge ports are tagged according tagging profile.
Sets enhanced tagging profile for bridge port.
1 - 65535: enhanced tagging profile index, see 14.2.2 Enhanced
Tagging Profile for more information.
Deletes the enhanced tagging profile from port.
Configures
.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
PVIDS: list of PVIDs, e.g., 101-172, 101.
162 Id:0900d8058025fb9e
Operation Manual CLI Bridges
no bridgeport PORTS maxhosts
bridgeport PORTS mode { ipoa I ipoe | vcc-aggr
{ enable | disable } }
Command
bridgeport PORTS priority PRIORITY
bridgeport PORTS priority-option dot1p PRIORITY
bridgeport PORTS priority-option dscp
DSCPPROFILE
bridgeport PORTS host-protocol
{ none I dhcp I pppoe I dhcp-pppoe }
bridgeport PORTS circuitid CIRCUITID
bridgeport PORTS maxhosts MAXHOST
bridgeport PORTS srcmacaddr
{ auto I SRCMACADR }
no bridgeport PORTS srcmacaddr
bridgeport PORTS ethertype
{ disable | enable IPoE-VLAN IPoE-Prio ARP-VLAN
ARP-Prio PPPoE-VLAN PPPoE-Prio }
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Sets new priority for bridgemode.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
PRIORITY: .1p priority (0-7).
Configures bridgeport priority option. Incoming frames gets configured .1p.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
PRIORITY: .1p priority (0-7).
mode for bridgeport priority option.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
DSCPPROFILE: DSCP-to .1p profile ID
See 14.2.3 DSCP-to-Dot1p Mapping Profile
for more information.
Configures host configuration protocol.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20.
none: no host protocol
host protocol
dhcp-pppoe: DHCP and PPPoE host protocol
See 18 DHCP and PPPoE for more information.
Configures DHCP circuit ID, needed for special Options in DHCP or
PPPoE.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/72/1,0/1
CIRCUITID: DHCP circuit ID (““““ means no circuit ID)
See 18.4 DHCP Option 82 / PPPoE Option 105
for more information.
Configures maximum number of usable MAC addresses per subscriber port.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20
MAXHOSTS: max. value for learned MAC per port.
Deletes max hosts.
Configures mode of this bridgeport
. The activation of mode IPoA is only possible, if a default gateway in the corresponding
VLAN-table entry (PVID) is configured.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20
mode
vcc-aggr:
aggregator can be enabled/disabled.
Configures source for MAC address if this port is running in
mode.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20
auto: no source
address configuration for IPoA
SRCMACADR: source MAC address, e.g., 00:11:22:33:44:55.
Deletes source for MAC address for IPoA,
Bridge Configures ethertype based tagging.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20
disable: disables ethertype based tagging
enable: enables ethertype based tagging (IPoE,
,
IPoE-VLAN: TCI's VLAN value for upstream tagging of IPoE frames
IPoE-Prio: TCI's priority value for upstream tagging of IPoE frames
ARP-VLAN: TCI's VLAN value for upstream tagging of ARP frames
ARP-Prio: TCI's priority value for upstream VLAN tagging of ARP frames
PPPoE-VLAN: TCI's VLAN value for upstream tagging of PPPoE frames
PPPoE-Prio: TCI's priority value for upstream tagging of PPPoE frames.
Id:0900d8058025fb9e 163
Bridges Operation Manual CLI
Command
bridgeport PORTS antispoofing { enable | disable }
bridgeport PORTS mode vcc-aggr { enable I disable }
no bridgeport PORTS mode vcc-aggr
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Bridge port IP anti-spoofing configuration.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20.
enable: enables IP anti-spoofing
disable: disables IP anti-spoofing
For further settings see 23 IP Anti-Spoofing
.
aggregator.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20.
Deletes VCC aggregator.
bridgeport PORTS multicast-packagegroup
MCPKGGPR
Bridge Configures multicast package group.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20.
MCPKGGPR: multicast package group, e.g., 1.2.3 (““ means no list)
For further settings see 19.7 IGMP Subscriber Port
To check the port configuration, use the follwing command.
Command
show bridgeport [ PORTS ]
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Displays bridge port configuration.
PORTS: port number/range of port numbers, e.g., 1/1/1-1/12/1,0/1.
14.2.5
Traffic Limitation
The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports traffic bridge port shaping and policing as denoted in
23 . To set the limitations, the following tasks must be performed:
1.
Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles
2.
Configuring Shaping and Policing on Bridge Port .
Type
hix 5709 MDU R2.0
G-25A SFU
G-25E SFU
Egress Rate Limiting Ingress Rate Limiting
Shaping downstream for xDSL Policing downstream for GE and xDSL, upstream for xDSL per PVC,
Shaping downstream for GE -
Table 23
Bridge Port Shaping and Policing
Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles
This profile states the sustained and peak data rate. There are different traffic descriptor profiles (up to 64) configurable for in-bound and out-bound traffic. The out-bound traffic descriptor describes the limitations on traffic rate leaving the
, upstream), the in-bound descriptor describes the limitations on traffic rate entering the MAC bridge (policing towards the
, downstream).
g
Traffic Descriptor Profiles can be only created or deleted but they cannot be modified.
164 Id:0900d8058025fb9e
Operation Manual CLI Bridges
Command Mode
bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile create { sust_rate } { peak_rate } Bridge
bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile delete { profile_index }
bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile create <0-150000>
<0-150000> [ NAME ]
bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile <1-64> create <0-150000>
<0-150000> [ NAME ]
bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile delete <1-64>
Bridge
Function
Creates a bridgeport traffic descriptor profile that specifies a sustained data rate and a peak data rate.
Rate ranges: 0..150,000 KBytes/sec.
sust_rate: sustained data rate
peak_rate: peak data rate.
Deletes a bridgeport traffic descriptor profile with index.
profile_index: specifies the profile.
Creates a traffic descriptor profile.
1 - 64: index of bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile table
0 - 150000: SIR (Sustained Information Rate) in kByte/s
0 - 150000: PIR (Peak Information Rate) in kByte/s
NAME: traffic descriptor name.
Deletes specified traffic descriptor profile.
1 - 64: index of bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile table.
Use the following command to check the traffic-descriptor-profile table.
Command show bridgeport-traffic-desc-profile table
Mode Function
Bridge Shows the table with config data.
Configuring Shaping and Policing on Bridge Port
Traffic shaping and policing permit to define sustained and peak data rates for a customer bridge port. For this, there are two steps necessary:
1. Configuring of
Creating of Traffic Descriptor Profiles
.
2. Assigning of the profile(s) to the desired bridgeport. Two profiles are provided, one for upstream traffic (shaping) and another for downstream traffic (policing).
Command
bridgeport PORTS policing <1-64>
no bridgeport PORTS policing
bridgeport PORTS shaping <1-64>
no bridgeport PORTS shaping
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Ingress traffic policing. Specifies for this bridgeport an downstream traffic profile.
PORTS: port number slot/port/ONU_ID/ ONU_slot/ONU_port
1 - 64: bridgeport inbound traffic descriptor ID.
Disables policing feature for specified bridgeport.
Egress traffic shaping. Specifies for this bridgeport an upstream traffic profile.
PORTS: port number slot/port/ONU_ID/ ONU_slot/ONU_port
1 - 64: bridgeport outbound traffic descriptor ID.
Disables shaping feature for specified bridgeport.
14.3
Port Mirroring
To enable/disable an IU_1x10G mirror monitor port, use the following command.
Command
mirror monitor PORT
show mirror monitor
Mode Function
Bridge Enables the monitoring port.
PORT: select uplink port number
Use the no parameter with this command to delete the monitor port.
Bridge Shows the monitor port.
Id:0900d8058025fb9e 165
Operation Manual CLI Interface Configuration
15 Interface Configuration
15.1
Enabling of an Interface
Before an IP address can be assigned to the network interface, the interface communication must be enabled. Use the show running-config interface command to verify the interface status. g
By default, the hiX 5750 R2.0 system is set to communicate over the interface
mgmt.
An interface can be enabled on Configuration mode or Interface configuration mode.
Interface Configuration Mode
At first, use the following command to change into Interface configuration mode.
Command
interface INTERFACENAME
Mode
Config
Function
Choose Interface configuration mode of the specified interface.
INTERFACENAME: interface that has to be configured.
For the outband management connection choose mgmt.
After this, use the no shutdown command to enable the interface.
no shutdown shutdown exit end
Command Mode Function
Interface Enables the interface on Interface Configuration mode.
Disables the interface on Interface Configuration mode.
Return to Configuration mode or Privileged exec mode with the following commands.
Command Mode Function
Interface Returns to Configuration mode.
Returns to Privileged exec mode.
Example of enabling the interface 1:
SWITCH#
configure terminal
SWITCH#
interface 1
SWITCH(config-if)#
no shutdown
SWITCH(config-if)#
Configuration Mode
Execute the following command to enable/disable an interface on Configuration mode.
Command
interface { shutdown I noshutdown } INTERFACENAME
Mode
Config
Function
Disables/enables the interface on Configuration mode.
INTERFACENAME: interface that should be deactivated/activated.
g
To manage multiple interfaces, use the delimiter “-“ or “, ”.
166 Id:0900d80580257621
Operation Manual CLI Interface Configuration
15.2
Assigning an IP Address to the Interface
After enabling the network interface, assign an IP address and subnet mask to this interface by using the ip address commands in the Interface mode.
Command
ip address ADDRESS/M
ip address ADDRESS/M scope { host | link }
ip address ADDRESS/M secondary
Mode Function
Interface Sets IP address of an Interface.
ADDRESS/M: specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP
Use the no parameter with this command to clear designated IP address.
Sets link/host IP address.
ADDRESS/M: specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP
host: IP address for the appropriate equipment
link: IP address for the appropriate network.
Sets secondary IP address of an Interface.
ADDRESS/M: specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP
Use the no parameter with this command to clear secondary IP address.
Example of assigning the IP address 192.168.1.10 to 1:
SWITCH(config-if)#
ip address 192.168.1.10/16
SWITCH(config-if)#
All assigned IP addresses can be cleared with the following commands.
no ip address
Command Mode
Interface Clears all IP addresses.
Function show ip
15.3
Displaying the IP Address of Interface
Use the following command to display an assigned IP address.
Command Mode Function
Interface Displays an assigned IP address of the interface.
SWITCH(config-if)# show ip
IP-Address Status
-------------------------------------
10.7.24.199/16 global
SWITCH(config-if)#
15.4
Displaying the Interface Status
To check the interface status and configuration, use the following command.
Command
show interface [ INTERFACENAME ]
Mode Function
Privileged/
Config/
Interface
Shows Interface status and configuration.
Id:0900d80580257621 167
Interface Configuration
Example:
SWITCH(config)#
show interface
Interface lo
Hardware is Loopback index 1 metric 1 mtu 16436 <UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING>
VRF Binding: Not bound
Bandwidth 100m input packets 318223, bytes 56058589, dropped 0, multicast packets 0 input errors 0, length 0, overrun 0, CRC 0, frame 0, fifo 0, missed 0 output packets 318223, bytes 56058589, dropped 0 output errors 0, aborted 0, carrier 0, fifo 0, heartbeat 0, window 0 collisions 0
Interface mgmt
Hardware is Ethernet, address is 0800.0626.1a69 index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,MULTICAST>
VRF Binding: Not bound
Bandwidth 100m inet 10.2.2.20/24 broadcast 10.2.2.255 input packets 16085, bytes 8778585, dropped 0, multicast packets 0 input errors 0, length 0, overrun 0, CRC 0, frame 0, fifo 0, missed 0 output packets 9245, bytes 2955103, dropped 0 output errors 0, aborted 0, carrier 0, fifo 0, heartbeat 0, window 0 collisions 0
Interface br4094
Hardware is Ethernet, address is 0800.0626.1a69 index 41 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,MULTICAST>
VRF Binding: Not bound
Bandwidth 100m inet 10.254.254.100/27 broadcast 10.255.255.255 input packets 19418, bytes 13580234, dropped 0, multicast packets 0 input errors 0, length 0, overrun 0, CRC 0, frame 0, fifo 0, missed 0 output packets 26948, bytes 12872892, dropped 0 output errors 0, aborted 0, carrier 0, fifo 0, heartbeat 0, window 0 collisions 0
SWITCH(config)#
Operation Manual CLI
168 Id:0900d80580257621
Operation Manual CLI VLAN
16 VLAN
The first step in setting up a bridging network is to define
network that is logically segmented by subscriber or function. Each VLAN contains a group of ports. Packets on the VLAN which are received on a port will be forwarded only to ports that are member of the same VLAN. Network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 switching device to route traffic between the VLANs. These VLANs improve performance because they reduce the propagation of local traffic, and they improve security benefits because they completely separate traffic.
The IEEE 802.1q based ports on the switches support simultaneous tagged and untagged traffic. An 802.1q port is assigned to a default port VLAN ID (PVID), and all untagged traffic is assumed to belong to the port default PVID. Thus, the ports participating in the VLANs accept packets bearing VLAN tags and transmit them to the port VLAN ID.
VLAN configuration is described in the chapters:
•
•
•
Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports
•
Assigning the VLAN to DHCP/PPPoE Provider
•
Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway
•
Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN
•
Checking the VLAN Configuration
.
g
For detailed information about the configuration of VLAN scenarios using the enhanced MAC modes, see chapter
13.1 Setting the GPON MAC Mode
.
16.1
Configuring a VLAN
Command
vlan create VLANS MODE
no vlan VLANS
vlan name VLANS { none I NAME }
no vlan name VLANS
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Funciton
Creates new VLAN by assigning VLAN ID.
VLANS: enter the number of VLAN ID (from 1 to 4093)
MODE: enter number of enhanced MAC mode
1: MAC mode 1 (N:1) - changing VLAN per ctag
2: MAC mode 2 (1:1- cross-connect by adding outer tag (service tag) per c-tag (default).
Deletes the specified VLAN. g
Before deleting a VLAN, all ports must be removed.
Configures VLAN name.
VLANS: select VLAN IDs, e.g., 101-148, 1000
NAME: enter a VLAN name.
Deletes VLAN name.
The variable VLANS is a particular set of bridged interfaces. Frames are bridged only among interfaces of the same VLAN.
The VLAN ID is contained in the VLAN tag of transmitted packets. If a port is configured in tagging mode, it will send tagged traffic.
Deleting a VLAN
The following tasks must be performed in order to delete a VLAN:
Id:0900d80580221ef7 169
VLAN Operation Manual CLI
Step 1 Delete all ports associated with the VLAN (see 16.3 Assigning the VLAN to
Step 2 Delete the VLAN.
Example:
SWITCH(bridge)#vlan del 10 0/1-0/4
SWITCH(bridge)#no vlan 10
SWITCH(bridge)#show vlan 10
%vlan 10 doesn't exist--------------------------------
16.2
Enabling a Host VLAN
In order to enable a host-VLAN, use the following command.
host-vlan <1-4093>
Command Mode
Config
Funciton
Adds host to a specified VLAN.
1 - 4093: enter the VLAN ID
Use the no parameter with this command to delete a host VLAN.
16.3
Assigning the VLAN to Bridgeports
Command
vlan add VLANS PORTS { tagged I untagged }
[ { PORTS { tagged I untagged } } ]
vlan del VLANS PORTS
Mode Function
Bridge Adds port to specified VLAN.
VLANS: enter the VLAN IDs, e.g., 101-148, 1000
PORTS: enter the port number for tagged or untagged traffic.
Deletes associated ports from specified VLAN.
g
To assign several ports to a VLAN, enter each port separated by a comma without space. Use dash mark “-“ to arrange port range.
Example:
The example shows the following steps:
Enter the Configuration mode, enable a switching process, and perform the configuration tasks:
Create a VLAN, add a untagged port to the VLAN, add a PVID to port (see
), show VLAN configuration (see 16.7 Checking the VLAN Configuration ), enable VLAN interface (see
), show interface configuration.
Enter Interface mode:
Add IP address, enable interface, exit interface mode, show interface configuration.
SWITCH# configure terminal
SWITCH(config)#bridge
SWITCH(bridge)#vlan create 4
SWITCH(bridge)#vlan add 4 9/1 untagged
SWITCH(bridge)#bridgeport 9/1 pvid 4
SWITCH(bridge)#exit
SWITCH(config)#show vlan
SWITCH(config)#host-vlan 4
SWITCH(config)#show vlan
SWITCH(config)#show interface br4
170 Id:0900d80580221ef7
VLAN Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH(config)#interface br4
SWITCH(config-if)#ip address 172.0.0.1/26
SWITCH(config-if)#no shutdown
SWITCH(config-if)#exit
SWITCH(config)#show interface br4
16.4
Assigning the VLAN to DHCP/PPPoE Provider
Use the following commands in order to assign a DHCP/PPPoE provider to the specified
VLAN.
g
For detailed information see also 18.2 DHCP/PPPoE Provider
.
Command
vlan provider { dhcp I pppoe } VLANS { none |
PROVIDER }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures VLAN provider.
dhcp: configure DHCP provider
pppoe: configure PPPoE provider
VLANS: select VLAN IDs, e.g., 101-148, 1000
none: delete provider from VLAN
PROVIDER: configure provider index.
16.5
Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway
A default gateway is only needed for a subscriber VLAN (PVID for a bridge port), if the corresponding bridge port uses the
mode. In this case, a default gateway is
required in order to activate the IPoA mode.
To configure the default gateway, use the following command.
Command Mode
vlan default-gateway VLANS { DEFGATEWAY I none } Bridge
no vlan default-gateway VLANS
Function
Configures default gateway.
VLANS: select VLAN IDs, e.g., 101-148, 1000
DEFGATEWAY: IPv4 address of default gateway, e.g., 10.0.0.1.
Deletes specified default gateway.
16.6
Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN
Executing the following command, the VLAN will transmit only multicast-traffic or IGMP requests.
Command
vlan multicast-permission VLANS { disable I enable }
Mode Function
Bridge Configures multicast permission.
VLANS: select VLAN IDs, e.g., 101-148, 1000
disable/enable: multicast permission.
16.7
Checking the VLAN Configuration
Command
show vlan [ VLANS ]
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows the configuration for specific VLAN or for all VLANs.
VLANS: enter VLAN ID.
Id:0900d80580221ef7 171
VLAN
Command
show port-in-vlan PORTS
show host-vlan
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Config
Function
Lists ports VLAN.
PORTS: enter the port number, e.g.,1/1-1/48,0/1,1/2/1.
Shows assignment of host to a VLAN.
Operation Manual CLI
172 Id:0900d80580221ef7
Operation Manual CLI Quality of Service (QoS)
17 Quality of Service (QoS)
The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides QoS functions for traffic management. QoS is a useful function to provide the users more convenient services for the network traffic. This function is very good serviceable in order to prevent an overloading, the delaying or the failing of traffic through the setting of specific priorities for the different kinds of traffic flows. QoS can basically give a priority for a specific traffic or limit it. When data are processed, they are usually supposed to be processed in a defined time-order like firstin/first-out. It is possible to use strict priority and WRR (Weighted Round Robin) for queuing. The case that certain data are processed not immediately, might result in the loss of all data in case of overloaded traffics. However, in case of an overloading situation, the QoS of the traffic flows can determine the order of processing for these traffic flows by the reorganizing of priorities according to the importance of the single traffic flows. By favor of QoS, the user can predict network performance in advance and manage bandwidth more effectively.
QoS operates as follow:
• Class-of-service (Dot1p priority) mapping to queues
These mappings will be applied on all uplink and downlink interfaces within the system.
• Scheduling modes
In order to handle overloading of traffic flows, differently processing orders are possible through using scheduling algorithms. The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides two methods of queue scheduling and the combination of both:
– Strict priority queuing is used to process certain important data more preferentially than the others. Since all data are processed by their priorities, data with high priorities can be processed fast but data without low priorities might be delayed and piled up. This method has a strong point of providing the distinguished service with a simple way. However, if the packets having higher priority enter, the packets having lower priority are not processed and can drop.
Figure 5
User-defined Setting for CPU Packet
– The WRR queuing is a scheduling algorithm allowing different priorities depending on the queue weight. Queue weight controls the scheduling precedence of the internal packet queues. The higher the weight value the higher the scheduling precedence of this queue.
Each of the scheduling algorithms can be assigned separately to uplink as well as downlink interface types for both downstream and upstream traffic flow.
This means that each interface type can operate in another scheduling mode.
173 Id:0900d8058025faf9
Quality of Service (QoS) Operation Manual CLI g
For information about how to configure QoS on ONUs see 10.3 Traffic Management .
17.1
Configuring the Dot1p Priority-to-Queue Mapping
This configuration specifies the queues storing packets with a certain .1p priority.
In order to create the QoS map and to classify the rules of queueing, use the following commands in Configuration mode.
Command
qos map { <0-7> | be I bg I spare I ee I cl I video I voice I ctrl } <0-7>
Mode
Config
Function
Priority to queue number mapping.
0 - 7: priority value acc. to .1p
Default queue mappings.
0 = lowest: best effort (be)
1: background (bg)
2: space (space)
3: excellent effort (ee)
4: controlled load (cl)
5: video (video)
6: voice (voice)
7: highest: network control (ctrl)
0 - 7: queue number.
17.2
Configuring the Scheduling Method
The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports different scheduling methods that can be assigned to different interface modes.
Command
qos scheduling-mode { uplink_cards I downlink_cards I all }
{ downstream | upstream } { sp | wrr }
Mode
Config
Function
Decides the queue scheduling mode for interfaces.
uplink_card: all uplink card interfaces
downlink_card: all downlink card interfaces
all : all interface will get the following mode at once
downstream: mode operates downstream traffic flow
upstream: mode operates upstream traffic flow
The mode of the selected interface:
sp: strict priority-based queuing
wrr: Weighted Round Robin queuing. g
Strict priority is the default setting of the hiX 5750 R2.0.
If WRR is selected, the weight size per queue can be determined by using the following commands. Weight in % is the value of time the queue is set to get service. For example, if queue 3 has double weight than the other ones, it will be served like 3-3-2-1-0-3-3-2-
1-0 etc. A unlimited weight sets strict priority for the queue. The other queues which have been given a percent value, follow the common WRR scheme.
Command
qos weight <0-7> { <1-100> | unlimited }
Mode
Config
Function
Sets the weight values.
0 - 7: queue number
1 - 100: weight value in %, defines the value of time the queue is set to get service.
unlimited: strict priority queuing.
174 Id:0900d8058025faf9
Operation Manual CLI
17.3
Checking the QoS Configuration
Commands
show qos { map I scheduling-mode I weight I all }
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays a configuration of QoS.
map: priority to queue mapping
scheduling-mode: scheduling mode
weight: queue weights
factory defaults: default values
all: all information.
Quality of Service (QoS)
Id:0900d8058025faf9 175
DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI
18 DHCP and PPPoE
The dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) enables a DHCP server to manage a pool of available IP addresses and to assign them automatically to devices upon request.
Depending on its configuration, the hiX 5750 R2.0 can work as DHCP relay agent forwarding DHCP packets between clients and servers. A DHCP relay agent extends the reach of a DHCP server so that it is unnecessary to use several DHCP servers to accommodate several IP subnets.
provides the ability to connect subscribers (e.g.
customers) over a simple bridging access to the provider network. PPPoE offers a solution for providing highspeed, broadband Internet access that simplifies user configuration, utilizes standard
Ethernet devices, and provides a familiar user interface.
The DHCP/PPPoE configuration is described in the following sections:
•
Configuring of the DHCP/PPPoE Telegram Handling
•
•
•
DHCP Option 82 / PPPoE Option 105
•
Configuring Subnet Default Gateway
•
Verifying the DHCP Configuration
•
Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics
•
•
Showing Entries of DHCP/ARP Table
•
Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP/ARP
.
g
For information about how to assign DHCP/PPPoE to VLAN see chapter
16.5 Assigning the VLAN to Default Gateway
. For commands configuring the bridge
port, see 14.2.4 Bridge Port Parameters
.
18.1
Configuring of the DHCP/PPPoE Telegram Handling
When the
works in intermediate mode and the DHCP/PPPoE relay agent is enabled, option 82/option 105 can be inserted or deleted.
Enter the following commands to configure the DHCP/PPPoE mode of CXU.
Command
ip dhcp { relay I snoop | bridge }
ip pppoe { relay I snoop I bridge }
Mode Function
Config
relay: valid telegrams are handled. If necessary, DHCP option82 will be inserted or deleted. DHCP header will be changed e.g. with configured server and gateway IP address,
snoop: valid telegrams are forwarded, invalid telegrams are dropped
Invalid telegrams will be dropped.
bridge: all telegrams are forwarded.
Sets PPPoE intermediate agent.
relay: valid telegrams are handled. If necessary option105 will be inserted or deleted. Invalid telegrams are dropped.
snoop: valid telegrams are forwarded, invalid telegrams are dropped
bridge: all telegrams are forwarded.
176 Id:0900d8058025c93a
Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE
18.2
DHCP/PPPoE Provider
In order to configure a DHCP or PPPoE provider pool use the following commands in the respective configuration mode.
18.2.1
Changing into the DHCP/PPPoE Configuration Mode
Enter the following commands to change into DHCP or PPPoE configuration mode and to configure the specified provider.
ip dhcp provider NAME
Command
ip pppoe provider NAME
Mode Function
Config Changes into DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode to create/modify a
DHCP/PPPoE provider pool.
NAME: provider name.
Use the no parameter with this command to delete the specified
DHCP/PPPoE provider pool entry.
Use the commands below to exit the DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode and to save made settings.
exit { secure I forced }
Command
commit { exit I end }
quit end
Mode
DHCP/
PPPoE
Function
Exits DHCP/PPPoE config mode to config mode.
secure: only if some valid data are committed (default)
forced: exits DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode without saving.
Saves values after having verified them successfully.
exit: commits data and leave DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode to Config mode
end: commits data and leave DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode to Privileged exec mode
Exits DHCP/PPPoE configuration mode without saving.
Goes up to Privileged exec mode without saving.
no simplified
vlanid <2-4094>
no vlanid
18.2.2
Configuring the DHCP/PPPoE Provider
To configure the DHCP/PPPoE provider, enter the following commands.
Command
simplified { on I off }
Mode Function
DHCP Configures DHCP provider’s type.
on: simplified DHCP (default).
The relay agent just adds DHCP option 82 without changing anything else inside DHCP header.
off: normal DHCP.
The relay agent adds the DHCP option 82 and modifies also the
DHCP header (e.g. change the source IP).
Sets the DHCP provider to normal.
DHCP/
PPPoE
Specifies a VLAN for the DHCP/PPPoE provider pool.
ID.
Deletes a VLAN ID from DHCP/PPPoE provider pool.
18.2.3
Verifying the Consistence of DHCP Provider Pool
To verify the consistence of provider pool entries, use the following command.
Id:0900d8058025c93a 177
DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI
verify
Command Mode Function
DHCP Checks if the provider entry’s values are consistent.
18.2.4
Checking a Provider Pool
Enter the following command in order to display the provider pool entries.
Command
show ip provider [ NAME | index ]
show ip dhcp vlan [ <2-4094> ]
print [ name | vlanid | option82 | gateway | remote-id | server | all ]
print [ name | vlanid | option105 | remote-id | all ]
Mode
Exec/
Config/
DHCP/
PPPoE
Shows DHCP/PPPoE provider pool.
NAME: provider pool name
index: sorted by index.
Function
Config Displays all or specified DHCP VLANs.
DHCP
PPPoE
Displays actual values.
name: provider’s name
vlanid: VLAN ID
option82/option105: option82/ option105 flag
gateway: gateway IP address
server: DHCP server IPs
remote-id: remote ID
all: all (default).
18.3
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent has to transfer DHCP messages between the DHCP clients and associated servers when they do not reside on the same IP network or subnet. In the hiX 5750 R2.0 a DHCP relay agent is available to manage a wide DHCP subnet by forwarding IP addresses which are requested from the DHCP clients. A DHCP relay agent also extends the reach of a DHCP server so that it is not necessary to use multiple
DHCP servers to accommodate multiple IP subnets.
18.3.1
Enabling the DHCP Relay Agent
Use the following commands to enable/disable the DHCP relay agent.
dhcp-relay A.B.C.D
Command Mode Function
Config Enables DHCP relay agent for the mgmt interface.
A.B.C.D: IP address of DHCP server
no dhcp-relay
Disables DHCP relay agent for the mgmt interface.
ip { { address A.B.C.D } | A.B.C.D/M | { netmask { A.B.C.D | <1-31> } } } DHCP Configures DHCP relay IP address and netmask.
no ip dhcp relay
Disables DHCP relay.
18.3.2
Registering the DHCP Server
After configuring the relay agent, enter the following command to register the DHCP server(s).
178 Id:0900d8058025c93a
Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE
Command
server [ A.B.C.D [ [ A.B.C.D [ A.B.C.D ] ] ]
no server { A.B.C.D I all }
Mode
DHCP
Function
Configures new DHCP server IP address(es).
Enter first, second or third DHCP server’s address.
Deletes DHCP server IP address(es).
Enter IP address value or “all” (default).
18.3.3
Checking the Configuration of DHCP Relay
Enter the following commands to display the relay information.
show dhcp-relay show ip dhcp relay
Command Mode
Config
Function
Shows DHCP-relay agent configuration.
18.4
DHCP Option 82 / PPPoE Option 105
Option 82 is used by the relay agent to insert additional information into the subscriber’s
DHCP request. This information can be used to implement policies intended to improve security and efficiency.
The DHCP option 82 field is defined by the two sub-options “Circuit ID” and “Remote ID”.
The sent circuit ID string contains e.g. information about the port and the VLAN over which the DHCP request is coming in. It will be replaced dynamically when a DHCP request is received with a VLAN depending on the string. The remote ID is unique for the system. It identifies the relay agent to the DHCP server by information about the
(default), a free configurable MAC, an arbitrary IP address, or an config-
urable string. The circuit ID priority is higher than the remote ID priority. When the system receives request packets without option 82 information, it attached its own information. When the remote ID recorded in option 82 is equal to system’s MAC address, it transmits the packets after removing option 82 via the designated port number.
no option82
option105 { <4-7> I remote-id I circuit-id I all }
no option105
18.4.1
Enabling the Option 82 / Option 105
To enable DHCP option82/PPPoE option 105, use the following commands.
Command
option82 { <0-3> I remote-id I circuit-id I all }
Mode
DHCP
Function
Configures DHCP provider’s option82 flags.
0 - 3: sets option82 suboption flags by number
remote-id: enables using remote ID suboption
circuit-id: enables using circuit ID suboption
all: enables flags for using all suboptions.
Disables DHCP provider’s option82 flags.
PPPOE Configures PPPoE provider’s option105 flags.
4 - 7: sets option105 suboption flags by number
remote-id: enables using remote ID suboption
circuit-id: enables using circuit ID suboption
all: enables flags for all suboptions.
Disables using suboptions at all.
Id:0900d8058025c93a 179
DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI
18.4.2
Configuring the Remote-ID
g
By default, the system’s MAC address is the remote ID.
To configure DHCP option82 - sub-option remote ID, use the following commands.
Command
ip dhcp option82 remote-id { { hex HEXSTRING } I
{ ascii TEXT } | circuitid }
Mode Function
ip dhcp option82 remote-id { A.B.C.D I XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX } Config Configures option82 remote-ID of the system.
A.B.C.D: remote ID address in IP style
XX.XX...: remote ID address in MAC style.
Configures remote ID of the system.
HEXSTRING: remote ID of hex type
TEXT: remote ID of ascii type
circuitid: the circuit ID will be used as remote ID.
no ip dhcp option82 remote-id
Disables the configuration of remote ID.
Enter the command below to display the remote ID.
Command
show ip dhcp { remote-id I system-remote-id }
Mode Function
Config Displays the specified DHCP remote-ID.
18.4.3
Setting the Circuit ID Format
To set and verify the circuit ID format, use the following commands.
circuitid-format STRING
Command Mode Function
Bridge Sets the default format string for circuit IDs. Format string
(describer replacement):
%N -> hostname
%S -> slot
%P -> port
%R -> VLAN
%T -> line type (DSL)
%V -> VCC ID
%p -> VPI
%c -> VCI
%B -> bridgeport not., e.g.iuslot/...
%b -> unique bridgeport ID
Separator: space.;,/*-:
Enter the command below to display the default format string.
show circuitid-format
Command Mode Function
Bridge Displays the default format string for circuit IDs.
18.4.4
VLAN Handling depending on Circuit ID
To add, delete, or modify VLAN depending circuit ID part, use the following commands.
180 Id:0900d8058025c93a
Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE
Command
ip dhcp circuitid2 { BRIDGEPORTINDEX | * | all } <2-4094>
CIRCUITID
Mode Function
Config Adds VLAN depending circuit ID part.
BRIDGEPORTINDEX: bridge port index or /
IU_slot/GPON_link/ONU_ID/ONU_slot/ONU_port
*, all: all bridgeports that currently exist
2 - 4094: VLAN tag
CIRCUITID: tag depending string.
Deletes VLAN depending circuit ID part.
no ip dhcp circuitid2 { BRIDGEPORTINDEX | * | all }
<2-4094>
ip dhcp circuitid2 token STARTTOKEN { TK1 | default }
[ TK2 | default ]
Config Modifies token for VLAN depending circuit ID part.
STARTTOKEN: token start identifier, e.g. %
TK1: token1 for VLAN replacement, e.g. V
default: default Token1 for VLAN replacement
TK2: token2 for VLAN service replacement, e.g. R
default: default Token2 for VALNreplacement.
18.4.5
Configuring the DHCP Packet Policy
The operator can configure how to process packets with DHCP option 82 coming to
DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Use the following command to configure the policy for option 82/option 105 packets.
Command
ip dhcp option82 policy { replace I keep I drop }
Mode Function
Config Configures the policy of option82 packets.
replace: relay agent replaces the existing address with option82 information of relay or server,
keep: relay agent transmits packets without changing the received option82 information (default),
drop: relay agent drops the option82 packe.
gateway A.B.C.D
18.5
Configuring Subnet Default Gateway
A default gateway allows the
server to communicate with unspecified IP addresses.
Command Mode
DHCP
Function
Configures DHCP provider’s gateway IP.
A.B.C.D: IP address of gateway.
18.6
Verifying the DHCP Configuration
To check the current DHCP configuration, use the following commands.
Command show ip dhcp config
show ip dhcp bridge [ BRIDGEPORTINDEX | all ]
Mode
Config
Function
Displays current DHCP configuration.
Displays a fixed IP entry:
BRIDGEPORTINDEX: shows bridge port index
all: shows all entries (default).
An example of viewing the DHCP configuration:
Id:0900d8058025c93a 181
DHCP and PPPoE Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH(config)#show ip dhcp config
!Begin of DHCP daemon's configuration no debug dhcp all no debug dhcp kernel no debug arp-reply all ip arp-reply flood ip dhcp bridge ip pppoe bridge ip dhcp option82 remote-id 08:00:06:26:24:b3 ip dhcp option82 policy keep
!
!DHCP provider pool
$2 @ip dhcp provider simple_indepent 1 0 11
$2 @ip dhcp provider vlan_501 2 501 3 192.168.51.56 255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0 192.168.51.10
!End of DHCP provider pool
!
!PPPoE provider pool
$2 @ip pppoe provider test 3 0 7
!End of PPPoE provider pool
!
ip dhcp circuitid2 token % R
!End of DHCP daemon's configuration
SWITCH(config)#
18.7
Checking and Clearing the DHCP Statistics
To show or clear the statistics of sent and received packets, use the following commands.
show ip dhcp statistics ip dhcp clear statistics
Command Mode
Config
Function
Displays DHCP packet sent/received statistics.
Clears DHCP status (packet sent/received statistics).
18.8
Configuring of ARP Flooding
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used to associate IP addresses with
addresses. Once determined, the IP address/MAC association is stored in an ARP table for rapid retrieval. For handling ARP requests, which are L2 broadcasts, from the network side, there is an ARP relay agent in the hiX 5750 R2.0. In switched VLANs, the
ARP relay agent responds to ARP requests from GPON clients as well as subtended clients and handles ARP requests from the DHCP relay agent to learn IP addresses of
DHCP gateways or DHCP servers.
In downstream direction, the NE should not flood broadcast ARP requests towards the subscriber ports since the MAC to IP mapping is known.
Use the following command to enable/disable ARP flooding.
182 Id:0900d8058025c93a
Operation Manual CLI DHCP and PPPoE
ip arp-reply flood
Command Mode Function
Config Enables flooding of ARP requests.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable flooding.
To check information about ARP state use the following command.
show ip arp-reply flood
Command Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows ARP replies’ flooding state.
18.9
Showing Entries of DHCP/ARP Table
Use the following commands to display the entries of ARP/DHCP table.
Command show ip dhcp learned-table show arp-reply learned-table show arp-reply fixed-table
Mode Function
Config Shows learned entries of DHCP table.
Shows learned reply entries of ARP table.
Shows fixed entries of ARP table.
18.10
Deleting an Entry Learned by DHCP/ARP
Use the following commands to delete an entry of kernel’s IP table learned by DHCP.
Command Mode Function
no ip dhcp learned-table { { A.B.C.D | XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX } |
{ A.B.C.D XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX } }
Config Deletes an entry from DHCP learned table in kernel,
A.B.C.D: entrie's IP address
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX: entrie's MAC address,
ip dhcp learned-table delete { { A.B.C.D |
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX } | { A.B.C.D XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX } }
Use the following commands to delete an entry of kernel’s IP table learned by ARP.
Command
no arp-reply learned-table A.B.C.D
arp-reply learned-table delete A.B.C.D
Mode Function
Config Deletes an entry from ARP learned table in kernel,
A.B.C.D: entrie's IP address.
Id:0900d8058025c93a 183
IGMP Operation Manual CLI
19 IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a host-to-router protocol used to announce multicast (MC) group membership by interested subscriber hosts.
distribution service where only one data stream from the source is replicated in the OLT to serve a large number of receivers on behalf of its requests. A router serving a multicast VLAN sends only IGMP query message in request of ports receiving multicast packets. If a subscriber port sends the join message to the multicast router, the router transmits the multicast packet only to that port.
The hiX 5750 R2.0 provides the following IGMP operation modes:
• IGMP switching mode
• IGMP snooping mode
• IGMP proxy mode.
In the “IGMP switching” mode MC traffic is forwarded over all ports of the MC VLAN.
IGMP snooping is a function to find those ports, which send a join message to join in specific MC group to receive MC packets or leave message to get out of the MC group because it does not need packets anymore. Only when the OLT is connected to an MC router, IGMP snooping can be enabled.
IGMP proxy acts in a dual mode as IGMP router and IGMP host. When interacting with the subscribers, the proxy appears as an IGMP router sending queries downstream.
When interacting with the MC router, the proxy appears as an IGMP host sending IGMP membership report and leave group messages on behalf of subscribers.
IGMP configuration is described in the following chapters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring of Queries Parameters
•
•
Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups
.
g
For information about how to enable MC VLAN see 16.6 Enabling of Multicast Permission for the VLAN
.
19.1
Global Settings
To disable/enable global IGMP and configure the maximum number of subscribers joining a multicast group, use the following commands.
Command
igmp { enable I disable }
igmp traffic max-joined-groups <1-5000>}
Mode Function
Config Enables (default) /disables global IGMP.
Config Sets maximum number of subscribers that can join a multicast group in the system.
1 - 5000: maximum joined MC groups.
Use the following commands to verify the global IGMP configuration.
184 Id:0900d80580214302
Operation Manual CLI IGMP
Command show igmp show igmp traffic max-joined-groups
Mode
Config Displays IGMP status.
Function
Config Displays max.number of subscribers that can join MC groups in system.
19.2
IGMP RFC Profile
Overview Query Parameters
In the hiX 5750 R2.0 RFC profiles are used to modify the preset IGMP query parameters. In order to configure IGMP queries, the following options can be set:
• Robustness value allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be lossy, the robustness variable may be increased. IGMP is robust to (robustness variable - 1) packet losses. The robustness variable MUST
NOT be zero, and SHOULD NOT be one.
• Query Interval in seconds sets the frequency at which IGMP host-query packets
(downstream) are transmitted on the interface.
• Response Interval in seconds sets max. response time inserted into the periodic general queries. When the subscriber host doesn't respond to IGMP query messages, it is unsubscribed from the multicast group. It must be less than the query interval (default: 10 s).
g
The query response interval value must be set in steps of 0,1 s.
• Startup Query Interval is the startup frequency at which IGMP host-query packets
(downstream) are transmitted on the interface.
• Startup Query Count is the number of queries sent out on startup, separated by the startup query interval.
• Last Member Query Interval is the max. response time inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group messages, and is also the amount of time between group-specific query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
• Last Member Query Count is the number of group-specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members.
• Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group (upstream).
• Unsolicited Report Count indicates the number of times unsolicited report has been sent. Such reports are sent after every unsolicited report interval.
• Version1 Router Timeout is how long a host must wait after hearing a version-1 query before it may send any IGMPv2 messages. The time until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMPv1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface. Upon hearing any IGMPv1 membership report, this value is loaded to a timer. While the timer is running, the local router ignores any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on this interface.
Configuring of RFC Profiles
Use the following commands to configure IGMP profiles.
Id:0900d80580214302 185
IGMP Operation Manual CLI
Command
igmp rfc-profile [<1-30>] NAME
{ inactive | vlan-switching | snooping | acl }
{ <1-255> | default } {<1-65535> | default}
{ <1-255> | default } { normal | fast } <1-4093> [<0-7>]
{ keep | replace } [ <1-4093> [ <0-7> ] ]
no igmp rfc-profile NAME
Mode Function
Config Creates an IGMP RFC related profile.
1 - 30: profile index (max. 16)
NAME: profile name
Switching modes:
inactive: Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic
vlan-switching: MC traffic will be forwarded over all ports of the VLAN.
snooping: supports MAC based IGMP snooping functionality. Only subscriber ports which have joined at the MC group will be inscribed on the forwarding-table of the MC VLAN. Ports that leave the group will be deleted from the table.
acl: snooping with ACL.
The ACL contains the allocations of the customer (subscriber ports) to their allowable MC groups. Selecting this feature the ONU will be filtered the MC packages according to the determination of the ACL.
1 - 255: robustness, default: 2
1 - 65535: set query interval in seconds, default: 125
1 - 255: set query response interval (0,1 seconds), default: 100
Leave modes:
normal: when IGMP snooping sees a Leave message, it waits for a membership query message before setting the entry time-out to configured value. The group entry will be expired when the group membership timer interval is ending.
fast: enables fast leave configures IGMP snooping to stop the transmission of a group multicast stream to a port as soon as it receives a Leave message on that port. The group entry is expired intermediately. No time-outs are observed.
1 - 4093: VLAN ID
0 - 7: multicast priority, setting overwrites the current .1p value of the
VLAN.
VLAN tagging operation mode:
keep: keep outer tag unchanged (==remain/remain/remain)
replace: replace outer tag by IGMP provider VLAN ID and priority
(==add/rewrite/rewrite)
1 - 4093: downstream VLAN ID (forking)
0 - 7: downstream multicast VLAN priority (forking).
Config Deletes IGMP RFC related profile.
NAME: profile name.
Example:
Creating of an IGMP profile with index 4 and name “prof1” needed to be used for VLAN forking. All downstream MC traffic from the port assigned to this profile will be translated from the first VLAN-ID 10 to the second VLAN-ID 13, both VLANs have the priority 0.
igmp rfc-profile 4 prof1 snooping 2 15 50 normal 10 0 replace 13 0
Assigning “prof1” to the ONU port (see
).
igmp onu-port rfc-profile 2/2/7/4/9/1 prof1
Verifying of RFC Profiles
Command
show igmp rfc-profile [ NAME ]
Mode
Config Shows RFC related profile.
NAME: profile name.
Function
186 Id:0900d80580214302
Operation Manual CLI IGMP
19.3
IGMP Provider
Configuring of Providers
IGMP provider are required to use proxy functionality on the OLT. Use the following commands to create an IGMP provider and to modify its parameters.
Command
igmp provider <1-16> A.B.C.D [ NAME ] [ <1-4093> ]
igmp provider A.B.C.D NAME [ <1-4093> ]
no igmp provider { <1-16> I all }
igmp query-parameter { <1-255> | recent | default }
{ <1-65535> | recent | default }
{ <1-255> | recent | default } { <1-65535> | default }
{ <1-255> | default } { <1-65535> | default }
{ <1-255> | default } { <1-65535> | default }
{ on I off | default } { <1-16>}
igmp host-parameter <1-65535> [ <1-16> ]
igmp provider <1-16> dot1p <0-7>
Mode Function
Config Creates an IGMP provider.
1 - 16: provider index
A.B.C.D: IGMP proxy IP address
NAME: name of IGMP provider
1 - 4093: multicast VLAN ID.
Deletes specified or all IGMP provider(s).
1 - 16: provider index
all: all providers (default).
Config Sets provider’s query parameters.
1 - 255: Robustness value
recent: does not change robustness, default: 2
1 - 65535: Query interval value
recent: does not change query interval, default: 125
1 - 255: Response interval (0,1 sec.)
recent: does not change response interval, default: 100
1 - 65535: startup query interval (sec.)
1 - 255: startup query count, default: 2
1 - 65535: last member query interval. default: 1
1 - 255: last member query count, default: 2
1 - 65535: version 1 router time-out, default: 400
on: immediate leave on
off/default: immediate leave off
1 - 16: provider index (default: 1).
Sets host parameter.
1 - 65535: unsolicited report interval, default: 10
1 - 16: provider index (default: 1).
Config Modifies an IGMP provider priority dot1p (QoS).
1 - 16: provider index
0 - 7: priority index.
Verifying the Providers
Command show igmp provider
show igmp version <1-16>
show igmp query-parameter [ <1-16> ]
show igmp provider egress-port-list <1-16>
show igmp host-parameter [ <1-16> ]
Mode Function
Config Displays a list of created IGMP providers.
Displays IGMP version currently running.
1 - 16: provider index
Displays query parameters.
1 - 16: provider index (default: 1).
Displays subscriber list per provider.
1 - 16: provider index
Displays host parameter.
1 - 16: provider index (default: 1).
Assigning of Provider to VLAN
Use the following commands to assign a VLAN to the provider.
Id:0900d80580214302 187
IGMP Operation Manual CLI
Command
igmp provider-vlan <1-16> <1-4093>
Mode Function
Config Connects IGMP provider to a VLAN.
1 - 16: provider index
1 - 4093: VLAN ID of IGMP provider.
Disconnects IGMP provider from a VLAN.
no igmp provider-vlan <1-16>
The following command can be used to check VLANs with MC permission.
show igmp vlan
Command Mode Function
Config Displays a list of VLANs with multicast permission.
Example:
Creating of an IGMP provider with index 1 and name “prov_123” and assigning it to
VLAN-ID 123.
igmp provider 1 192.168.151.15 prov_123 igmp provider-vlan 1 123
19.4
Multicast Package and Group
A mulicast group is a MC stream that clients can join. Groups have IP addresses in the
224.0.0.0/24 network (class D). There are some permanent MC group addresses, such as 224.0.0.1 (IGMP queries), 224.0.0.2 (all routers on the subnet), 224.0.0.5(6) (OSPF routers), 224.0.0.9 (RIPv2 routers) which should be not used.
Creating of Multicast Groups and Packages
To configure IGMP multicast group and packages, use the following command.
Command
igmp multicast-group <1-16> A.B.C.D NAME [ <1-512> ]
no igmp multicast-group { <1-512> I NAME }
igmp multicast-package NAME [ <1-100> ]
no igmp multicast-package { <1-100> I NAME }
igmp add-group-to-package <1-512> <1-100>
no igmp add-group-to-package <1-512> <1-100>
Mode Function
Config Creates an IGMP multicast group.
1 - 16: provider index (default: 1)
A.B.C.D: multicast IP address
NAME: multicast group name
1 - 512: index of multicast group.
Deletes specified multicast group.
Config Creates a multicast package.
NAME: multicast package name.
1 - 100: index of multicast package.
Deletes specified multicast package.
Config Adds IGMP multicast group to package.
1 - 512: index multicast group
1 - 100: multicast package index.
Deletes multicast group from package.
Example:
Creating of “package_123” and “group_123” and assigning of this group to the package.
igmp multicast-package package_123 1 igmp multicast-group 2 224.1.1.1 group_123 1 igmp add-group-to-package 1 1
188 Id:0900d80580214302
Operation Manual CLI
Verifying the Multicast Groups and Packages
To check IGMP package of multicast group, use the following commands.
Command show igmp multicast-package show igmp multicast-group
show igmp group-ports <1-512>
show igmp supplied cards <1-512>
Mode Function
Config Displays a list of created package of multicast group.
Config Displays a list of created multicast groups.
Config Displays assigned subscribers per multicast group.
1 - 512: group index.
Config Displays index of supplied cards (physical entity).
1 - 512: group index.
IGMP
19.5
IGMP Operation Mode
To configure the operation mode of
units, use the following commands.
Command
igmp iu-gpon SLOT { inactive I vlan-switching I snooping }
Mode
igmp cxu { inactive I vlan-switching I snooping I proxy } Config
Configures IGMP operation mode of
.
inactive: switching mode is off
traffic will be forwarded over all ports of the
.
snooping:
based IGMP snooping will be supported.
proxy: Reduces IGMP network traffic by supporting proxy functionality.
Provider necessary, see 19.3 IGMP Provider
.
Config
Function
Configures IGMP operation mode of specified
slot number
inactive: Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic over the
ports.
vlan-switching: MC traffic will be forwarded over all GPON ports of the
VLAN.
snooping: IP based IGMP snooping will be supported.
.
igmp iu SLOT { inactive | vlan-switching | snooping } Config Configures IGMP the operation mode of this IU.
SLOT: IU slot number
inactive: Disabled forwarding IGMP MC traffic over the GPON ports.
vlan-switching: MC traffic will be forwarded over all GPON ports of the
VLAN.
snooping: IP based IGMP snooping will be supported.
To verify the IGMP status, use the following commands.
Command show igmp cxu show igmp snooping-table cxu show igmp iu
show igmp snooping-table iu IUSLOT
show igmp joined-ports-list <1-16> <1-512>
Mode
Config Displays IGMP status on CXU.
Function
Config Displays the CXU snooping table.
Config Shows all IUs with regard to IGMP.
Config Displays the IU snooping table.
IUSLOT: slot.
Config Displays list of joined ports.
1 - 16: IU slot
1 - 512: group index.
The following command sets the IGMP operation mode of ONUs.
Id:0900d80580214302 189
IGMP Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
igmp onu ID { inactive I vlan-switching I snooping I acl } Config Configures IGMP on
ID: ONU slot/link/ID/slot
inactive: switching mode is off
vlan-switching: MC traffic will be forwarded over all ports of the VLAN.
snooping: supports MAC based IGMP snooping functionality. Only subscriber ports which have joined at the MC group will be inscribed on the forwarding-table of the MC VLAN. Ports that leave the group will be deleted from the table.
acl: the
contains the allocations of the customer (subscriber ports) to their allowable MC groups. Selecting this feature, the ONU will filter the MC packages according to the determination of the ACL. Provider
necessary, see 19.3 IGMP Provider
.
Use the following commands to check the IGMP information of ONUs.
Command
show igmp onu ADDR
show igmp snooping-table onu ID
show igmp onu-card ADDR
show igmp onu-port PORT
Mode Function
Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP.
ADDRESS: slot/link/ONU-ID/slot.
Config Displays the ONU snooping table.
ID: address slot/link/ONU-ID[/slot[/port[/VCC]]].
Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP.
ADDRESS: slot/link/ONU-ID/slot.
Config Shows ONU port with regard to IGMP.
PORT: slot/link/ONU-ID/slot.
19.6
Configuring of Queries Parameters
Use the following commands to configure different query parameters for CXU, IUs, and
ONUs.
Command igmp cxu query-parameter
{ <1-255> I recent | default } { <1-65535> I recent | default }
{ <1-255> I recent | default }
Mode Function
Config Sets query parameters at CXU.
1 - 255: Robustness value
recent: does not change robustness, default: 2
1 - 65535: Query interval value in seconds
recent: does not change query interval, default: 125
1 - 255: Response interval (0,1 sec.)
recent: does not change response interval, default: 100.
Config Sets the query parameters at IUGPON.
SLOT: IU slot number.
igmp iu-gpon SLOT query-parameter
{ <1-255> I recent | default } { <1-65535> I recent | default }
{ <1-255> I recent | default }
igmp iu SLOT query-parameter
{ <1-255> I recent | default } { <1-65535> I recent | default }
{ <1-255> I recent | default }
igmp onu ID query-parameter
{ <1-255> I recent | default } { <1-65535> I recent | default }
{ <1-255> I recent | default }
Config
Sets the query parameters at IU card.
SLOT: IU slot number.
Sets the query parameters on ONU side.
ID: ONU - slot/link/id/slot.
19.7
IGMP Subscriber Port
Assigning of Multicast VLAN and Package
To assign a subscriber port to MC VLAN and package use the following command.
190 Id:0900d80580214302
Operation Manual CLI IGMP
igmp subscriber { { <1-16> <1-72> <1-8> } I BRIDGEPORT }
<1-4093> <1-100>
Command
no igmp subscriber { { <1-16> <1-72> <1-8> } I BRIDGEPORT
}
<1-100>
Mode Function
Config Configure an IGMP subscriber port.
1 - 16: logical IU slot
1 - 72: IU port
1 - 8:
BRIDGEPORT: bridge port specified by slot/port/VCC
1 - 4093: port based VLAN ID
1 - 1 00: package index.
Deletes an IGMP subscriber.
Assigning of Multicast Package Group
To assign a package with multicast groups to the subscriber ports, use the following command on Bridge configuration mode.
Command Mode Function
bridgeport PORTS multicast-packagegroup MCPKGGPR
Bridge Configures multicast package group.
PORTS: port number, e.g., 1/1-1/48,2/20
MCPKGGPR: multicast package group (““ means no list).
Assigning of an IGMP Profile
To assign an RFC related profiles to an ONU port, use the following command.
Command
igmp onu-port rfc-profile PORT RFCPROFILE
Mode Function
Config Assigns a RFC related profile to an ONU port.
PORT: ONU port address - slot/link/ONU-ID/slot/port
RFCPROFILE: name of the RFC related profile.
Deletes a RFC related profile from ONU port.
no igmp onu-port rfc-profile PORT
Verifying the IGMP Subscribers
To check an IGMP subscriber, use the following command.
Command show igmp subscriber
show igmp port-groups BRIDGEPORT
show igmp joined-mc-addresses ONUPORT
Mode Function
Config Shows a list of enabled IGMP subscribers.
Config Displays joined multicast group list per subscriber.
BRIDGEPORT: bridge port specified by slot/port/VCC.
Config Displays list of joined MC addresses per port.
ONUPORT: slot/link/ONU-ID/slot.
19.8
Assigning of an ONU Port to static Multicast Groups
A static MC group-to-port mapping guarantees that a specific MC stream is instantly available on a port, without any delay from the joining process. Additional, it enables to include subscribers that cannot send IGMP membership reports.
To create or delete IGMP static table entries, use the following commands.
Id:0900d80580214302 191
IGMP Operation Manual CLI
Command
igmp onu-port static-group PORT A.B.C.D <1-4093>
[ A.B.C.D <1-4093> [ A.B.C.D <1-4093>] ]
Mode Function
Config Creates a static table entry for an ONU port.
PORT: ONU port address - slot/link/ONU-ID/slot/port
A.B.C.D: IP address of multicast group (1)
1 - 4093: VLAN ID (1)
A.B.C.D: IP address of multicast group (2)
1 - 4093: VLAN ID (2)
A.B.C.D: IP address of multicast group (3)
1 - 4093: VLAN ID (3)
Use the no parameter with this command to delete a static table entry.
192 Id:0900d80580214302
Operation Manual CLI ARP Table
20 ARP Table
Hosts connected to an IP network have two addresses, a physical MAC address and a logical IP network address. The 48-bit-MAC address is used on Layer 2 level by the switch to transmit packets. Using the address resolution protocol (ARP), the switch finds the MAC hardware address that matches to a given IP address. Once determined, the
IP address/MAC association is stored in an ARP table for rapid retrieval. Referring to the entries in this table, a packet which is containing a known IP address is transmitted to the network. ARP is enabled by default and cannot be disabled.
20.1
Managing of ARP Table Entries
Becauce most of the hosts support dynamic address resolution, the contents of the ARP table will be automatically registered when a MAC address corresponding to a gathered
IP address is found.
To install a permanent entry in the ARP table that maps a specific IP address to a MAC address, use the following commands.
Command
arp A.B.C.D
XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX
arp A.B.C.D
XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX IFNAME
Mode
Config
Function
Sets a static ARP entry.
A.B.C.D: enter the IP address
XX....XX.XX: enter the MAC address
IFNAME: enter a interface name.
Example of static registering IP address 10.1.1.1 and MAC address 00:d0:cb:00:00:01:
SWITCH (config)# arp 10.1.1.1 00:d0:cb:00:00:01
Use the following commands to delete a specified IP address and its related MAC address or all the contents from the ARP table.
Command
no arp A.B.C.D
no arp A.B.C.D IFNAME
clear arp
clear arp IFNAME
Mode
Config
Config
Function
Negates a static ARP entry or sets its entries default.
A.B.C.D: enter the IP address
IFNAME: enter the interface name.
Deletes all the contents from the ARP table.
IFNAME: enter the interface name.
20.2
Checking the ARP Table
The show commands display all the IP and hardware addresses that are directly connected to an interface on the switch and addresses that have been learned dynamically by the switch.
Use following commands to examine the contents of the ARP table.
Command Mode Function
show arp Privileged/
Config
show arp IFNAME
Checks ARP table for specified interface.
IFNAME: enter the interface name (br1, br2, ...).
Example of displaying the ARP table:
Id:0900d805801da7a0 193
ARP Table Operation Manual CLI
SWITCH (config)#
show arp
---------------------------------------------------------
Address HWaddress Type Interface
------------------------------------------------------------
10.254.254.105 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:05 DYNAMIC br4094
10.1.1.1 00:00:cd:01:82:d0 DYNAMIC mgmt
SWITCH (config)#
20.3
ARP Alias
For security reasons, the communication between hosts connected to the same switch may be impossible. However, the hiX 5750 R2.0 can use ARP alias to connect hosts with each other by supporting the response of ARP requests from the host network through the concentrating switch.
To register a range of IP addresses from the host network in an ARP alias, use the following command.
Command
arp-alias A.B.C.D A.B.C.D
[ XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX ]
Mode
Config
Function
Registers IP start and end address and MAC address in
ARP-alias to make user’s equipment response ARP request.
Use the no parameter with this command to delete specified IP address range from ARP table.
g
Unless you have specified a MAC address, the MAC address of user’s equipment will be used for ARP response.
To view ARP alias, use the following command.
Command Mode
show arp-alias Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows registered ARP-Alias.
Example of configuring ARP alias by registering IP addresses from 10.1.1.2 to 10.1.1.5.
SWITCH (config)#
arp-alias 10.1.1.2 10.1.1.5
SWITCH (config)#
194 Id:0900d805801da7a0
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
21 IP Routing
The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports the following routing protocols:
•
•
•
21.1
Static Routes
Static routing is the simplest form of routing. A static route remains in the router configuration until it will be removed. Thus, it does not work well when the routing information has to be changed frequently or needs to be configured on a large number of routing devices. Static routes must consist of a valid destination IP address, neighbor router receiving the packets, and number of hops that packets have to pass through.
From Configuration mode, use the ip route commands to add/delete a static IP route.
Command Mode Function
ip route A.B.C.D A.B.C.D { A.B.C.D | INTERFACE } [ <1-255> ] Config Establishes a static route.
A.B.C.D: destination IP prefix
ip route A.B.C.D/M { A.B.C.D | INTERFACE } [ <1-255> |
A.B.C.D or /M: destination IP prefix mask src A.B.C.D ]
A.B.C.D: forwarding router’s IP address
INTERFACE: interface
1 - 255: administrative distance
src A.B.C.D: binding source IP address
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the specified static route from the routing table.
Each dynamic routing protocol has a default administrative distance. When there are two or more routes to the same destination, the router uses the administrative distance to decide which routing protocol (or static route) to trust more. When a static route is entered that is the same as a dynamic route, it will be used over the dynamic route.
Default administrative distances are, e.g. connected interface = 0, static route = 1,
RIP = 120, OSPF = 110, and IS-IS = 110. The lower the number, the more trustworthy the type of route is.
g
Determine the administrative distance of a static route higher than that of the dynamic protocol to allow that the static route can be overrode by information from a dynamic routing protocol.
Example of configuring static routes to reach three destinations which are not directly connected.
SWITCH(config)#ip route 100.1.1.0/24 10.1.1.2
SWITCH(config)#ip route 200.1.1.0/24 20.1.1.2
SWITCH(config)#ip route 172.16.1.0/24 30.1.1.2
There is a special kind of static route called a default route. The default route is the last route (gateway of last resort) tried by the router when all other routes fail. To configure the default route, use the following command in Configuration mode.
Id:0900d80580212815 195
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
Command
ip route default { A.B.C.D | INTERFACE } [ 1-255 ]
Mode Function
Config Configures a default gateway.
A.B.C.D: gateway IP address
INTERFACE: interface
1 - 255: administrative distance
Use the no parameter with this command to delete the default route from the routing table.
Use one of the following commands, to display the static routes.
Command
show ip route { A.B.C.D | A.B.C.D/M I summary }
show ip route [ database ] { bgp | connected | isis | kernel | ospf | rip | static }
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays the specified routing information.
Displays the configured routing information within the IP routing table database.
Example of viewing static routes.
SWITCH(config)# show ip route database
Codes: K - Kernel,
C - connected,
S - static,
R - RIP,
B - BGP
O - OSPF,
IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2 i - IS-LS,
L1 - IS-IS level 1,
L2 - IS-IS level 2, ia - IS-IS inter area
> - selected route,
* - FIB route, p - stale info
SWITCH(config)#
A static route for network 0.0.0.0 to default gateway configures a default route.
The following example shows the configuring of a static route for network 0.0.0.0 to default gateway 10.2.2.1. It can be checked by using the command show ip route.
SWITCH(config)#ip route 0.0.0.0/0 10.2.2.1
SWITCH(config) show ip route
Codes: K - kernel,
C - connected,
S - static,
R - RIP,
196 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
B - BGP
O - OSPF,
IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1,
N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1,
E2 - OSPF external type 2 i - IS-IS,
L1 - IS-IS level-1,
L2 - IS-IS level-2, ia - IS-IS inter area
* - candidate default Gateway of last resort is 10.2.2.1 to network 0.0.0.0S*
0.0.0.0/0 [1/0] via 10.2.2.1, mgmtC
10.2.2.0/24 is directly connected, mgmtC 10.254.254.96/27 is directly connected, br4094
SWITCH(config)#
21.2
BGP Routing
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Autonomous System (AS) routing protocol designed to provide loop-free routing between separate routing domains. AS stands for a set of routers under common administration. The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports BGP version
4 as defined in RFC 1771. The protocol provides a set of mechanisms for supporting
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR). These mechanisms include the support for advertising a set of destinations as IP prefix and enable the creation of aggregate routes to minimize the size of routing tables. Smaller BGP routing tables can reduce the convergence time of the network and improve network performance.
Using BGP, the hiX 5750 R2.0 is intended to exchange information about
paths reaching between the BGP equipment.
The BGP basic configuration includes the following tasks:
•
Enabling a BGP Routing Process
•
Announcing the Network to Neighbors
•
Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers
•
.
21.2.1
Enabling a BGP Routing Process
router bgp <1-65535>
Command Mode
Config
Function
Enables a BGP routing process by assigning AS number.
1 - 65535: enter the AS number.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable a routing process.
number is used to identify the AS and for detecting whether the BGP connection
is internal one or external one. The range from 65512 to 65535 contains the private AS numbers which must not be advertised on the network configuration.
Id:0900d80580212815 197
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
21.2.2
Announcing the Network to Neighbors
For data to be advertised by BGP, its routing table must include a route to the specified network. The following command specifies the networks to be advertised.
network A.B.C.D/M
Command Mode
Config
Function
Adds the announcement network to neighbors.
A.B.C.D: specifies the IP address of network being advertised.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove an entry.
21.2.3
Configuring BGP Neighbor Routers
A BGP router must completely understand the relationships with its neighbors.
To configure BGP peers, use the following commands.
Defining Neighbors
First, the following command must be used before configuring a neighbor.
Command
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } remote-as <1-65535>
Mode
Router
Function
Configures an internal or external BGP (iBGP or eBGP) TCP session with another router.
A.B.C.D : IPv4 address of BGP neighbor
WORD: name of an existing peer-group
1 - 65535: AS number of neighbor.
g
A peer-group support is configured only after creating a specific peer-group.
Example:
Following tasks are performed:
Definition of a BGP routing process. The number 65001 specifies the AS number of the router. Definition of BGP neighbors and establish of a TCP session. 1.2.3.4 is the IP address of the neighbor and 65000 is the neighbor’s AS number.
SWITCH# configure terminal
SWITCH(config)# router BGP 650001
SWITCH(config-router)# neighbor 1.2.3.4 remote-as 65000
SWITCH(config-router)# exit
Clearing BGP Neighbor Routes
Use the following command to delete all contents of specific cache, table, and database when some factors are invalid or unreliable.
Command
clear ip bgp { * I A.B.C.D I as-number } [ in | out I soft [ in I out ] ]
Mode Function
Privileged Reconfigures information about BGP neighbor router,
*: reset a BGP connection for all peers.
A.B.C.D: specifies the address of the BGP route to be cleared.
number for which all routes will be cleared
in: incoming advertised routes will be cleared.
out: outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.
soft: both incoming and outgoing routes will be cleared.
198 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
21.2.4
Managing BGP Peer Groups
A BGP peer group is a group of BGP neighbors that share the same update policies.
Members of a peer group inherit all of the configuration options of the peer group. A peer group facilitates the updates of various policies, such as distribute and filter lists. Use the following commands to create a peer-group and to add neighbors to this group.
Command
neighbor WORD peer-group
neighbor A.B.C.D peer-group WORD
Mode
Router
Function
Creates a peer-group.
WORD: name of the peer-group.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Adds a neighbor to an existing peer-group.
A.B.C.D: address of the BGP neighbor in IPv4 format
WORD: name of an existing peer-group.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
21.2.5
Extended Neighbor Commands
Unless otherwise noted, common parameters of all following commands are:
• A.B.C.D: IPv4 address of BGP neighbor
• WORD: name of an existing peer-group g
When this parameters are used, the command applies on all peers in the specified group.
Command
neighbor A.B.C.D interface WORD
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } port <0-65535>
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } activate
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } timers <0-65535> <0-65535>
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } shutdown
Mode Function
Router Configures the interface name of a BGP speaking neighbor.
A.B.C.D: Neighbor IPv4 address.
WORD: Interface name.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Router Specifies the BGP port of a neighbor.
0 - 65535: TCP port number
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Router After the TCP connection is opened with the neighbor this command enables the exchange of the specified AF routes with a neighboring router.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable exchange of information with a neighbor.
Router Sets the timers for a specific BGP neighbor.
0 - 65535: holdtime in seconds at which a router sends keepalive messages to its neighbor. The default is 60 seconds.
0 - 65535: interval in seconds after which, on not receiving a keepalive message, the router declares a neighbor dead.
The default is 180 seconds.
Router Administratively shut down this neighbor.Terminates any active session for a specified neighbor and clears all related routing information. In case a peer group is specified for shutdown, a large number of peering sessions could be terminated.
Use the no parameter with this command to re-enable a neighbor.
Id:0900d80580212815 199
IP Routing
Command
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } next-hop-self
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } description LINE
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } update-source WORD
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } weight <0-65535>}
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } passive
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } version { 4 }
Operation Manual CLI
Mode Function
Router Configures the router as the next hop for a neighbor or peer group to allow the router to change the nexthop information that is sent to the iBGP peer.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature.
Router Associates a description with a neighbor.
LINE: Up to 80 characters describing this neighbor
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the description.
Router Allows internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface for TCP connections.
WORD: name of loopback interface name
Use the no parameter with this command to restore the interface assignment to the closest interface.
Router Sets default weight for routes from this neighbor.
0 - 65535: weight this command assigns to the route.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove a weight assignment.
Router Sets a BGP neighbor as passive.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Router Set the BGP version to match a neighbor.
4: Neighbor’s BGP version.
Command Mode Function
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged { as-path I next-hop I med }
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged as-path { next-hop I med }
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged as-path med next-hop
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged as-path next-hop med
Router Advertises unchanged BGP attributes to the specified neighbor.
as-path: AS-path attribute.
med: MED attribute (Multi Exit Discriminator used for best path selection).
next-hop: Next hop attribute.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged med { as-path I next-hop }
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged med as-path next-hop
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged next-hop { as-path I med }
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged next-hop as-path med
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } attribute-unchanged next-hop med as-path
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } timers connect <0-65535>
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } collide-established
Router Configures neighbor router to transmit routing information.
0 - 65535: connect timer in seconds.
Use the no parameter with this command to clear the timers for a specific neighbor.
Router Specifies including a neighbor, already in an
'established' state, for conflict resolution when a
TCP connection collision is detected. The associated functionality is automatically enabled when neighbor is configured for BGP restart.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } ebgp-multihop [ <1-255> ] Router Allows BGP connections to external peers on indirectly connected networks.
1 - 255: maximum hop count.
(If not set the hop count is 255)
Use the no parameter with this command to return to the default.
200 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Command
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } enforce-multihop
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } transparent-as
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } transparent-nexthop
Mode Function
Router Enforces eBGP neighbors to perform multihop.
Use the no parameter with this command to turn off this feature.
Router Configures not appending your AS number even when peer is an eBGP.
Router Configures not changing nexthop even if the peer is eBGP.
Command Mode Function
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } advertisement-interval <0-600> Router Sets minimum interval between sending BGP routing updates.
0 - 600: advertise -interval value in seconds
Use the no parameter with this command to set the interval time to default.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } allowas-in [ <1-10> ] Router Configures PE routers to allow re-advertisement of all prefixes containing duplicate AS numbers (Accept AS-path with own AS present in it).
1 - 10: Number of occurrences of AS number
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the readvertisement of a PE router's AS number.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } capability dynamic Router Enables the dynamic capability for a specific peer to allow a
BGP speaker to advertise or withdraw an address family capability to a peer in a non-disruptive manner.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the dynamic capability.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } capability orf prefix-list
{ both I receive I send }
Router Configures to advertising prefixlist ORF (Outbound Route
Filter) capability to the peer.
both: the local router can SEND ORF entries to its peer as well as RECEIVE ORF entries from its peer.
receive: Capability to RECEIVE the ORF from specified peer.
send: Capability to SEND the ORF to specified peer.
g
Only an individual router or a peer-group (but no peergroup member) can be configured to be in receive or send mode.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } capability route-refresh
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } default-originate
[ route-map WORD ]
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } filter-list WORD { in I out }
Router Configures advertising route-refresh capability to the specified neighbor.
Router Allows a BGP local router to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor for use as a default route.
route-map: Route-map to specify criteria to originate default
WORD: route-map name.
Use the no parameter with this command to send no route as a default.
Router Establish BGP filters.
WORD: name of AS path access-list.
in: incoming advertised routes will be filtered.
out: outgoing advertised routes will be filtered.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Id:0900d80580212815 201
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
Command
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } prefix-list WORD { in I out }
Mode Function
Router Distributes neighbor information as specified in a prefix list by filtering the updates to/from this neighbor.
WORD: Name of a prefix list.
in: access list applies to incoming advertisements.
out: access list applies to outgoing advertisements.
g
The neighbor distribute-list command is an alternative to the this command and only one of them can be used for filtering to the same neighbor in any direction.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } maximum-prefix <1-4294967295>
{ <1-100> | warning-only }
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } maximum-prefix <1-4294967295>
[ <1-100> warning-only ]
Router Configures the number of prefixes that can be received from a neighbor.
1 - 429496729: maximum number of prefixes permitted.
1 - 100: Threshold-value, 1 to 100 percent
warning-only: Only give warning message when limit is exceeded.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } remove-private-as
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } route-reflector-client
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } route-server-client
Router Remove private AS number from outbound updates.
Use with external BGP peers only. The router removes the
AS numbers only if the update includes private AS numbers
64512-65535.
Use the no parameter with this command to revert to default.
Router Configures the router as a BGP route reflector and configure the specified neighbor as its client.
By route reflection the number of iBGP peers within an AS is reduced. An AS can have more than one route reflector. One route reflector treats the other route reflector as another iBGP speaker.
Use the no parameter with this command to indicate that the neighbor is not a client.
Router Configure a neighbor as route server client.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } send-community
[ { both I extended I standard } ]
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } soft-reconfiguration inbound
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD }
strict-capability-match
Router Send community attribute to this neighbor.
both: send standard and extended community attributes.
extended: send extended community attributes.
standard: send standard community attributes
By default, on receiving the communities attribute the router reannounces them to the neighbor. Only when the no parameter is used with this command the community attributes are not reannounced to the neighbor.
Router Starts storing updates for inbound soft reconfiguration.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Router Closes the BGP connection if capability value does not completely match to remote peer.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD }
dont-capability-negotiate
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } override-capability
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } unsuppress-map WORD
Router Disables capability negotiation.
Use the no parameter with this command too enable capability negotiation.
Router Override capability negotiation result.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function
Router Configures Route-map to selectively unsuppress suppressed routes.
WORD: Name of route map.
202 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
21.2.6
Redistribute Routing Information
In order to to inject routes from another routing process into the BGP routing table, use the following command.
Command
redistribute { kernel I connected | static | rip I ospf | isis } [ route-map WORD ]
Mode Function
Router Registers transmitted routing information from another router’s table.
Optional: specify route to be redistibuted by route-map reference.
WORD: pointer to route-map entries
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
21.2.7
Routing Map
By default, all routing protocols place their routes into a routing table. Only the routes that pass the route map are sent or accepted in updates. On both inbound and outbound updates, the hiX 5750 R2.0 supports matches based on AS path, community, and network number. AS path matching requires the as-path access-list command, community based matching requires the community-list command and network-based matching requires the access-list command.
To configure routing policy, use the following command.
Command Mode Function
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } route-map WORD { in | out } Router Applies a route map to filter updates and modify attributes.
WORD: name of the route-map.
in: access list applies to incoming advertisements.
out: access list applies to outgoing advertisements.
Use the no parameter with this command to a route map.
21.2.8
Distribution List
To restrict the routing information,
routing updates can be filtered from or to particular neighbors. To do this, define an access list and apply it to the updates.
Distribute-list filters are applied to network numbers and not autonomous system paths.
Use the following command to configure
route filtering.
Command
neighbor { A.B.C.D I WORD } distribute-list { <1-199> I
<1300-2699> I WORD } { in I out }
Mode
Router
Function
Filters BGP updates to/from this neighbor.
A.B.C.D: Neighbor IPv4 address.
WORD: Name of an existing peer-group
1 - 199: IP access-list number.
1300 - 2699: IP access-list number (expanded range).
WORD: name of IP access-list.
in: filters incoming updates
out: filters outgoing updates
Use the no parameter with this command to remove an entry.
21.2.9
Prefix List
A IP prefix list provides a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to IP addresses in order to achive a powerful prefix based filtering mechanism. In addition to access-list functionality, prefix-list has prefix length range specification (the number of bits applied to the base to determine the network prefix) and sequential number specification. The BGP router switches IP addresses one by one against the
Id:0900d80580212815 203
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI conditions in a prefix list. The first match determines whether the router accepts or rejects the address. Using a prefix list is preferred to an access list because of following reasons:
• time-saving when searching and applying data in large filter lists
• unlimited registration in filter lists
• easy usage.
To configure a IP prefix list, the operator has to assign a sequential number to each policy registered in the list.
Filtering by an IP prefix list processes routing information with more detail rules as follows:
• Allows all network information if there is no policy defined in prefix list.
• Rejects specified network information, unless the policy applied to network is defined in prefix list.
• Distinguishes each policy with the assigned number and applies policy which has the lowest number in network.
In order to view assigned number to policy, use the show ip prefix-list command.
Policies configured by operator will be automatically assigned to a sequential number.
However, that assignment is also possible manually by executing the ip prefix-list seq command.
Creating a Prefix List
Command
ip prefix-list WORD { deny | permit } A.B.C.D/M ge <0-32>
[ le <0-32> ]
ip prefix-list WORD { deny | permit } A.B.C.D/M le <0-32>
[ ge <0-32> ]
ip prefix-list WORD { deny | permit }
{ A.B.C.D/M I any ]
ip prefix-list WORD description LINE
Mode Function
Config Creates a IP prefix list.
WORD: list name
deny: denies matching IP address
permit: permits maching IP address
A.B.C.D/M: specifies the network
0 - 32: ge parameter specifies prefix length. The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is greater than or equal to the ge prefix length.
0 - 32: le paramter specifies prefix length. The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is less than or equal to the le prefix length.
Makes additional description to prefix list.
LINE: description.
The following example creates a prefix list plist1 that permits routes with a prefix length up to 24 in the 151.0.0.0/8 network:
SWITCH(config)#ip prefix-list plist1 permit 151.0.0.0/8 le 24
Creating the Prefix List Policy
Use the following command in order to add or delete prefix based filters to arbitrary points of prefix-list using sequential number specification.
204 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Command
ip prefix-list NAME seq <1-4294967295> { deny | permit } {
A.B.C.D/M I any }
ip prefix-list NAME seq <1-4294967295>{ deny | permit }
A.B.C.D/M ge <0-32>
[ le <0-32> ]
ip prefix-list NAME seq <1-4294967295> { deny | permit }
A.B.C.D/M le <0-32>
[ ge <0-32> ]
Mode Function
Config Configures policy of prefix list and assigns number to the policy.
NAME: list name
deny: denies matching IP address
permit: permits maching IP address
A.B.C.D/M: specifies the network
1 - 4294967295: specifies the position of each entry in the prefix list.
0 - 32: ge parameter specifies prefix length. The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is greater than or equal to the ge prefix length.
0 - 32: le paramter specifies prefix length. The prefix list will be applied if the prefix length is less than or equal to the le prefix length.
The parameter ge and le may be used optionally if there are more than one network configured. Using neither ge nor le, network range can be more clearly configured.
Checking the Prefix List Policies
Command
show ip prefix-list [ detail | summary ]
show ip prefix-list [ detail | summary ] WORD
show ip prefix-list WORD [ seq number ]
show ip prefix-list WORD A.B.C.D/M
show ip prefix-list WORD A.B.C.D/M longer
show ip prefix-list WORD A.B.C.D/M first-match
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows prefix lists in detail or briefly.
Shows prefix list of specified name.
Shows policy of specified number.
Shows policy applied to specified network.
Shows all policies of prefix list applied to specified network.
Shows policy first applied to specified network.
Deleting Number of Inquiring Prefix List
By default, system records number how many times prefix list is inquired.
To delete the number, use the following command.
Command
clear ip prefix-list WORD [ A.B.C.D/M ]
Mode Function
Privileged Deletes the number how many times prefix list is inquired.
WORD: list name
A.B.C.D/M: specifies the network.
21.2.10
AS Route Filtering
Policies applies to decide routes are registered in an access list. In order to filter routing information with AS standard, configure filtering policy in the access list and apply the policy to the neighbor router.
Command
ip as-path access-list WORD { permit | deny } LINE
Mode
Config
Function
Defines specific AS in access list.
WORD: enter the access list number
LINE: enter a regular expression.
Id:0900d80580212815 205
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
21.2.11
Communities
Communities are the most flexible way to implement routing policies.
supports transmit policy distributing routing information. Distributing routing information is
operated based on not only community list but also IP address and
route. Community list makes community according to each destination and routing policy is applied based on community standard.
It helps configure BGP speaker that distributes routing information.
A community is a destination group that shares some common attributes. One destination can be belonged to more than one community. An administrator can configure to which community the destination is belonged. By default, all destinations are configured to be in the internet community.
The other defined and well-known communities are:
•
no-export:
Do not distribute this route to exterior BGP neighbor routers
• no-advertise: (either exterior or interior)
Do not distribute this route to neighbor routers.
•
local-as:
Distribute this information to neighbor routers of low level AS located on the BGP united network. Do not distribute it to exterior routers.
To create a community list, use the following commands.
Command
ip community-list WORD { permit | deny } LINE
ip community-list { <1-99> | standard WORD } { permit | deny } [ LINE ]
ip community-list <100-199> { permit | deny } [ LINE ]
Mode Function
Config Creates community list.
WORD: specifies the community listname.
permit; specifies the community to accept.
deny: specifies the community to reject.
LINE:
Config Creates community list.
1 - 99: standard community list number.
WORD:
Config Creates community list.
100 - 199: expanded community list number.
A community is notated with a form, AA:NN as defined in RFC. AA is the local AS number and NN is a number of 2 bytes. g
Use the no parameter with this commands to delete community list entries.
21.2.12
Determining the State of BGP
Specific statistics such as contents of BGP routing table, cache, and database can be displayed to determine resource utilization and solve network problems. Displaying information about node reachability and discover the routing path the packets are taking through the network is also possible.
To display various routing statistics, use following commands.
Command
show ip bgp prefix-list NAME
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows peers to which the prefix has been advertised.
206 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
show ip bgp cidr-only
Command
show ip bgp community [ number | local-AS | no-advertise | no-export ]
Privileged/
Config
show ip bgp community-list WORD [ exact-match ]
show ip bgp community-info
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
show ip bgp filter-list WORD
show ip bgp regexp LINE
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
show ip bgp attribute-info
show ip bgp neighbors [ ip-address ]
show ip bgp neighbors [ ip-address [ advertised-routes | received-routes | routes ]
show ip bgp paths show ip bgp summary
Function
Displays all BGP routes including subnetwork and upper network.
Displays route belonged in specific community. Community
Number is formed as AA:NN.
Shows all routes that are permitted by the community list:
WORD: enter the name of the list.
Displays all information of BGP community.
Shows routes that are matched by the specified autonomous system route in access list, enter the name of the list.
Shows routes that match the specified regular expression entered on the command line, enter a regular expression for
LINE.
Shows all information of BGP attributes.
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Shows detail information on
individual neighbors.
Shows information about the TCP and BGP connections to neighbors. The advertised-routes option displays all the routes the router has advertised to the neighbor. The received-routes option displays all received routes (both accepted and rejected) from the specified neighbor. The routes option displays all routes that are received and accepted.
Shows all BGP routes in database.
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Shows all BGP connections.
21.3
RIP Routing
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) calculates the best path (route with the lowest metric value) to a remote destination based upon individual router hops. A RIP router sends routing-update messages at regular intervals and when the network topology changes.
When the RIP router receives a routing update from another one that includes changes to an entry, it updates its routing table to reflect the new route. The metric value for the path is increased by 1, and the sender is indicated as the next hop. A directly connected network has a metric of zero; an unreachable network has a metric of 16. After updating its routing table, the router immediately begins transmitting routing updates to inform other network routers of the change. These updates are sent independently of the regularly scheduled updates that RIP routers send. If an interface's network is not specified, it will not be advertised in any RIP update. For more information about RIPv2 refer to
RFC 1058, RFC 1723, and RFC 2453.
The RIP commands are described in the following sections:
•
•
Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP
•
•
Redistributing of Routing Information
•
Configuring of Routing Metrics
•
Configuring the Administrative Distance
Id:0900d80580212815 207
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
•
•
Managing the Authentication Key
•
Checking of Router and Protocol Information .
router rip
21.3.1
Basic Configuration of RIP
To configure RIP on the router, perform the following tasks:
1.
Enabling RIP Process on the Router
2.
Enabling RIP Process on the Router
Change to Router configuration mode and enable a RIP routing process.
Command Mode Function
Config Enables RIP routing process and enters router configuration mode.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the RIP routing process.
Specifying the Network
Once the router is enabled, specify which network it should be routing for.
Command
network { A.B.C.D/M | WORD }
network A.B.C.D/M route-map WORD
Mode Function
Router Specifies networks to which routing updates will be sent and received.
A.B.C.D/M: IP address prefix and length of this IP network.
WORD: interface name.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the specified network as one that runs RIP.
Router Configures networks to operate as RIP using a route map.
A.B.C.D/M: IP address prefix and length of this IP network.
WORD: specifies route map g
To verify that the protocol is up and ready to go, enter a show ip protocols command. This would generally show details of all running IP routing protocols.
21.3.2
Allowing Unicast Updates for RIP
is a broadcast protocol. When a neighbor does not understand multicast, the following command is used to specify a router as a RIP neighbor by establishing a point-to-point link between the routers.
neighbor A.B.C.D
Command Mode Function
Router Configure neighbor router with which the routing information will be exchanged.
A.B.C.D: IP address of a neighboring router
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the specific router.
g
Sending of routing updates on specified interfaces can be disabled by configuring the passive-interface command.
208 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
21.3.3
Configuring of Static Routes
The route command makes a static route only inside RIP. g
This command is mostly used for debugging purposes. If you are not familiar with
RIP protocol, you would better create a static route and redistribute it in RIP using the redistribute static command.
route A.B.C.D/M
Command Mode
Router
Function
Adds a static RIP route.
A.B.C.D/M: specifies the IP address prefix and length.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Default Route
A router can generate a default route and inject it in the network. If no other routes qualify, this one is used. You can force an Autonomous System (AS) boundary router to
generate a default route into an
routing domain. Whenever you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an RIP routing domain (
Routing Information ), the router automatically becomes an AS boundary router.
However, an AS boundary router does not, by default, generate a default route into the
RIP routing domain.
Command default-information originate
Mode
Router
Function
Forces the AS boundary router to generate a default route into the RIP routing domain.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature.
21.3.4
Redistributing of Routing Information
The system can redistribute routing information from a source route entry into the RIP tables. For example, you can instruct the router to re-advertise connected, kernel, or static routes as well as routing protocol-derived routes. This capability applies to all the
IP-based routing protocols.
In order to redistribute routing information from a source route entry into the RIP table, use one of the following commands.
Command
redistribute { kernel I connected | static | ospf | bgp | isis }
redistribute { kernel I connected | static | ospf | bgp | isis }
metric <1-16>
redistribute { kernel I connected | static | ospf | bgp | isis }
route-map WORD
Mode
Router
Function
Registers transmitted routing information from another router’s
RIP table.
kernel: redistribute from kernel routes
connected: redistribute from connected routes
static: redistribute from static routes
isis: redistribute from
-IS
1 - 16: metric value to be used in redistributing information
WORD: pointer to route-map entries
Use the no parameter with this command to disable the function.
Route Map
Controlling the redistribution of routes between two domains is possible by using the
route-map command.
Id:0900d80580212815 209
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
Command
route-map WORD { deny | permit } <1-65535>
Mode
Config
Function
Creates route map and sets permission.
WORD: map name
1 - 65535: index
One or more match and set commands typically follow route-map command. If there are no match commands, then everything matches. If there are no set commands, nothing is done. Therefore, at least one match or set command is needed. To define conditions for redistributing routes from a source route entry into the RIP tables, perform at least one of the following tasks in route-map configuration mode.
Command
match interface IFNAME
match ip address prefix-list WORD
match metric <0-4294967295>
set ip next-hop A.B.C.D
Mode Function
Route-map Transmits information to only specified interface.
IFNAME: interface name
Route-map Matchs if route destination is permitted by access-list.Transmits information to only neighbor router in list.
WORD: name prefix list
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this match.
Route-map Transmits information matched with specified metric,
1 - 16: Enter a valid metric value.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this match.
Route-map Specifies where the packets that pass the match criteria are output.
A.B.C.D: IP address of next hop.
This command set next hop value in RIPv2. This command does not affect RIPv1 because there is no next hop field in the packet.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this setting.
21.3.5
Configuring of Routing Metrics
Metrics of Redistributed Routes
RIP metric is a value for distance for the network that will be incremented when the network information is received. Redistributed route’s metric is set to 1. g
This command is used with the redistribute command in order to determine RIP to use the specified metric value for all redistributed routes. Default metric is useful in redistributing routes with incompatible metrics. Every protocol has different metrics and cannot be compared directly. For example, the RIP metric is a hop count and
metric is a combination of five quantities. Default metric provides the standard to compare. All routes that are redistributed will use the default metric.
In such situations, an artificial metric is assigned to the redistributed route.
In order to set metrics for redistributed routes, use the following command.
Command
default-metric <1-16>
Mode
Router
Function
Specifies the metrics to be assigned to redistributed routers.
1- 16: metric value (default value is set to 1).
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature.
g
This command does not affect a connected route even if it is redistributed by
redistribute connected. To modify the metric value of connected routes, use
redistribute connected metric or route-map. The command offset-list also affects connected routes.
210 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Applying Offsets to Routing Metrics
An offset list is the mechanism for increasing incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned via RIP. Offset list can be limited with an access list.
Command
offset-list WORD { in | out } <0-16> [ IFNAME ]
Mode
Router
Function
Adds an offset to in and out metrics to routes learned through RIP.
WORD: access-list number or names
in: access list will be used for metrics of incoming advertised routes.
out: access list will be used for metrics of outgoing advertised routes.
0 - 16: offset used for metrics of networks matching the access list.
IFNAME: specifies the interface to match.
Use the no parameter with this command to remove the offset list.
21.3.6
Configuring the Administrative Distance
Administrative distance is a feature used by the routers to select the path when there are two or more different routes to the same destination from two different routing protocols. A smaller administrative distance indicating a more reliable protocol.
g
The router always selects route created by routing protocol of the smallest distance value. Each network has its own features. Therefore, there is no general rule for distance configuration. You should consider overall network to configure distance value.
Command
distance <1-255> [ A.B.C.D/M [ WORD ] ]
Mode
Router
Function
Sets the administrative distance.
1 - 255: distance value.
Default value of distance is 120.
A.B.C.D/M: network prefix and length. Sets default RIP distance to specified value when the route's source IP address matches the specified prefix.
WORD: access-list name. Sets default RIP distance to specified value when the route's source IP address matches the specified prefix and the specified access-list.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
21.3.7
Extended RIP Configuration
•
•
•
•
Blocking an Interface
On a blocked interface, all receiving packets are processed as normal and router does not send either multicast or unicast RIP packets except to RIP neighbors specified with
neighbor command.
Command
passive-interface IFNAME
Mode Function
Router Blocks RIP broadcast on the interface.
IFNAME: interface name.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
Id:0900d80580212815 211
IP Routing
Command ip split-horizon
Operation Manual CLI
Split-Horizon
Normally, routers that are connected to broadcast-type IP networks and that use distance-vector routing protocols employ the split horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops. Split horizon blocks information about routes from being advertised by a router out any interface from which that information originated. This behavior usually optimizes communications among multiple routers, particularly when links are broken. However, with non broadcast networks, such as Frame Relay, situations can arise for which this behavior is less than ideal. For these situations, you might want to disable split horizon.
If an interface is configured with secondary IP addresses and split horizon is enabled, updates might not be sourced by every secondary address. One routing update is sourced per network number unless split horizon is disabled.
In order to activate or deactivate or disable split horizon, perform the following tasks in interface configuration mode.
Mode Function
Interface Performs the split-horizon action on the interface. The default is split-horizon poisoned.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
RIP Version
g
RIP version is used globally by the router. The router of the hiX 5750 R2.0 basically supports only
version 2.
However, it is possible to configure the router to receive only version 1 type packet or only version 2 type packet.
Command
version <1-2>
Mode Function
Router Configures the version of RIP processing. Default is RIP v2.
Use the no parameter with this command to restore the default version.
The following commands apply to a specific interface and overrides any the version specified by the version command.
Command
ip rip send version 1
ip rip send version 2 ip rip send version 1 2 ip rip receive version 1 ip rip receive version 2 ip rip receive version 1 2
Mode Function
Interface Specifies sending of RIPv1 packets out of an interface.
Specifies sending of RIPv2 packets out of an interface.
Permits sending of both RIPv1 and v2 packets out of an interface.
Specifies acceptance of RIPv1 packets on the interface.
Specifies acceptance of RIPv2 packets on the interface.
Specifies acceptance of RIPv1 and v2 packets on the interface.
g
Use the no parameter with the commands above to use the global RIP version control rules.
Timers
Routing protocols use several timers that determine such variables as the frequency of routing updates, the length of time before a route becomes invalid, and other
212 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing parameters. You can adjust these timers to tune routing protocol performance to better suit your internet needs.
Command
timers basic update timeout garbage
Mode
Router
Function
Adjusts routing protocol timers. Values in seconds Range of the values is 5-
2147483647.
update: routing table update timer (default is 30).
timeout: routing information timeout timer. After this interval has elapsed and no updates for a route are received, the route is declared invalid (default is 180)
garbage:routing garbage collection timer. Upon expiration of the garbage-collection timer, the route is finally removed from the routing table (default is 120)
Use the no parameter with this command to restore the defaults.
21.3.8
Managing the Authentication Key
Only RIP version 2 supports authentication on an interface.
Command
ip rip authentication key-chain LINE
Mode Function
Interface Enables RIPv2 authentication on an interface.
LINE: name of the key chain.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this function.
The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports two modes of authentication on an interface for which RIP authentication is enabled: plain text authentication and MD5 authentication. The default authentication in every RIP Version 2 packet is plain text authentication.
g
Do not use plain text authentication in RIP packets for security purposes, because the unencrypted authentication key is sent in every RIP Version 2 packet.
In order to configure RIP authentication, use the following order of commands.
Command
ip rip authentication string LINE
ip rip authentication mode { text | md5 }
Mode Function
Interface Specifies the authentication string or password used by a key.
LINE: specifies authentication string or password used by a single key on an interface.
The string must be shorter than 16 characters.
Use the no parameter with this command to disable this feature.
Interface Specifies the type of authentication mode used for RIP v2 packets.
text: clear text or simple password authentication.
md5: uses the keyed MD5 authentication algorithm.
Use the no parameter with this command to restore clear text authentication.
21.3.9
Checking of Router and Protocol Information
Display specific router statistics such as the contents of IP routing tables and databases to determine resource utilization and solve network problems. You can also discover the routing path your router’s packets are taking through the network.
Id:0900d80580212815 213
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
show ip rip
Command show ip protocols
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
The command displays all RIP routes. For routes that are received through RIP, this command will display the time the packet was sent and the tag information. This command will also display this information for routes redistributed into RIP.
Displays current RIP status. It includes RIP timer, filtering, version, RIP enabled interface, and RIP peer information.
21.4
IS-IS Routing
IS-IS (Intermediate System to Intermediate System) routing can be used inside the routing domain to form adjacencies between all Layer 3 nodes of the same domain. The implementation of IS-IS routing is dedicated to IP routing (Integrated IS-IS) according to
RFC 1142 and RFC 1195.
Connectionless network routing and End System-IS discovery are not supported.
-IS routing makes use of a two-level hierachical:
• Level 1 (L1) routers know the topology inside their area, including all routers and hosts. They forward all traffic for destinations outside by using a Level 2 (L2) router within their area which knows the domain (level 2) topology. All L1 routers and hosts in an area must have a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) with the same area address.
g
The GPON OLT itself is part of a single area. Therefore it performs the tasks of a L1 router only. The IS-IS routing can be established at the uplink ports only not at subscriber ports.
• Level 2 (L2) routers connect all areas within a routing domain. They advertise their own area addresses (NSAP) to the other L2 routers in the backbone.
L1 and L2 routers have two link-state databases: a level 1 link-state database for intraarea routing and a level 2 link-state database for inter-area routing. The routing tables are builded calculating the shortest path tree (SPT) by each IS.
An IS-IS area can consist of L1 routers only, L1/L2 routers or L2 only or a combination of all.
g
There is a limitation, only one IS-IS instance can run Level-2 routing (either Level-2 only IS or Level-1-2 IS).
-IS is used to intermittently send out link state information across the network, so that
each router can maintain a current picture of network topology. For messages four packet types are used:
• Hello-packets are used for functions capability announcement and neighbor discovery
•
-packets (Link state PDU) are used to distribute routing information between the
IS-IS notes, e.g. network topology information and IP addresses.
• CSNP-packets (Complete Sequence Number PDU) contains a list of all LSPs from the current link state database, using to be ensure that all routers of LSPs have the same information and are synchronized.
• PSNP-packets (Partial Sequence Number PDU) are used to request one or more
LSPs and acknowledge their receiption.
The IS-IS configuration is described in the following sections:
•
Basic Configuration of IS-IS Router
•
214 Id:0900d80580212815
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
•
Configuring of Interface Parameters
•
Redistribution of Reachability Information
•
.
21.4.1
Basic Configuration of IS-IS Router
To configure IS-IS on the router, perform the following tasks:
1.
Enabling IS-IS Process on the Router
2.
Configure Network Entity Titles (NET) for the Routing Process
3.
Enabling IS-IS Routing on the Interface
Enabling IS-IS Process on the Router
Change to Router configuration mode and enable a IS-IS routing process.
router isis WORD
Command Mode
Config
Function
Enables IS-IS routing and enters router configuration mode.
WORD: router name excluding spaces)
Remove IS-IS routing instance with the no command.
Configure Network Entity Titles (NET) for the Routing Process
net NET
Command Mode
Router
Function
Adds a Network Entity Title (NET) for the instance. NET define the area addresses for the IS-IS area.
XX. .. .XXXX.YYYY.YYYY.YYYY.00
XX. .. .XXXX Area Address
YYYY.YYYY.YYYY System ID
Use the no parameter to remove the NET.
g
Up to parameter max-area-adresses number of NETs can be specified.
Command
max-area-addresses <3-254>
Mode
Router
Function
Specifies the number of max area addresses.
3 - 254: max. addresses range
The no parameter set the number to the default value 3.
Enabling IS-IS Routing on the Interface
Enter into Interface configuration mode and specify the interfaces that should be actively routing IS-IS.
Command
ip router isis [ WORD ]
Mode Function
Interface Enables an IS-IS IPv4 routing process on the interface.
This command is mandatory to IS-IS configuration!
WORD: existing or new routing instance tag (e.g. symbolic router name)
Disable IS-IS routing on the interface with the no command (To clear the database, unconfigure the IS-IS routing instance.)
21.4.2
Extended Router Configuration
•
Level for the Routing Instance
•
Id:0900d80580212815 215
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
•
•
•
Level for the Routing Instance
By default the first instance is Level 1 and Level 2 and the rest are Level 1.
Command
is-type { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only }
Mode
Router
Function
Sets IS to specified level for the routing process.
level-1: Act as a area router only
level-1-2: Act as both a area router and an domain router
level-2-only: Act as an domain router only
Dynamic Hostname Exchange
The following commands configures the Dynamic Hostname Exchange Mechanism
-to-hostname translation.
g
Using this command to enable Dynamic Hostname Exchange Mechanism and
System-ID to hostname translation is performed for the result of
show isis database and some other
Command
dynamic-hostname [ area-tag ]
hostname dynamic
Mode
Router
Function
Enables the dynamic hostname exchange mechanism
(RFC2763) and System-ID-to-hostname translation
area-tag: Routing process tag
The no parameter disables the mechanism.
LSP Parameter
Command
lsp-gen-interval { level-1 | level-2 } <1-120>
lsp-gen-interval <1-120>
lsp-refresh-interval <1-65535>
max-lsp-lifetime <1-65535>
ignore-lsp-errors
Mode
Router
Router
Router
Router
Function
Sets minimum interval before regenerating the same
level-1: sets interval for Level-1 IS.
level-2: sets interval for Level-2 IS
1 - 120: LSP generation interval in seconds.
The smaller the interval the faster the convergence, but it might cause more frequent flooding.
Use the no parameter with this command to set the interval to the default (10 s).
Sets the LSP refresh interval.
1 - 65535: LSP refresh interval in seconds.
Use the no parameter to set the interval to the default value of
900 seconds.
Sets the maximum LSP lifetime.
1 - 65535: max. LSP lifetime in sec.
The no paramater sets the default value 1200 Sec. for the LSP lifetime.
Uses to ignore LSPs' checksum error.
By default LSP checksum is checked on receipt.
The no parameter to turn off this function.
216 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Command Mode
set-overload-bit [ { suppress { external | interlevel | external interlevel | interlevel external } | on-startup <5-86400> ]
Router
Function
Sets the overload-bit in self-LSPs.
Suppress: The router suppresses the redistribution of specified types of reachability information during overload state.
suppress external: suppress to redistribute external reachability
suppress interlevel: suppress to redistribute interlevel reachability
on-startup: The router sets overload bit at startup only , then clears the bit after specified interval has elapsed.
5 - 86400: interval in seconds after which the overload state is exited.
The no parameter clears the overload-bit from self-LSPs.
Normally the set-overload-bit command is allowed only when a router runs into problems.
Summary Address
The summary-address command aggregate addresses that are represented in the routing table. One summary address can include multiple groups of addresses for a given level. Routes learned from other routing protocols also can be summarized.
Command Mode
summary-address A.B.C.D/M [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]
Config/
Router
Function
Configures summary address to summarize IPv4 reachability information.
A.B.C.D/M: specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP network.
level-1: Summarize reachability information only for Level-1.
level-1-2: Summarize reachability information for both Level-1 and Level-2.
level-2: Summarize reachability information only for Level-2.
Summary-address is applied to Level-2 IS if level parameter is omitted.
The no parameter with this command is unconfigured the summary.
Domain Password
g
Configuring the domain password to enable authentication when receiving and
and Sequence Number PDU in Level-2 domain. Domain password must be the same in Level-2 domain.
Command
domain-password WORD
Mode
Router
Function
Sets the authentication password for Level-2 domain.
WORD: routing domain password string (excluding spaces).
21.4.3
Configuring of Interface Parameters
Interface parameters must be consistent across all routers in an attached network.
Therefore, be sure that if you do configure any of these parameters, the configurations for all routers on the network have compatible values.
The Interfaces configuration mode is entered with the interface IFNAME command in the configuration mode. The name of the interface to be configured must be specified.
•
Circuit Type and Summary Address
•
Message Intervals and Attributes
•
•
•
Id:0900d80580212815 217
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
Circuit Type and Summary Address
The level of adjacencies formed on the interface can be specified with circuit-type command. The interface can be configured to form Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies, if the routing instance supports both levels. By default the IS-IS circuit-type is the same as the is-type of the routing instance.
Command
isis circuit-type { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only }
Mode Function
Config/
Interface
Configures circuit type (type of adjacency desired for neighbors) on the specified interface.
level-1: Level-1 only adjacencies are formed
level-1-2: Level-1-2 adjacencies are formed (this is the default circuit typ)
level-2-only: Level-2 only adjacencies are formed g
On the point-to point interface IS-IS Hello will be sent regardless of the circuit-type.
Message Intervals and Attributes
The average time between periodic PDU transmissions can be set and used in conjunction with a multiplier in order to control the actual value of holding time in the
PDUs transmitted by the IS on the interface. If the PDUs are to be padded to the full MTU of the circuit, the command isis hello padding is specified. CSNPs are transmitted p eriodically on the circuit. The interval between periodic CSNP transmissions can be changed.
Command
isis hello-interval { minimal | <1-65535> } [ level-1 | level-2 ]
isis hello-multiplier <3-1000> [ level-1 | level-2 ]
isis hello padding
isis csnp-interval <0-65535> [ level-1 | level-2 ]
isis lsp-interval <1-4294967295>
Mode Function
Config/
Interface
Specify the length of time, in seconds, between hello packets the router sends on the specified interface. The Hello interval is calculated by dividing by the hello-multiplier.
minimal: Holdtime 1 second, interval depends on multiplier,
1 - 65535: Hello interval value
level-1: Specify hello-interval for level-1 IIHs
level-2: Specify hello-interval for level-2 IIHs
The no parameter with this command sets the default value 10 sec. for both level-1 and level-2.
Config/
Interface
Sets multiplier for Hello holding time.
3 - 1000: Hello multiplier value
level-1: Specify hello multiplier for level-1 IIHs
level-2: Specify hello multiplier for level-2 IIHs
The no parameter sets the default value 3 to both level-1 and level-2.
Config/
Interface
Adds padding to IS-IS hello packets. IS-IS pads the Hello packet by default to notice neighbors the supported
size.
The no parameter disable the padding.
Config/
Interface
Sets CSNP interval. This parameter is only valid on broadcast interface.
0 - 65535: CSNP interval in seconds
level-1: Specify interval for level-1 CSNPs only
level-2: Specify interval for level-2 CSNPs only
The no paramater sets the default value 10 Sec. for the interval to both level-1 and level-2.
Config/
Interface
1 - 4294967295: LSP interval in milliseconds
The no parameter sets the default value 33 ms for the interval.
218 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Command
isis retransmit-interval <0-65535>
Mode
Config/
Interface
Function
Sets per-LSP retransmission interval.
0 - 65535: Interval between retransmissions of the same LSP in seconds
The no paramater sets the default value 5 Sec. for the interval.
Metrics
Running integrated IS-IS, a default IP route will automatically be installed in the level 1 routers pointing toward the nearest L1/L2 router that originally set the attached bit in its
. If there are multiple level 2-capable routers in the area, the closest L1/L2
router is selected based on the cost.
The cost metric (narrow-metric) is used by default, measuring the cost of the complete link. The interface default metric is put into IP reachability information TLVs and IS reachability information TLVs in LSPs.
The default metric for the circuit can be set with the command isis metric and the priority for becoming IS with the command isis priority.
Command
isis metric <1-63> [ level-1 | level-2 ]
isis priority <0-127> [ level-1 | level-2 ]
Mode Function
Interface Configures the default metric (metric-style narrow) for the interface.
1 - 63: Range of calculation
level-1: metric to level-1 links
level-2: metric to level-2 links
The no parameter with this command sets default metric to the default value = 10 to both level-1 and level-2
Config/
Interface
Sets priority for designated router election.
0 - 127: Priority value (default priority is 64 for both level-1 and level-2)
level-1: Specify priority for level-1 routing
level-2: Specify priority for level-2 routing
Mesh Groups
Mesh groups are a mechanism to reduce redundant packet transmissions for the IS-IS protocol.
g
If an interface is configured as "mesh group blocked", the standard
database synchronization process is applied if the interface receives CSNP (Complete
Sequence Number PDU) or PSNP (Partial Sequence Number PDU).
Command
isis mesh-group { blocked | <1-4294967295> }
Mode Function
Interface Sets IS-IS mesh group ID on the specified interface.
1 - 4294967295: Mesh-group Number
blocked: blocks
s on the current interface.
The no parameter disables / unblocked mesh group on the specified interface.
Authentication Password
IS-IS specifies an authentication mechanism to prevent unauthorized routers from forming adjacencies or injecting TLVs (Table-length-value). The authentication can only be activeted globally but can be configured independently for L1 and L2 Hello PDUs
(Protocol Data Unit). By default no password is used.
g
On point-to-point interfaces for both L1 and L2 the same password must be configured.
Id:0900d80580212815 219
IP Routing Operation Manual CLI
Command
isis password WORD [ level-1 | level-2 ]
Mode Function
Interface Configures the authentication password for interface.
WORD: plain-text password (excluding spaces).
level-1: Specify password for level-1 PDUs (Intra area)
level-2: Specify password for level-2 PDUs (Domain)
Use the no parameter to clear the password.
21.4.4
Redistribution of Reachability Information
•
Redistribution of Information from other Routing Protocols
•
Redistribution of Information between the Levels
Redistribution of Information from other Routing Protocols
Command
redistribute { kernel | connected | static | rip | ospf | bgp }
metric <0-4261412864> metric-type
{ internal | external } { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 }
redistribute { kernel | connected | static | rip | ospf | bgp }
redistribute { kernel | connected | static | rip | ospf | bgp }
{ metric <0-4261412864> | metric-type
{ internal | external } | { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 } }
Mode Function
Router Redistributes reachability information from other routing protocols.
kernel: kernel routes
connected: connected routes
static: static routes
routes
ospf:
bgp:
routes.
0 - 4261412864: metric value
internal: internal metric
external: external metric
level-1: redistribute routes into level-1
level-1-2: redistribute routes into level-1 and level-2
level-2: redistribute routes into level-2
If metric is not specified: metric = 0
If metric type is not specified internal metric type is used.
If level is not specified routes are redistributed into level-2.
Use the no parameter with this command to stop redistribution.
Redistribution of Information between the Levels
The following commands redistributes reachability information from one level to the other level. If this commands are not used, IS-IS redistributes selected L1 routes into L2.
Command Mode
redistribute isis level-1 into level-2 [ distribute-list WORD ] Router
redistribute isis level-2 into level-1 [ distribute-list WORD ]
Function
Redistributes reachability information from one level to the other level. If an access-list name is given with this command for an access list that does not exist, the routes are still redistributed.
Select routes:
- Inter-area routes from level-1
- Inter-area routes into level-2
WORD: access-list name
Use the no parameter with this command to stop redistribution.
21.4.5
Checking the Configuration
In order to check the current configuration use the following commands:
Command show running-config router isis
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows current IS-IS router information
220 Id:0900d80580212815
Operation Manual CLI IP Routing
Command
show isis WORD topology [ l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2 ]
show isis topology [ l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2 ]
show isis interface IFNAME
show memory isis
Mode
Privileged/
Exec
show ip route [ database ] isis
show isis WORD database [ detail | verbose ] |
[ l1 | l 2 | level-1 | level-2 ]
show isis database [ detail | verbose ] | [ l1 | l 2 | level-1
| level-2 ] | [ WORD ]
Privileged/
Exec
Privileged/
Exec
Privileged/
Exec
Config
Function
Displays data about IS-IS topology.
WORD: routing area tag
l1, level-1: path to all level-1 routers in the area (inter area topology)
l2, level-2: path to all level-2 routers in the domain (intra area topology)
Displays IS-IS routing table for IPv4.
database: Link state database
Displays IS-IS link state database information.
detail: detailed information
verbose: detailed information
WORD: routing area tag
l1, level-1: for Level 1 only
l2, level-2: for Level 2 only
Displays detailed interface information.
IFNAME: enter interface name
Shows consumption ratio of IS-IS memory
Id:0900d80580212815 221
Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI
22 Spanning Tree
If multiple paths exist on a network, the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, 802.1D) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. If that path fails, STP automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations.
STP detects and eliminates logical loops by forcing the redundant data path into a blocked state.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, 802.1w) innovates to reduce the time of network convergence on STP. It is an easy and fast to configure protocol. Also, RSTP provides comparability with STP.
If the network contains more than one VLAN, the logical network configured by single
(traditional) STP does not work. The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, 802.1Q) configures a separate spanning tree for each VLAN and blocks the links which are redundant within each spanning tree. So several VLANs can be mapped to a single spanning tree instance.
Perform the following tasks in order to configure STP:
1. Decide STP mode using the stp force-version command
2. Activate MST daemon using the stp mst enable command
3. Configure detail options if specific commands are required.
22.1
Configuring the STP Operation Mode
Use the following command the configure the forced version.
Command
stp force-version { stp | rstp | mstp }
no stp force-version
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets the specified STP version.
stp: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
rstp: Rapid STP
mstp: Multiple STP.
Clears force-version configuration.
22.2
Activating STP/RSTP/MSTP
To enable/disable STP, RSTP, MSTP in the force-version, use the following commands.
Command
stp mst { enable I disable }
stp mst reset-tccount MSTID_RANGE
Mode
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables STP, RSTP or MSTP function.
Resets “bridge topology change” counts.
MSTID_RANGE: instance number.
Even though STP function does not operated, loop event does not occur in a NE which belongs to the non-dual path LAN environment.
22.3
Adding STP Ports
This feature allows the operator to decide if the port can be managed by STP or not.
To set the port to be managed by STP, use the following command.
222 Id:0900d80580203028
Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree
Command
stp port { add I del } PORTS
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets port to be managed by STP.
add: add port number to port-set (default: all ports are added)
del: delete port number from port-set
PORTS: select slot/port number (for STP slot number always 0)
After deleting a STP port, packets can be forwarded over it furthermore without STP function.
To check the ports managed by STP, use the following command.
show stp port
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows the port-set list to be managed by STP.
Example:
SWITCH(bridge)#
show stp port
--------------------------------------------------------------
Port STP Portset-status MAC Admin-status MAC Oper-status
-------------------------------------------------------------
9/1 addedenabled On
9/2 addedenabled On
9/3 addedenabled On
9/4 addedenabled On
9/5 addedenabled Off
9/6 addedenabled Off
-------------------------------------------------------------
Default portset bitmask:0x3f
Current portset bitmask:0x3f
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp port del 9/3
SWITCH(bridge)
# show stp port
--------------------------------------------------------------
Port STP Portset-status MAC Admin-status MAC Oper-status
--------------------------------------------------------------
9/1 addedenabled On
9/2 addedenabled On
9/4 addedenabled On
9/5 addedenabled Off
9/6 addedenabled Off
-------------------------------------------------------------
SWITCH(bridge)#
22.4
Configuring the STP
22.4.1
Deciding the Root Switch
To establish STP, RSTP, or MSTP function, first of all, the root switch (for MSTP the IST root switch) should be decided. Unless otherwise configured, the switch with the lowest bridge ID will be decided as the root switch. However, the operator can determine the
Id:0900d80580203028 223
Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI root switch by configuring the priority. The switch with the lowest priority operates as root switch. Use the following command to change the switch priority.
Command
stp mst priority MSTID_RANGE <0-61440>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures the priority of the switch.
MSTID_RANGE: instance number
0 - 61440: priority value in steps of 4096 (default = 32768).
Clears the Priority of the switch.
no stp mst priority MSTID_RANGE
Example:
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst priority 0 8192
SWITCH(bridge)#
show stp mst 0 all
CST Root 2000.080006261d2fI
ST Root 2000.080006261d2f
max age 20(s) hello time 4(s) forward delay 15(s) max hops 20
-------------------- MST00 --------------------vlans : 51-4096 bridge id 2000.080006261d2f
designated root 2000.080006261d2f
root port 0/0 path cost 0
Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------
0/1 2001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/5 8005 0 - disable disabled -
0/6 8006 0 - disable disabled
SWITCH(bridge)#
22.4.2
Deciding of Path-Cost
After deciding the root switch, there is the need to determine on which route packets has to be forwarded. The parameter to do this is the path-cost value.
Generally, the path cost depends on the transmission speed of the LAN interface. The following table shows path costs according to transmit rate of LAN interface.
Transmit Rate Path-cost
4M 250
10M 100
100M 19
1G 4
10G 2
Table 24
STP Path Cost
224 Id:0900d80580203028
Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree
Transmit Rate Path-cost
4M 20,000,000
10M 2,000,000
100M 200,000
1G 20,000
10G 2,000
Table 25
RSTP Path Cost
If the route decided by path-cost gets overloading, another route should be taken. Considering these situations, there is the possibility for the operator to determine a route manually by configuring the path-cost of the root port.
In order to configure path cost, use following commands.
Command Mode
stp mst path-cost MSTID_RANGE PORTS <0-200000000> Bridge
no stp mst path-cost MSTID_RANGE PORTS
Function
Configures path-cost to configure route.
MSTID_RANGE: select instance number (0-32)
PORTS: select the port number
0 - 200000000: path cost value.
Clears the configured path-cost.
22.4.3
Deciding the Port Priority
If all conditions of two routes are the same, the operator can decide the route by changing the port priority. To configure the port priority, use the following commands.
Command
stp mst port-priority MSTID_RANGE PORTS <0-240>
no stp mst port-priority MSTID_RANGE PORTS
Mode Function
Bridge Configures port-priority.
MSTID_RANGE: select instance number (0-64)
PORTS: select the port number
0 - 240: port priority value in steps of 16 (default: 128).
Bridge Clears the configured port-priority.
22.4.4
Deciding the MST Region
If MSTP is established, decide which MST region the switch is going to belong to by configuring the MST configuration ID. The configuration ID contains region name, revision,
VLAN map. To set the configuration ID, use the following commands.
Command
stp mst config-id name NAME
no stp mst config-id name
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets the name for the region.
NAME: enter name to give the MST region.
Deletes the name of region.
Id:0900d80580203028 225
Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI
Command
stp mst config-id map <1-32> VLAN-RANGE
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures the range of VLAN that is going to be grouping as a region.
1 - 64: select an instance ID number
VLAN-RANGE: enter a number of the VLANs to be mapped to the specified instance.
Deletes entire VLAN-map or part of it.
no stp mst config-id map <1-32> VLAN-RANGE
no stp mst config-id map <1-32>
stp mst config-id revision <0-65535> Bridge Configures the switches in the same MST boundary as same number.
0 - 65535: set the MST configuration revision number.
Deletes the configured revision number.
no stp mst config-id revision
g
In case of STP or RSTP, the config- ID must not be set, otherwise, an error message will be displayed.
To delete the configuration ID, use following command.
no stp mst config-id
Command Mode
Bridge
Function
Delete all of the configured configuration ID.
22.4.5
Applying the STP Configuration
g
After setting, changing, or deleting the configuration ID, the configuration must be applied to be injected.
To commit the configuration, use the following command.
Command
stp mst config-id commit
Mode
Bridge
Function
Commits the configuration of the region.
22.4.6
Configuring a Point-to-Point MAC
The internal sublayer service makes available a pair of parameters that permit inspection of, and control over, the administrative and operational state of the point-to-point status of the MAC entity by the MAC relay entity.
To configure the point-to-point status, use the following command.
Command Mode
stp point-to-point-mac PORTS {auto I force-true I force-false} Bridge
no stp point-to-point-mac PORTS
Function
Sets point-to-point MAC.
PORTS: select the port number
auto: auto detect
force-true: force to point-to-point MAC
force-false: force to shared MAC (not point-to point MAC)
Deletes point-to-point MAC configuration.
True means, the MAC is connected to a point-to-point LAN, i.e., there is at most one other system attached to the LAN.
False means, the MAC is connected to a non point-to-point LAN, i.e., there can be more than one other system attached to the LAN.
226 Id:0900d80580203028
Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree
22.4.7
Configuring of Edge Ports
Edge ports are used to connect end devices. There are no switches or spanning-tree bridges after the edge port. To configure edge port mode, use the following command.
Command Mode Function
PORTS: select the port number.
Deletes port edge mode.
no stp edge-port PORTS
22.4.8
Changing the STP Operation Mode
MSTP is backward compatible with STP and RSTP. If some other switches in the network send BDPUs of version STP or RSTP, a switch using MSTP will automatically change to the STP mode. However, the switch cannot change the STP mode to MSTP automatically. If the operator wants to change the network topology to MSTP mode, he has to clear the previous protocol on the ports manually. To clear the protocol and restart the protocol detected, use the following command.
Command
stp clear-detected-protocol PORTS
Mode
Privileged /
Config/
Bridge
Function
Clears detected protocol.
PORTS: select the port number.
22.4.9
Showing the Configuration
To check the xSTP configuration, use the following commands.
show stp show stp mst
Command
show stp mst MSTID_RANGE
show stp mst MSTID_RANGE { all I PORTS } [ detail ]
Mode
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Shows the configuration of STP/RSTP/MSTP.
Shows the configuration when it is configured as MSTP.
Shows the configuration of specific Instance.
MSTID_RANGE: MST instance number.
Shows the configuration of the specific Instance for the ports.
all: select all ports
PORTS: select port number
detail: show detail information (as option).
g
With show stp command, it is possible to check the information about STP/
RSTP/MSTP. How to distinguish them is to check which one is marked on the mode.
g
If STP or RSTP is configured, the MSTID_RANGE value should be 0.
In case of configured MSTP, use the following command.
Command
show stp mst config-id { current I pending }
Mode
Privileged/
Bridge
Function
Shows the MSTP configuration identifier.
current: shows the current configuration as it is used to run MST
pending: shows the edited configuration.
Id:0900d80580203028 227
Spanning Tree
228
Operation Manual CLI
For example, after setting the configuration ID and applying it with the stp mst config-
id commit command, the configuration ID can be checked with the show stp mst
config-id command.
Example:
SWITCH(bridge)#
show stp mst 0,2 all
CST Root 8000.080006261d2fI
ST Root 8000.080006261d2f
max age 20(s) hello time 4(s) forward delay 15(s) max hops 20
-------------------- MST00 -------------------vlans : 51-4096 bridge id 8000.080006261d2f
designated root 8000.080006261d2f
root port 0/0 path cost 0
Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------
0/1 8001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/5 8005 0 - disable disabled -
0/6 8006 0 - disable disabled
--------------------- MST02 -------------------vlans : 1-50 bridge id 8002.080006261d2f
designated root 8002.080006261d2f
root port 0/0 path cost 0
Port id AdminCost Cost Role State Attribute
---------------------------------------------------------------
0/1 8001 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/2 8002 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/3 8003 0 20000 designated forwarding P2P
0/4 8004 0 20000 backup blocking P2P
0/5 8005 0 - disable disabled -
0/6 8006 0 - disable disabled -
SWITCH(bridge)#
SWITCH(bridge)#
show stp mst 2 0/1 detail
CST Root 8000.080006261d2fI
ST Root 8000.080006261d2f
max age 20(s) hello time 4(s) forward delay 15(s) max hops 20
-------------------- MST02 -------------------vlans : 1-50 bridge id 8002.080006261d2f
designated root 8002.080006261d2f
root port 0/0 path cost 0port 0/1 port id 1001 state forwarding role designated designated root 8002.080006261d2f path cost 5000
Id:0900d80580203028
Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree designated bridge 8002.080006261d2 message age timer 0.0 designated port 1001 forward delay timer 0.00 designated cost 0 flags P2P
SWITCH(bridge)#
22.5
BPDU Configuration
BPDU is a transmission message used in order to configure and maintain the configuration of STP/RSTP/MSTP. Switches using STP exchange their information BDPU to find the best path. An MSTP BPDU is general an STP BPDU extended with additional
MST data. The MSTP part of BPDU does not rest if it is out of the region.
•
Hello time
Hello time decides an interval time when a switch transmits BPDU. It can be configured from 1 to 10 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
•
Max Age
Root switch transmits new information every time based on information from another switches. However, if there are many switches on network, it takes lots of time to transmit BDPUs. And, if the network status is changed while transmitting BDPU, this information is useless. To get rid of useless information, ’Max age’ is identified in each information.
•
Forward Delay
Switches find location of another switches connected to LAN though received BDPU and transmit packets. Since it takes certain time to receive BDPU and find the location before transmitting packet, switches send packet at regular interval named forward delay.
g
The configuration for BPDU is applied as selected in force-version. The same commands are used for STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
22.5.1
Hello Time
Hello time decides an interval time when a switch transmits BPDU. To configure hello time, use the following command.
Command
stp mst hello-time <1–10>
no stp mst hello-time
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures hello time to transmit the message in STP, RSTP, MSTP:
1 - 10: set the hello time (default = 2 seconds).
Clears the time configuration that is set up to transmit route message.
22.5.2
Forward Delay
It is possible to configure forward delay, which means time to take port status from listening to forwarding. To configure forward delay, use the following command.
Command
stp mst forward-delay <4–30>
no stp mst forward-delay
Mode
Bridge
Function
Designates Forward-delay in STP, RSTP or MSTP.
4 - 30: delay time value. The default is 15 seconds
Clears the configured forward-delay.
Id:0900d80580203028 229
Spanning Tree Operation Manual CLI
22.5.3
Max Age
Max age shows how long path message is valid. To configure max age to delete useless messages, use the following command.
Command
stp mst max-age <6–40>
no stp mst max-age
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures max age of route message in STP, RSTP or MSTP.
6 - 40: max age time value (default: 20 sec.)
Releases max age of configured route message. g
It is recommended that max age is configured less than twice of forward delay and more than twice of hello time.
22.5.4
BPDU Hop
In MSTP, it is possible to configure the number of hop in order to prevent BPDU from wandering. BPDU passes the switches as the number of hop by this function. To configure the number of hop of BPDU in MSTP, use the following command.
Command
stp mst max-hops <1-40>
no stp mst max-hops
Mode
Bridge
Function
Configures the number of hop for BPDU
1 - 40: set the number of possible hops in the region.
Deletes the number of hop for BPDU in MSTP.
22.5.5
Checking the BPDU Configuration
To check the configuration for BPDU, use the following command.
Command Mode Function
show stp mst Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Shows the configuration for BPDU.
22.6
Self Loop Detection
Although there is no double path in user’s equipment, loop can be caused by network environment and cable condition connected to equipment. To prevent this, the hiX 5750
R2.0 has a self loop detection to perceive that an outgoing packet is got back. Through the self loop detection, it is possible to prevent packet, which comes back because it blocks the port. To enable/disable self loop detection, use the following command.
Command
stp self-loop-detect { enable I disable }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Enables/disables self loop detection function.
Use the following commands for detection of loops or to check the ports where a loop occurred.
230 Id:0900d80580203028
Operation Manual CLI Spanning Tree
Command show stp self-loop-detect
show stp self-loop-detect { all I PORTS }
Mode Function
Bridge Shows status of self loop detection and a port where loop is happed.
Shows self loop detection status on specified ports.
all: all the ports
PORTS: selected port.
22.7
Sample of MSTP Configuration
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp force-version mstp
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst enable
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst config-id map 2 1-50
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst config-id name 1
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst config-id revision 1
SWITCH(bridge)#
stp mst config-id commit
SWITCH(bridge)
# show stp mst
Status enabled bridge id 8000.00d0cb000183
designated root 8000.00d0cb000183
root port 0 path cost 0 max age 20.00 bridge max age 20.00 hello time 2.00 bridge hello time 2.00 forward delay 15.00 bridge forward delay 15.00
CIST regional root 8000.00d0cb000183 CIST path cost 0 max hops 20 name SWITCH revision 1 instance vlans
---------------------------------------------------------------
CIST 51-4094
2 1-50
---------------------------------------------------------------
SWITCH(bridge)#
Id:0900d80580203028 231
IP Anti-Spoofing Operation Manual CLI
23 IP Anti-Spoofing
IP anti-spoofing can be used at the subscriber ports to control the IP traffic in the upstream direction. Only IP packets should be accepted which come in from valid IP source addresses. All other packets have to be discarded. IP anti-spoofing for incoming
IP packets is enabled if it was set for both the VLAN and the port.
23.1
Global Enabling of IP Anti-Spoofing
g
IP anti-spoofing may be only enabled if the CXU runs in enhanced MAC mode.
Command
ip antispoofing global [ enable | disable ]
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets the global antispoofing flag: enable or disable.
23.2
Enabling IP Anti-Spoofing for Port
Command
bridgeport PORTS antispoofing { enable | disable }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Bridge port IP anti-spoofing configuration,
PORTS: slot/port/ONU ID/ONT slot/ONT port
enable/disables IP anti-spoofing.
23.3
Checking the Status
Command show ip antispoofing global show ip antispoofing bridgeport
Mode
Bridge
Function
Displays global status of IP anti-spoofing.
Displays port status of IP anti-spoofing.
23.4
Configuring an IP Anti-Spoofing VLAN Profile
In VLANs which are entered into the IP anti-spoofing VLAN profile, packets with allowed
IP addresses only will be accepted and forwarded. In the other VLANs, all packets are forwarded without verifying the IP source address.
g
In the hiX 5750 R2.0, there is only one anti-spoofing VLAN profile.
Command
ip antispoofing vlan-profile [ <1-1> ] add { <1-4094> | all }
ip antispoofing vlan-profile [ <1-1> ] del { <1-4094> | all }
Mode
Bridge
Function
Adds specified VLAN or all VLANs to IP anti-spoofing VLAN profile.
1 - 1: index VLAN profile
1 - 4094: VLAN-ID
all: all VLANs in system
Deletes specified VLAN or all VLANs from IP anti-spoofing
VLAN profile.
Command show ip antispoofing vlan-profile
Mode
Bridge
Function
Shows IP anti-spoofing VLAN profile,
232 Id:0900d8058023ed69
Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation
24 Link Aggregation
LACP (link aggregation control protocol) complying with IEEE 802.3ad bundles several physical GPON ports together to one logical port providing enlarged bandwidth. g
In the hiX 5750 R2.0 system, Link Aggregation Groups (LAG) can be formed over the 1 Gbps Ethernet uplink ports of the OLT cards CXU (up to 4 interfaces per group) and IU_10x1G (up to 8 interfaces per group).
The system supports two kinds of link aggregation groups - static groups as port trunk and dynamic groups using
. A static LAG balances the traffic load across the links in the LAG port. If a physical link within the static LAG fails, traffic previously carried over the failed link is moved to the remaining links.
24.1
Selecting Distribution Method
To choose the distribution method of aggregated CXU or IU_10x1GE ports, use the following commands.
Command
trunk group distmode AGGREGATORS
{ srcmac I dstmac I srcdstmac I scrip I dstip I srcdstip }
no trunk group distmode AGGREGATORS
trunk iu SLOT aggregator group distmode AGGREGATIONS
{ srcmac | dstmac | srcdstmac | srcip | dstip | srcdstip }
Mode Function
Bridge Manages distribution method of fixed trunk groups of
CXUports.
AGGREGATORS: trunk group ID (0-1)
srcmac: set source MAC
dstmac: set destination MAC
srcdstmac: set source destination MAC(default)
srcip: set source IP
dstip: set destination IP
srcdstip: set source destination IP.
Deletes fixed trunk groups of CXU ports,
Bridge Manages distribution method of fixed trunk groups of IU ports.
AGGREGATORS: trunk group ID (0 - 4)
SLOT: IU slot number.
Deletes fixed trunk groups of IU ports.
no trunk iu SLOT aggregator group distmode AGGREGATIONS g
Group-ID of port trunk cannot be configured repeatedly.
g
Source destination MAC address is basically used to decide the packet route.
24.2
Configuring a static Port Trunk
g
The port designated as member port of a trunk is automatically deleted from existing
VLAN. Therefore, if member port and aggregated port exist in different VLAN, VLAN configuration should be changed for the aggregated port. If the operator deletes a member port from the logical port or releases the port trunk, ports will be automatically contained as default VLAN.
24.2.1
Forming a fixed Trunk Group of Ports
To form the port trunk, use the following command.
Id:0900d8058020266d 233
Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI
Command Mode Function
trunk iu SLOT port AGGREGATOR PORTS Bridge
AGGREGATOR: trunk group ID (0-1)
PORTS: port numbers that should be added (0/1 -0/4).
Use the no parameter with this command to delete a fixed trunk of CXU ports.
Manage IU fixed trunk groups.
SLOT: IU slot number
AGGREGATOR: trunk group ID (0-4)
PORTS: port numbers that should be added (Slot/Port).
Use the no parameter with this command to delete a fixed trunk of IU ports.
g
Group-ID of port trunk cannot be configured repeatedly.
24.2.2
Checking Port Trunk Configuration
To check the configuration of port trunk, use the following command.
show trunk [ all ]
show trunk iu SLOT
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config/
Bridge
Shows the configuration for trunk.
Shows IU fixed trunk groups.
SLOT: select IU slot number.
24.3
Configuring LACP
LACP provides a dynamically exchange of information in order to configure and maintain link aggregation groups automatically. Load sharing is automatically readjusted if a failure or recovery from failure occurs in any of the links that participate in a dynamic LAG. g
Uplink ports which should be configured by LACP must be member of the same
VLAN. The aggregated port is automatically added to the appropriate VLAN.
The following sections explain how to configure dynamic LAG:
•
•
•
•
Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port
•
•
Deciding Member State of LACP Port
•
Configuring LACPDU Transmission Rate
•
Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator
•
•
.
24.3.1
Enabling/Disabling LACP
To enable/disable the LACP function, use the following commands.
234 Id:0900d8058020266d
Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation
Command
lacp aggregator AGGREGATIONS
lacp iu SLOT aggregator AGGREGATIONS
lacp aggregator admin-key AGGREGATIONS <1-15>
no lacp aggregator admin-key AGGREGATIONS
no lacp aggregator delay AGGREGATIONS <0-65535>
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Enables LACP for CXU of designated Aggregator-number.
AGGREGATIONS: aggregator ID that should be enabled for LACP (valid value from 0 to 1).
Use the no parameter with this command to release LACP for CXU for designated aggregator-number,
Enables LACP for IU.
SLOT: IU Slot number
AGGREGATIONS: aggregator IDs that should be enabled for
LACP (0-4).
Use the no parameter with this command to disables LACP for IU.
Enables admin-key of designated aggregator-number.
AGGREGATIONS: aggregator IDs that should be enabled for
LACP (valid value from 0 to 1).
0 - 15: admin-key value (default 0)
Release admin-key of designated aggregator-number,
Release collector max delay of designated aggregator-number,
AGGREGATIONS: aggregator IDs that should be disabled for
LACP
0 - 65535: delay value. g
The aggregator ID of an LAG cannot be configured repeatedly.
24.3.2
Configuring Packet Route
When packets enter to an LAG port and there is no process to decide the packet route, the packets could be gathered on particular member port. In this case, it is not possible to use the logical port effectively.
Therefore, the hiX 5750 R2.0 is configurable to route packets in order to distribute them on the member ports.The route is decided by source IP address, destination IP address, source MAC address, destination MAC address. g
The hiX 5750 R2.0 uses source destination MAC address by default to choose the packet route.
Command
lacp aggregator distmode AGGREGETIONS
{ srcmac I dstmac| srcdstmac| srcip| dstip| srcdstip }
no lacp aggregator distmode AGGREGETIONS
lacp iu SLOT aggregator distmode AGGREGATIONS
{ srcmac | dstmac | srcdstmac | srcip | dstip | srcdstip }
Mode Function
Bridge Manages distribution method of CXU ports to aggregator.
AGGREGATORS: select the aggregator ID (0-1)
srcmac: set source MAC
dstmac: set destination MAC
srcdstmac: set source destination MAC (default)
srcip: set source IP
dstip: set destination IP
srcdstip: set source destination IP.
Bridge
Clears destination MAC address of CXU.
Manages distribution method of IU ports to aggregator.
AGGREGATORS: aggregator numbers (0-4)
SLOT: select IU slot number.
Deletes aggregator of IU ports.
no lacp iu SLOT aggregator distmode AGGREGATIONS g
The aggregator ID of an LAG cannot be configured repeatedly.
Id:0900d8058020266d 235
Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI
24.3.3
Configuring the Member Ports
After configuring the aggregator, choose the physical ports that should be member of the LAG port using the following commands in Bridge configuration mode.
Command
lacp port PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port PORTS
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures physical port that is member port of aggregator,
PORT: port number(s) that should be enabled for LACP (slot/port, slot 0 is CXU slot)
Use the no parameter with this command to release a member port of aggregator
Configures physical port that is member port of aggregator,
PORT: port number(s) that should be enabled for LACP (Slot/Port)
SLOT: select IU slot number.
Use the no parameter with this command to release a member port of aggregator g
It is possible to configure several ports by using the delimiter, or -.
24.3.4
Configuring Operating Mode of Member Port
After configuring the member ports, choose the port operation mode - active or passive mode. Passive mode starts LACP when the port of the opposite GPON is using active mode. Because the priority of active mode is higher than of passive mode, the passive port follows the active port. g
If the uplink ports are set in passive mode, a link of member ports over two switches is impossible.
To configure the operation mode of member ports, use the following commands in
Bridge mode.
Command
lacp port activity PORTS
{ active I passive }
Mode
Bridge
no lacp port activity PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port activity PORTS { active | passive } Bridge
no lacp iu SLOT port activity PORTS
Function
Configures the mode of member port of CXU LAG (default is active),
PORT: select the member port number.
Releases operation mode of configured member port of CXU LAG,
Configures the mode of member port of IU LAG (default is active),
PORT: Select port number(s) (Slot/Port).
SLOT: select IU slot number.
Releases operation mode of configured member port of IU LAG, g
Member ports are set to active operation mode by default. After releasing the operating mode, the port is returned to default mode (active).
24.3.5
Configuring LACP Priority
In case of a configured active mode (LACP system enabled), it is required to choose the standard GPON port of the LAG and to configure the priority.
Command
lacp system priority <1-65535>
no lacp system priority
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets the priority of the CXU switch in LACP function,
1 - 65535: switch system priority.
Clears the priority of the configured CXU switch.
236 Id:0900d8058020266d
Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation
Command
lacp iu SLOT system priority <1-65535>
Mode
Bridge
Function
Sets switch system information needed by LACP (ex: SystemID) for IU.
SLOT: select IU slot number.
1 - 65535: switch system priority.
Clears the priority of the configured IU switch.
no lacp iu SLOT system priority g
The priority of the system is set to “32768 (=0x8000)” by default. After clearing the operating mode, the priority of the member ports return to this default value.
24.3.6
Deciding Member State of LACP Port
By default, LACP ports are potentially member of a configured dynamic LAG. However, these ports could operate as well as independent ports without being aggregatable to an LAG. These independent ports cannot be used as trunk port by the system.
Use the following commands to configure if a member port is aggregatable or not.
Command
lacp port aggregation PORTS
{ aggregatable I individual }
no lacp port aggregation PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port aggregation PORTS
{ aggregatable | individual }
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Designate whether a member port of CXU is included in LACP or not,
PORT: select the member port should be included.
Default setting is aggregatable.
Clears the configured member port of CXU in LACP,
Designate whether a member port of IU is included in LACP or not,
PORT: Select port number(s) (Slot/Port).
Default setting is aggregatable.
SLOT: Select port number(s).
Clears the configured member port of IU in LACP, no lacp iu SLOT port aggregation PORTS g
A member port is basically configured as aggregatable to LAG. After clearing the member state, the port returns to default configuration (aggregated).
24.3.7
Configuring LACPDU Transmission Rate
The member port transmits LACPDU (bridge protocol data unit) with its information.
Configure the LACPDU transmission rate by using the following commands.
Command
lacp port timeout PORTS { short I long }
no lacp port timeout PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port timeout PORTS { short | long }
no lacp iu SLOT port timeout PORTS
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures LACPDU transmission rate for CXU LAG.
PORTS: select the port number
short: short timeout
long: long timeout.
Clears LACPDU transmission rate of configured member port of
CXU LAG,
Configures LACPDU transmission rate for IU LAG:
PORTS: Select port number(s) (Slot/Port) short: short timeout long: long timeout
SLOT: select IU slot number.
Clears LACPDU transmission rate of configured member port of
IU LAG, g
LACPDU transmission rate of member port is basically configured as long.
Id:0900d8058020266d 237
Link Aggregation Operation Manual CLI g
The values of transmission rate are: long = 30 sec and short = 1 sec.
24.3.8
Configuring Admin Key of Member Port and Aggregator
All member ports in one aggregator have the same key values. In order to make an aggregator consisted of specified member ports, configure a key value that is different from key values of other ports.
Command
lacp port admin-key PORTS <1-15>
no lacp port admin-key PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port admin-key PORTS <1-15>
no lacp iu SLOT port admin-key PORTS
lacp iu SLOT aggregator admin-key AGGREGATIONS <1-15>
no lacp iu SLOT aggregator admin-key AGGREGATIONS
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Configures key value of member port on CXU.
PORTS: port number
1- 15: port key value.
Deletes key value of selected member port on CXU,
Configures key value of member port on IU.
PORTS: Select port number(s) (Slot/Port)
1- 15: select the port key value
SLOT: select IU slot number.
Deletes key value of selected member port on CXU.
Configures the admin-key of IU aggregator.
SLOT: IU slot number,
AGGREGATIONS; aggregator numbers (0-4),
1 - 15: admin-key value (default 1).
Deletes the admin-key of IU aggregator.
g
The key value of all ports is 1 by default. Executing the no commands returns the key value to 1.
24.3.9
Configuring Port Priority
To configure the priority of an LACP member port, use the following commands.
Command
lacp port priority PORTS <1-65535>
no lacp port priority PORTS
lacp iu SLOT port priority PORTS <1-65535>
Mode
Bridge
Bridge
Function
Sets the LACP priority of member port,
PORTS: CXU port number.
1 - 65535: port priority.
Clears port priority of selected member port of CXU.
Sets the LACP priority of member port,
SLOT: IU slot number.
PORTS: port number(s) (Slot/Port).
1 - 65535: sets port priority.
Clears port priority of selected IU member ports. no lacp iu SLOT port priority PORTS g
The LACP priority of a member port is basically configured to 32768. After clearing the priority, the member port returns to this default configuration.
24.3.10
Checking LACP Configuration
To check the LACP configuration, use the following commands.
238 Id:0900d8058020266d
Operation Manual CLI Link Aggregation
show lacp aggregator
Command
show lacp aggregator AGGREGATIONS
show lacp port
show lacp port PORTS
show lacp iu SLOT aggregator
show lacp iu SLOT aggregator AGGREGATIONS
show lacp iu SLOT port
show lacp iu SLOT port PORT
Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Bridge
Shows aggregator information of CXU.
Shows aggregator information of the selected CXU aggregator.
AGGREGATORS: Select aggregator number(s) (0-1)
Shows the information of member ports of CXU.
Shows the information of appropriated member port of CXU.
Shows aggregator information of IU.
SLOT: Select IU Slot Number.
Shows aggregator information of the selected IU aggregator.
SLOT: Select IU Slot Number.
AGGREGATIONS: Select aggregator number(s) (0-4)
Shows the information of IU member ports.
SLOT: Select IU Slot Number.
Shows the information of appropriated member port of IU.
SLOT: Select IU Slot Number.
PORT: Select port number(s) (Slot/Port)
Id:0900d8058020266d 239
Rules Operation Manual CLI
25 Rules
The hiX 5750 R2.0 system provides rules for the traffic management. Using rules, packets will be operated as the user has configured. Rule functions analyze the incoming traffic by classifying dependent on designated policy in order to decide on packets which will be forwarded. For each rule, the rule type, rule priority, rule match, rule action, and action parameter(s) must be configured. The physical port and data
fields within a packet such as the 802.1p priority (
),
can be modified to configure a policy. g
Note the following requirements and using hints:
• The rule name must be unique. Its size is limited to 63 characters.
• The sequence of entering the configuration commands is arbitrary.
• Rules can be modified (inclusive the rule type) only as long as the apply command is not executed. After that, the rule must be deleted and then created again with changed values.
• Some rule types will operate correctly only in single tagging mode, others only in double tagging mode. Nevertheless, it is possible and allowed to create and apply all rule types in both tagging modes. The hiX 5750 R2.0 system internally activates only rules that are fit for the tagging mode running currently.
• Use the show rule-profile command to display the configuration.
25.1
Creating a Rule
From the Rule configuration mode, use the following command to create a rule.
rule NAME create
Command Mode Function
Config Begins Rule Configuration mode,
NAME: enter an unique rule name.
After entering the rule create command, the prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to SWITCH(config-rule[name])#.
25.2
Setting of the Rule Type
In general, the rule type classifies the rule and determines allowed rule matches, rule actions, and required action parameters.
Command
type { cxu-generic | cxu-admin I iugpon-generic I iugpon-admin I iuuplink-generic I iuuplink-admin }
Mode
Rule
Function
Configures rule of a certain rule type.
cxu-generic: sets generic rule for CXU (rule 50, GenericRule)
cxu-admin: sets admin access rule for CXU (rule 51, AdminRule)
iugpon-generic: sets generic rule for IU-GPON
iuuplink-generic: sets generic rule for IU-UPLINK
iuuplink-admin: sets admin access rule for IU-UPLINK.
25.3
Setting of the Tagging Mode
Only for IU_GPON card set this parameter to specify if the rule expects double or single tags.
240 Id:0900d80580204604
Operation Manual CLI Rules tagging { single | double }
Command
prio <0-7>
Mode
Rule
Function
Sets tagging mode of a rule.
single: single tagged traffic
double: double tagged traffic
25.4
Setting of Priority
To configure the priority of rule, use the following command. If multiple rules match the same packets, the rule with the higher priority will be processed first.
Command Mode
Rule
Function
Configure the priority for the new rule,
0 - 7: enter a priority value (default is 0).
25.5
Configuring of Matches and Actions
25.5.1
Matches
Configure the policy to adjust what properties should be analyzed within incoming packets. Some rule types support combinations of two or more rule matches. Such rules only match, if all of their matches are true.
Command
iu-slot { SLOT I any }
match { exact I exclude }
match port { PORT I cpu I any }
match ingress slot { PORT I any I default }
match ingress port { PORT I any I default }
match ingress uport-map { BITMASK I any I default }
match egress uport { USERPORT I any }
Mode
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Function
Configures IU physical slot number:
SLOT: enter slot number
any: revokes this configuration
Configures the granulation of match action:
exact (default): matches exactly the given value(s)
exclude: matches all values except given value(s). (This command is optional because hiX 5750 R2.0 only supports match exact
and uses this as default).
Matches a CXU (uplink or CXU) or IU (subscriber) port:
PORT: enter the CXU or IU port number.
cpu: CXU port
any: revoke the PORT classifier.
Matches one IU slot number.
PORT: enter logical IU slot number
any: revoke the PORT classifier default: set all IU slots to default (=upstream).
Matches one CXU uplink port.
PORT: enter the uplink port number any: match any uplink port (ignore) default: set all IU slots to default (=upstream).
Matches user-port bit mask.
BITMASK: bitmask value (max 32 bits)
any: revoke the PORT classifier
default: set all IU slots to default (=upstream).
Matches the BCMX user port.
USERPORT: user port number
any: revoke this number.
Id:0900d80580204604 241
Rules Operation Manual CLI
Command
match vlan { VLAN I any } [ MASK ]
match inner-vlan { VLAN I any } [ MASK ]
match dscp { DSCP I any }
match cos { <0-7> I any }
match inner-cos { <0-7> | any }
match tos { <0-255> I any }
match ip-prec { <0-7> I any }
match mac { XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX I { XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX/M I any} { XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX I { XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX/M I any }
match ethtype { TYPE-NUM I arp I ip I ppp-disc I ppp-sess I any }
match flow { upstream I downstream I bidirectional I default I any }
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any }
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } icmp
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } icmp <0-255>
Mode
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Function
Matches a VLAN.
VLAN: enter a VLAN number.
any: revoke the VLAN classifier
MASK: VLAN mask.
Matches an inner VLAN.
VLAN: enter a VLAN number.
any: revoke the VLAN classifier
MASK: VLAN mask.
Matches a DSCP value.
DSCP: enter a DSCP value (0 to 63)
any: revoke the DSCP classifier.
Matches the IEEE 802.1p priority.
0 - 7: enter a .1priority value.
any: revoke the 1priority classifier.
Classifies a rule, matches the inner tag IEEE 801 .1p priority.
0 - 7: enter a .1priority value.
any: revoke the 1priority classifier
Matches a rule.
value.
any: revoke the TOS classifier.
Matches a rule (IP TOS precedence).
0 - 7: enter IP TOS precedence value.
any: revoke the IP TOS classifier
Matches layer2 address.
source/destination MAC address, source/destination MAC address with mask
any: revoke the destination MAC address classifier.
Matches the Ethernet type.
TYPE-NUM: Ethernet type field (hex, e.g., 0800 for IPv4)
arp: address resolution protocol
ip: IP protocol
ppp-disc: PPPoE discovery
ppp-sess: PPPoE session
any: revoke the Ethernet classifier.
Matches the packet flow direction.
upstream: only upstream packets
downstream: only downstream packets
bidirectional: upstream and downstream packets
default: set all IU slots to default (=upstream)
any: revoke packet flow direction classifier.
Matches the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask
any: revoke the destination IP protocol classifier .
Matches the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask
any source/destination IP address
any: revoke the destination IP protocol classifier.
Configures the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask any source/destination IP address
0 - 255: ICMP message type number
any: revoke the destination Ip address classifier.
242 Id:0900d80580204604
Operation Manual CLI
Command
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } icmp <0-255> <0-255>
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { tcp I udp }
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { tcp I udp} {<0-65535> I any } { <0-65535> I any }
match ip { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any} { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M I any } { igmp I pim I <0-255> I any }
Mode
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Function
Configures the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask any source/destination IP address
0 - 255: ICMP message type number
0 - 255: ICMP message code number
any: revoke the destination IP address classifier.
Configures the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask any source/destination IP address
tcp:
any: revoke the destination IP address classifier.
Configures the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask any source/destination IP address
tcp: TCP
udp: UDP
0 - 65535: TCP/UDP source/destination port number
any: revoke the destination port classifier.
Configures the IP protocol.
source/destination IP address, source/destination IP address with mask any source/destination IP address
pim:
0 - 255: IP protocol number
any: revoke the IP protocol classifier.
Rules
25.5.2
Actions
Configure the policy to adjust how to modify properties of transmitted packets. Use the
no parameter with the command to delete the specified action.
Configuring of Match Actions action deny no action deny
action { allow I permit }
no action { allow I permit }
Command
action redirect { UPORT I cpu }
no action redirect action mirror
no action mirror
action dscp DSCP
no action dscp
Mode
Rule Rule action: deny access
Function
Rule Rule action: permit access
Rule
Rule
Redirects to specified egress port.
PORT: port number (e.g. 1/1)
cpu: CXU port.
Sends a copy to mirror monitoring port.
Rule Changes DiffServ field.
: DSCP value (0 to 63).
Id:0900d80580204604 243
Rules Operation Manual CLI
action cos <0-7>
Command
action cos <0-7> overwrite
action cos same-as-tos overwrite
no action cos
action ip-prec <0-7>
no action ip-prec action ip-precsame-as-cos
action bandwidth BANDWIDTH
no action bandwidth
action vlan <1-4094>
no action vlan
action copy-to-cpu
no action copy-to-cpu
action counter no action counter action untag no action untag
Rule
Rule
Configuring of No-Match Actions
Mode
Rule
Rule
Function
Changes 802.1p class of service.
0 - 7: enter
Overwrites 802.1p COS field in the packet.
Changes 802.1p class of service.
same-as-tos: same as IP ToS precedence bits
overwrite: overwrites 802.1p COS field in the packet.
Deletes changes of 802.1p class of service.
Changes ToS precedence bits in the packet.
0 - 7:ToS precedence value.
Rule
Rule
Changes P ToS precedence bits in the packet, same as
802.1p CoS value.
Determines maximum allowed bandwidth.
BANDWIDTH: value in Mbps.
Rule
Rule
Specifies matched-packet VLAN-ID.
1 - 4094: VLAN-ID value.
Copies to CXU.
Rule action: counter.
Rule action: untag.
Command no-action deny no no-action deny
no-action { allow I permit }
no no-action { allow I permit }
no-action redirect { PORT I cpu }
no no-action redirect no-action mirror no no-action mirror
no-action dscp <0-63>
no no-action dscp
no-action cos <0-7>
no-action cos <0-7> overwrite
no-action cos same-as-tos-overwrite no no-action cos
no-action ip-prec <0-7>
no-action ip-precsame-as-cos no no-action ip-prec
Mode
Rule No deny access
Rule No permit access
Function
Rule No redirect to specified egress port.
Rule No sending a copy to mirror monitoring port.
Rule No change of Changes DiffServ field.
Rule No changes of 802.1p class of service.
Rule No change of IP ToS precedence bits in the packet.
244 Id:0900d80580204604
Operation Manual CLI Rules
Command
no-action bandwidth BANDWITH
no no-action bandwidth
no-action vlan <1-4094>
no no-action vlan no-action copy-to-cpu no no-action copy-to-cpu no-action counter no no-action counter no-action untag no no-action untag
Mode
Rule
Function
No maximum allowed bandwidth
Rule No specifying of matched-packet VLAN-ID.
Rule No copy to CPU
Rule No rule action: counter
Rule No rule action: untag
Configuring of Action Parameters
Use the following commands to specify the action parameters.
action-param vlan VLAN
Command
action-param cos <0-7>
action-param tos <0-7>
action-param dscp <0-63>
Mode
Rule
Rule
Rule
Rule
Function
Changes VLAN parameter.
VLAN: VLAN-ID.
Changes class of service (IEEE 802.1p priority).
0 - 7: .1p priority value.
Changes IP ToS precedence bits in the packet.
0 - 7: ToS value.
Changes DiffServ.
0 - 63: DiffServ value.
Example of Rule
A rule should be created that matches VLAN ID 100 (in downstream direction) and sets the .1p priority of VLAN tag (CoS value) to 4:
SWITCH(config)#rule Testrule1 create
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#type cxu-generic
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#prio 2
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#match vlan 100
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#action cos
4 overwrite
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#match flow downstream
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#apply
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#show rule-profile rule Testrule1 type cxu-generic (Generic CXU rule) prio 2 match vlan 100 match flow downstream action cos 4 overwrite
SWITCH(config-rule[Testrule1])#
Id:0900d80580204604 245
Rules
apply
Operation Manual CLI
25.6
Saving a Rule
After configuring a rule, it must be applied to the GPON. Configured values will be checked and the rule will be activated within the system.
g
Without using the apply command, the rule configurations will be lost.
Command Mode
Rule
Function
Saves rule and applies it to the GPON. g
Note the following information:
• The system performs a detailed plausibility check and rejects the rule if the configuration is incomplete, contains bad or unsupported values, or conflicts to other rules. In this case, the system informs about the reason and the operator may correct the values.
• It can be that the entered name interferes with the name of an internally managed rule (name will not be listed by command show rule). In this case the system rejects a rule with the message:
A rule having the same NAME already exists
Select another name for this rule (e.g. add a prefix).
• All previously entered values remain valid after successful (or unsuccessful) execution of command apply. If several rules being different only in one value should be created then only the one changed value needs to be entered again.
25.7
Displaying the Rules Configuration
The following commands can be used to show a certain rule by its name, all rules of a certain type, or all rules at once sorted by rule type.
show rule show rule all show rule cxu show help show rule-profile
Command
show rule name NAME
show rule type { cxu-generic I cxu-admin I iugpon-generic I iugpon-admin }
Mode Function
Rule/
Privileged/
Config
Displays all rules sorted by type.
Displays all rules sorted by type (alias to show rule)
Displays all active user rules and admin rules at CXU in a condensed format.
Rule/
Privileged/
Config
Displays a rule, enter a rule name.
Rule/
Privileged/
Config
Displays rules of certain type.
cxu-generic: generic rules for CXU (rule 50)
cxu admin: admin access rules for CXU (rule 51)
iugpon-generic: generic rules for IU_GPON
iugpon-admin: admin access rules for IU_GPON.
Rule
Rule
Displays help information of current rule context.
Displays the profile currently being edited.
An example for using the show rule command:
SWITCH(config)#show rule
-----------------------------------------------------------
RULE TYPE 04: QosVlan (vlan-cos)
-----------------------------------------------------------
246 Id:0900d80580204604
Operation Manual CLI
Prio : 2,
Name: "Testrule1"
Match: exact vlan=100,
Action: Change inner .1p PRIO (set-iprio) cos=4
SWITCH(config)#
25.8
Deleting a Rule
To cancel an existing rule and remove it from the system, use one of the following commands.
no rule [ NAME ]
Command
no rule-type { cxu-generic I cxu-admin I iugpon-generic I iugpon-admin }
Mode
Config
Config
Function
Deletes all or specified rule,
NAME: enter the rule name.
Deletes all rules of a certain type.
cxu-generic: generic rules for CXU (rule 50, GenericRule)
cxu-admin: admin access rules for CXU (rule 51, AdminRule)
iugpon-generic: generic rules for IU_GPON
iugpon-admin: admin access rules for IU_GPON.
An example for deleting a rule:
SWITCH(config)#no rule
1 rule(s) successfully deleted
SWITCH(config)# show rule
No rules configured.
SWITCH(config
)#
Rules
Id:0900d80580204604 247
Broadcast Storm Control Operation Manual CLI
26 Broadcast Storm Control
The hiX 5750 R2.0 system supports
. A broadcast storm is the result of an overloading situation in which broadcast packets occupy the major part of network’s bandwidth causing an unstable network. Such a broadcast storm may be occurred by hardware malfunctions or a wrong network configuration at which, for example, information of a routing protocol, regularly transmitted from the router, are wrong recognized by a system that does not support this protocol. BCSC operates with counting the broadcast packets per second and discarding packets which exceed the configured limit.
Besides BCSC, the system can also control of
or DLF (destination lookup fail)
storms. The storm control configuration will be equally applied to all
To enable/disable storm control or to check its state, use the following commands.
Common
storm-control { broadcast | multicast | dlf } RATE PORTS
no storm-control { broadcast | multicast | dlf } PORTS
show storm-control [ PORT ]
Mode
Bridge
Exec/
Config/
Bridge
Function
Enables broadcast, MC, or DLF storm control respectively in a port with a user defined rate.
RATE: values from the range (unit packet/s):
-
-
: 1 - 2097150
PORTS: port number.
Disables specified storm control.
Displays a configuration of storm control,
PORT: port number.
g
By default, DLF storm control is enabled and MC storm control is disabled.
248 Id:0900d80580201c9b
Operation Manual CLI IRL - Input Rate Limitation
27 IRL - Input Rate Limitation
Input rate limiting (IRL) can be used to control the amount of incoming traffic at the subscriber’s side. Many subscribers may share the same resources of the system and the network. IRL provides mechanisms to manage maximum and committed values of bandwidth (kbit/sec) and burst size (bytes).
IRL bases on profiles which are a kind of traffic policy. Each IRL profile determines a set of four values. The profile name must be unique.
Value
cir (committed information rate) kbps pir (peak information rate) cbs (committed burst size) pbs (peak burst size) kbps bytes bytes
Unit
0-16000
0-16000
96-10000
96-15000
range
Table 26
IRL Values
A profile can be used to map one or more subscriber ports to it in order to activate IRL for these ports. Such ports can reside on the same or on different interface units (IUs).
One profile can be referenced by any number of ports at the same time.
Id:0900d80580202c91 249
Operation Manual CLI IRL - Input Rate Limitation
27.1
Creating a IRL Profile
Commands
irl create profile PROFILENAME
Mode
Config
Function
Creates a new IRL profile.
PROFILENAME: enter a profile name.
Example of creating an IRL profile:
SWITCH(config)#irl create profileProfile_001
SWITCH(config)# irl set profile cir 1000
SWITCH(config)# irl set profile cbs 7500
SWITCH(config)# irl set profile pir 1000
SWITCH(config)# irl set profile pbs 10000
SWITCH(config)# irl apply profile
SWITCH(config)#show irl profile info Profile_001
------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-----------------------
CIR | CBS | PIR | PBS | SNMP- | Profile Name
(kbps)|(bytes)| (kbps)|(bytes)| index |
------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-----------------------
1000 | 7500 | 1000 | 10000 | 1 | Profile_001
SWITCH(config)#
27.2
Modifying of IRL Profiles
Commands
irl modify profile PROFILENAME
irl set profile { cir I cbs I pir I pbs } VALUE
Mode
Config
Config
Function
Modifies an existing IRL profile.
PROFILENAME: enter the profile name.
Sets IRL profile data, enter the profile name.
cir: committed information rate <0-16000>
cbs; committed burst size <96-10000>
pir: peak information rate <0-16000>
pbs: peak burst size <96-15000>
VALUE: enter the value.
g
The order of irl set profile commands is arbitrary. Modifying of a profile is possible as long as irl apply command is not executed.
irl apply profile
27.3
Saving a IRL Profile
A created or modified profile must be saved and applied to the system with the following command.
Commands Mode
Config
Function
Saves profile configuration.
g
If the IRL profile is not saved, all made settings will be lost.
Notes:
manages up to 200 different profiles at the same time.
2. The name must be different. Otherwise the NE rejects the new profile or the modification.
250 Id:0900d80580202c91
Operation Manual CLI IRL - Input Rate Limitation
3. The NE keeps the values of the last created or modified profile in a temporary memory. These values can be reused to create further profiles which only differ in e.g. the “cbs” value. That means, it is not necessary always to enter all four values if they are the same like in the previously created or modified profile.
27.4
Deleting a IRL Profile
Commands
irl delete profilePROFILENAME
Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Deletes an existing IRL profile.
PROFILENAME: enter the profile name.
g
A currently used profile cannot be deleted. If this profile is referenced by one or more ports, the show irl ifmap profile command can be used to get a list of all ports which are mapped to it.
27.5
Mapping a Subscriber Port to IRL Profile
The mapping of a dedicated port to an existing IRL profile actives the input rate limiting for this port.
In order to map an IRL profile, use the following command.
Commands
irl create ifmap PORT PROFILNAME
Mode
Config
Function
Creates a new IRL port.
PORT: subscriber port number
PROFILENAME: enter profile name.
g
The port must be already exists and should be a subscriber port. The
rejects notcreated ports and ports which have a wrong type. However, offline configuration is of course possible (e.g. if the concerned IU is currently not plugged-in).
An example for creating IRL interface map.
SWITCH(config)#irl create ifmap1/1/1 Profile_001
SWITCH(config)#irl create ifmap1/4/1 Profile_001
SWITCH(config)#irl create ifmap2/2/1 Profile_003
SWITCH(config)#irl create ifmap2/4/1 Profile_003
SWITCH(config)#
The mapping can be deleted in order to stop IRL
Commands
irl delete ifmap PORT
Mode
Config
Function
Deletes an existing port from IRL profile.
PORT: subscriber port name.
Notes:
1. The irl create ifmap command and the irl delete ifmap command are processed immediately. Afterwards, there is no need to execute the irl apply command.
2. One and the same IRL profile can be used for any number of ports residing on the same or different IUs
3. When an IRL profile is referenced the first time, it will be automatically loaded from
CXU to that IU which owns the mapped port. It will be automatically unloaded if the
Id:0900d80580202c91 251
IRL - Input Rate Limitation Operation Manual CLI last port of this IU, that is mapped to this profile, is being unmapped. That means, unused (not referenced) profiles are not loaded on a IU in order to save profile memory on IUs.
4. This restriction (10 different profiles per IU) means that all IRL ports of one IU can be mapped to at most 10 different profiles. The NE rejects a port mapping command
(irl create ifmap) for a further profile. In this case, an existing profile that fulfills the requirements as nearest as possible should be loaded.
5. The NE automatically deletes the port mapping if the concerned port is deleted and unloads the profile.
Commands show irl profile info
show irl profile info PROFILENAME
show irl ifmap port PORT
show irl profile editor
show irl ifmap slot SLOT
show irl ifmap
27.6
Checking the IRL Configuration
The system provides several ways to display IRL profiles, IRL port mapping, or both together.
To check an IRL profile and/or port mapping, use the following commands.
show irl ifmap profile PROFILENAME
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays profile information of all existing profiles regardless used or unused.
Displays profile values for a specified profile.
PROFILENAME: enter the profile name.
Displays IRL mapping information for a specified port.
PORT: port number.
Displays information of profile being created or modified.
Privileged/
Config
Privileged/
Config
Displays all IRL mapping information for a specified slot together with their profile name.
SLOT: slot number.
Displays all ports of the whole system (all slots), which are currently mapped to any given profile.
PROFILENAME: enter the profile name.
Displays IRL mapping information.
252 Id:0900d80580202c91
Operation Manual CLI SNMP
28 SNMP
An SNMP (simple network management protocol) system consists of three parts: SNMP manager, managed device, and SNMP agent. SNMP is an application-layer protocol that allows the SNMP manager and agent stations to communicate with each other. The
SNMP manager and the agent use an SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) and a relatively small set of commands in order to exchange information. The SNMP MIB is organized in a tree structure with individual variables, such as point status or description, that are represented as leaves on the branches. An object identifier (OID) is used in order to distinguish each variable uniquely in the MIB and in SNMP messages. The
SNMP configuration on the system determines the relationship between SNMP manager and agent. According to the community, different rights can be given - read only, write, or both read and write.The SNMP trap message allows the agent to spontaneously inform the SNMP manager about an important event and to alert the network status. It informs also about an improper user authentication, a reboot, the connection
status (activate or deactivate), and closing of
connection to disconnect the neighboring system.
Following sections describe the SNMP configuration:
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring the Access Policy for Group
•
•
Checking the SNMP Configuration
•
28.1
Configuring an SNMP Community
According to the community, the access rights can be specified. A user is only authorized to access the SNMP agent of the system if a community has been configured for him. That means that the community name is usually the password to perform the identification for the remote SNMP management system. However, it is sent in clear text in the SNMP messages. As long as a community is configured, the NE is accessible full via SNMP v2c.
To configure a community in SNMP, use the following command.
Command
snmp community { ro | rw } COMMUNITY [ A.B.C.D ] [ OID ]
Mode Function
Config Creates a community and sets permission rights to allow authorized users the NE access over SNMP.
ro: read only right to the MIB objects of NE
rw: read-write right to the MIB objects of NE
COMMUNITY: community name
A.B.C.D: SNMP agent’s IP address
OID: only specified OID will be accessible.
Deletes specified community. no snmp community { ro | rw } COMMUNITY g
To access the NE, up to three SNMP communities for both reading right and writing right may be configured in the system.
To check configured communities, use the following command.
Id:0900d8058025b404 253
SNMP Operation Manual CLI
show snmp community
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Displays the communities.
Example:
The following example configures two communities: the first one with the password
“public” and the access policy read/write and the other one as “private” with the access policy “read only”.
SWITCH(config)# snmp community rw public
SWITCH(config)# snmp community ro private
SWITCH(config)# show snmp community
Community List
Community Source OID
----------------------------------------------------community rw public community ro private
SWITCH(config)#
28.2
Configuring the Security of SNMP Community
SNMP v2c authorizes the host to access the SNMP agent identified by both its IP address and the community name. The following command maps the identity of host and the community name to a security name. This mapping is needed to apply some access control settings also to the SNMP v1/v2 request with the specified community.
The host IP address settings allows the SNMP agent to respond only to hosts with specified IP addresses. If the SNMP v1/v2c access support is needed not longer, the corresponding community settings have to be deleted.
Command
snmp com2sec SECURITY-NAME { A.B.C.D I A.B.C.D/M }
COMMUNITY
Mode Function
Config Specifies the mapping from the identity of the host and community name to security name.
SECURITY-NAME: security name
A.B.C.D: host IP address
A.B.C.D/M: host IP network
COMMUNITY: community name.
Deletes the registered security name. no snmp com2sec SECURITY-NAME
To check registered security name, use the following command.
show snmp com2sec
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Displays the registered security name.
An example of configuring com2sec and checking it.
SWITCH(config)# snmp com2sec switch 100.1.1.1 public
SWITCH(config)# show snmp com2sec
Com2Sec List
SecName Source Community
254 Id:0900d8058025b404
SNMP Operation Manual CLI
-----------------------------------------com2sec switch 100.1.1.1 public
SWITCH(config)#
28.3
Configuring the SNMP Agent
The SNMP agent and the MIB, which stores the information on system and network,
. The SNMP agent uses MIB variables to reply on requests from SNMP administrator. The SNMP administrator can obtain data from the SNMP agent and on the other hand he can also save data in the SNMP agent.
Use the following commands to configure the identity of the agent accessing the NE over
SNMP. This configuration is saved in the SNMP configuration file.
Command
snmp agent-address A.B.C.D
no snmp agent-address
snmp location NAME
no snmp location
snmp contact USER
no snmp contact
Mode
Config
Function
Configures the IP address of SNMP agent.
A.B.C.D: IP address.
Deletes IP address SNMP agent.
Configures the location name of SNMP agent.
NAME: location name.
Deletes location of SNMP agent.
Configures name of user which can access the system.
USER: user name.
Deletes the name of accessed user.
Use the following commands to display information of the SNMP agent.
Command show snmp agent-address show snmp location show snmp contact
Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows SNMP agent IP address.
Shows location of SNMP agent.
Shows the name of user with SNMP access.
Example:
SWITCH(config)# snmp contact manager
SWITCH(config)# snmp location ger_gwd
SWITCH(config)#
28.4
Configuring an SNMP Group
An SNMP group is a collection of SNMP users who share the same access permission.
SNMP sets up the authentication strategy for a user and the group in which the user resides. In order to create/delete an group that can access the SNMP agent, use the following commands.
Id:0900d8058025b404 255
SNMP Operation Manual CLI
Command
snmp group GROUP { v1 I v2c I v3 } SECURITY-NAME
Mode
Config
Function
Creates an SNMP group
GROUP: group name
v1, v2c, v3: specify security level according to SNMP version
SECURITY-NAME: security name (this is the name that is created with the com2sec command).
Deletes specified SNMP group. no snmp group GROUP { v1 I v2c I v3 }
With the following command the SNMP groups can be verified.
show snmp group
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Checks the registered group.
28.5
Configuring the SNMP MIB View
Each object of MIB can be accessed by the SNMP manager over its unique ODI. Use the following command in order to create an SNMP view record that allows the SNMP agent, depending on the object identity (OID), to limit the user’s access to MIB objects.
Command
snmp view VIEW { included I excluded} OID [ MASK ]
no snmp view VIEW
Mode
Config
Function
Configures OID which contains/does not contain a sub-tree.
VIEW: MIB view record name
include: includes MIB sub-tree
exclude: excludes MIB sub-tree
OID: OID number
MASK: mask value (e.g. ff or ff.ff ).
Deletes view of the specified name.
The following command displays the configured SNMP views.
show snmp view
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Shows configured view.
Function
Example:
SWITCH(config)# show snmp view
View List
ViewName Type SubTree Mask
-------------------------------------------
SWITCH(config)#
28.6
Configuring the Access Policy for Group
To grant an SNMP group to access specific SNMP MIB view records, use the following command. SNMP v1/ v2c uses a community name for authentication without encryption.
256 Id:0900d8058025b404
Operation Manual CLI SNMP
Command
snmp access GROUP { v1 I v2c } { READ-VIEW I WRITE-VIEW I
NOTIFY-VIEW }
Mode
Config
no snmp access GROUP
Function
Configures MIB view to permit for appropriate group in
SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c.
GROUP: group name
v1, v2c: set the security level according to SNMP version
READ-VIEW: set a read access view
WRITE-VIEW: set a write access view
NOTIFY-VIEW: set a notify access view.
Deletes the granted access of specified SNMP group to
SNMP view records.
Use the following command to verify the permission of groups.
show snmp access
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows the granted access of SNMP group to a specific
SNMP view record.
28.7
Configuring an SNMP Trap Host
An SNMP trap is a change-of-state message initiated by the SNMP agent. It alerts or notifies the SNMP manager about certain problems or important events of the SNMP agent. If SNMP trap was configured, the system transmits pertinent information to the network management program that is running on the so called trap-host.
g
The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports the configuration of up to 16 SNMP trap-hosts.
28.7.1
SNMP-V1/V2 Trap-Host
In order to configure a trap host receiving SNMP v1/v2c traps, use the following commands. The IP address of trap-host is always required. For example, if the SNMP manager is trap host then enter the IP address of SNMP manager.
Command
snmp trap-host A.B.C.D [ COMMUNITY ]
no snmp trap-host A.B.C.D
snmp trap2-host A.B.C.D [ COMMUNITY ]
no snmp trap2-host A.B.C.D
snmp inform-trap-host A.B.C.D [ COMMUNITY ]
no snmp inform-trap-host A.B.C.D
Mode
Config
Config
Config
Function
Configures SNMP v1 trap host.
A.B.C.D: host IP address
COMMUNITY: community name.
Deletes configured SNMP v1 trap host.
Configures SNMP v2 trap host.
Deletes configured SNMP v 2 trap host.
Configures SNMP inform trap host.
Deletes configured inform trap host.
Example:
An example of configuring the IP addresses 10.1.1.3, 20.1.1.5, and 30.1.1.2 as SNMP trap-host.
SWITCH(config)# snmp trap-host 10.1.1.3
SWITCH(config)# snmp trap-host 20.1.1.5
SWITCH(config)# snmp trap-host 30.1.1.2
SWITCH(config)#
Id:0900d8058025b404 257
SNMP
An example of checking the above trap-host configuration.
SWITCH(config)#
show snmp trap
Trap-Host List
HostCommunity
------------------------------------------trap-host 30.1.1.2
trap-host 20.1.1.5
trap-host 10.1.1.3
trap-host 210.0.0.100
SWITCH(config)#
show snmp trap
28.7.2
Displaying the SNMP Trap Configuration
To show SNMP trap configuration, use the following command.
Command Mode
Privileged/
Config
Function
Shows SNMP trap configuration.
Operation Manual CLI
28.7.3
Displaying and Resetting the SNMP Trap Counter
Use the following commands to get information about number of counted traps.
Command snmp trap-counter reset show snmp trap-counter
Mode
Config
Privileged/
Config
Function
Reset the SNMP trap counter.
Shows the SNMP trap counter.
Example:
SWITCH(config)# show snmp trap-counter snmp trap-counter 4662
SWITCH(config)# snmp trap-counter reset
SWITCH(config)# show snmp trap-counter snmp trap-counter 1
SWITCH(config)#
show snmp
28.8
Checking the SNMP Configuration
To check
configuration, use the following command.
Command Mode Function
Privileged/
Config
Shows the configuration of the switch.
28.9
Disable SNMP
SNMP is enabled by default. To disable SNMP on the system, use the following command.
258 Id:0900d8058025b404
Operation Manual CLI
no snmp
SNMP
!
Command Mode
Config Disables SNMP.
Function
Using the above command, all configurations concerned with SNMP will be deleted.
Id:0900d8058025b404 259
System Logger (Syslog) Operation Manual CLI
29 System Logger (Syslog)
Syslog is a logging feature that gives administrators a way to centrally log and analyze configuration events and system error messages. This chapter describes the syslog configuration divided into the following sections:
•
Configuring the Syslog Output Level
•
•
Setting the local Facility Code
•
Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File
•
Checking the Syslog Configuration
•
Enabling/Disabling of Syslog Function
.
29.1
Configuring the Syslog Output Level
The syslog function allows the
to generate event notifications which can be forwarded to different event message collectors such as the console, the system memory, or a remote syslog server. The system logs errors depending on its importance with different severity levels. The highest level is “emergency” and the lowest one is
“informational”. Only messages with an severity of at least the configured level and higher will be forwarded to the specified output, all other will be suppressed. That means, the “informational” level must be configured in order to receive all messages on the management system at last. It is possible, to configure the syslog output level with or without reference to the subsystem that generates the message.
29.1.1
Syslog Output Level without a Priority
Use the following commands, to configure the severity levels of syslog messages and to determine its output redirection. The output takes place regardless of a priority which part of system has generated the message.
Command
syslog output { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info | debug } local { volatile | non-volatile }
syslog output { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info | debug } remote A.B.C.D
syslog output { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info | debug } console
Mode Function
Config Transmits syslog message of configured level to specified output.
Severity levels:
emerg: emergency(0)
alert: alert(1) or more serious
crit: critical(2) or more serious
err: error(3) or more serious
warning: warning(4) or more serious
notice: notice(5) or more serious
info: informational(6) or more serious
debug: debug(7) or more serious
System logger output redirection:
Local output file (system memory), see also 29.4 Verifying and
Clearing the local Syslog File
volatile: deletes a syslog message after restart
non-volatile: reserves a syslog message
A.B.C.D: remote log host IP address
Use the no parameter with this command to disable specified syslog output.
An example of configuring syslog to send all logs higher than “notice” to the remote log host IP address 10.1.1.1:
SWITCH(config)#syslog output notice remote 10.1.1.1
SWITCH(config)#
260 Id:0900d805802217ed
Operation Manual CLI System Logger (Syslog)
29.1.2
Syslog Output Level with a Priority
Use the following commands, to configure syslog messages depending on severity level, output redirection, and prioritized facility type generating the message.
Command Mode Function
syslog output priority
{ auth | authpriv | cron | daemon | kern | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 | lpr | mail | news | syslog | user | uucp } { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info } local
{ volatile | non-volatile }
syslog output priority
{ auth | authpriv | cron | daemon | kern | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 | lpr | mail | news | syslog | user | uucp } { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info } remote
A.B.C.D
syslog output priority
{ auth | authpriv | cron | daemon | kern | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 | lpr | mail | news | syslog | user | uucp } { emerg | alert | crit | err | warning | notice | info } console
Config Transmits syslog message of configured level to specified output with chosen priority.
Facility types:
auth: security/authorization message
authpriv: security/authorization message
cron: clock daemon
daemon: system daemons without separate facility value
kern: kernel messages
local1... local7: reserved for local use, see also 29.3 Setting the local Facility Code
lpr: line printer subsystem
mail: mail subsystem
news: USENET news subsystem
syslog: messages generated internally by syslog
user: generic user-level messages
uucp: UUCP subsystem
Severity levels:
emerg: emergency(0)
alert: alert(1) or more serious
crit: critical(2) or more serious
err: error(3) or more serious
warning: warning(4) or more serious
notice: notice(5) or more serious
info: informational(6) or more serious
System logger output redirection:
Local output file (system memory):
volatile: deletes a syslog message after restart
non-volatile: reserves a syslog message
A.B.C.D: remote log host IP address
Use the no parameter with this command to disable specified syslog output.
29.2
Binding an IP Address
Use the following command, to specify an IP address that is attached to the syslog message for its identity.
Command
syslog bind-address A.B.C.D
no syslog bind-address
Mode Function
Config Specifies IP address for a syslog message identity.
A.B.C.D: IP address.
Deletes a specified binding IP address.
29.3
Setting the local Facility Code
Setting a facility code makes a generated syslog message distinguished from others, so that a network administrator can efficiently handle various syslog messages.
To set a facility code, use the following command.
Id:0900d805802217ed 261
System Logger (Syslog) Operation Manual CLI
Command
syslog local-code <0-7>
no syslog local-code
Mode Function
Config Sets local facility code for system use.
0 - 7: from 0 (LOG_LOCAL0) to 7(LOG_LOCAL7).
Deletes a specified facility code.
29.4
Verifying and Clearing the local Syslog File
To check and delete the messages that are saved in the system memory, use the following commands.
Command
show syslog local volatile [ NUM ]
clear syslog local volatile
Mode
Exec/
Config
Function
Shows a received syslog message.
volatile: memory to remove a syslog message after restart
NUM: latest lines number.
Config Deletes received syslog message from the system memory,
volatile: deletes memory to remove a syslog message after restart.
show syslog
29.5
Checking the Syslog Configuration
Use the following command to verify the syslog configuration.
g
The syslog configuration cannot be checked by using a show running-config command.
Command Mode
Exec/ config
Function
Shows a configuration of the syslog.
The following example shows a configuration that an emergency message sends to the console and all messages of level info and higher saves in the volatile file.
SWITCH(config)#show syslog info local volatile emerg console
SWITCH(config)#
syslog start no syslog
29.6
Enabling/Disabling of Syslog Function
g
It is important that syslog is always running on the system. Therefore, syslog is enabled after the system start/reboot by default. Executing the syslog start command is only necessary when the function was manually disabled.
Use the following commands to enable/disable the syslog function.
Command Function Mode
Config Enables the syslog.
Disables the syslog.
262 Id:0900d805802217ed
Operation Manual CLI Remote Monitoring
30 Remote Monitoring
Remote monitoring (RMON) is a function to observe the communication status of con-
nected Ethernet devices. While
can advertise only information about devices mounted via SNMP agent, RMON allows exchanging network monitoring data for devices overall segments. For Ethernet interfaces, RMON gathers cumulative statistics and tracks a history of statistics. The RMON standard defines objects that are suitable for an effectively management of Ethernet networks.
Because RMON processes lots of data, take care to prevent performance degradation caused by RMON. The hiX 5750 R2.0 supports the following RMON groups, as described in RFC 1757:
• Group 1: statistics (only for uplink ports)
• Group 2: history.
30.1
Configures Number of RMON History
RMON history is periodical sample inquiry of statistical data about each traffic occurred in Ethernet port. All ports are pre-configured, to monitor statistical data in an interval of
30-minute and to archive 50 statistical data. It is also possible to change the time interval taking the sample and the number of samples that should be saved.
The default configuration of history is displayed as result of the following command:
SWITCH(config)#show rmon-history config 1
RMON History configuration:
=========================== history index : 1 data source : 0/1 (1) buckets requested : 50 buckets granted : 50 interval time (s) : 1800 owner : none status : under create
SWITCH(config)#
To configure RMON history, enter into History configuration mode first. The system prompt changes from SWITCH(config)# to SWITCH(config-rmonhistory[n])#.
The variable “n” is the number to be configured to distinguish each different history.
Command
rmon-history <1-65535>
Mode
Config
Function
Configures a number to distinguish RMON History, enter the index number.
Example of entering into History configuration mode to configure history 5.
SWITCH(config)#
rmon-history 5
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#
30.2
Assigning Source Port of statistical Data
To investigate statistical data from a specified port as sample inquiry, a source port has to be assigned by using the following command.
Id:0900d8058024f4b8 263
Remote Monitoring Operation Manual CLI
Command
data-source PORT
Mode Function
RMON Assigns a source port of statistical CXU uplink port.
PORT: uplink port number (ex. slot/port for uplink port, slot/port/vcc for data port)
Example of assigning CXU uplink port 1 as source port.
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#data-source 9/1
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#
30.3
Identifying Subject of RMON History
To identify subject using the history, enter the following command.
Command
owner NAME
Mode Function
RMON Configures History and identifies subject using related data, enter the name (max. 127 characters).
Example of configuring a subject of history as “nokia”.
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#owner nokia
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#
30.4
Configuring Number of Sample Data
Configure the number of sample data in RMON history.
Command
requested-buckets <1-65535>
Mode Function
RMON Defines the bucket count for the interval, enter the number of buckets.
g
The max. number of granted buckets is 100.
Example of configuring the number of sample data as 25 in history.
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#requested-buckets 25
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#
30.5
Configuring Interval of Sample Inquiry
Command
interval <1-3600>
Mode Function
RMON Defines the time interval for the history (in seconds), enter the value.
g
The interval will be rounded up to a multiple of 30 seconds.
Example of configuring the interval of sample inquiry as 60 seconds.
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#interval 60
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#
264 Id:0900d8058024f4b8
Operation Manual CLI Remote Monitoring
30.6
Activating the RMON History
Finishing all configuration steps above, the RMON history must be activeded using the following command.
active
Command Mode
RMON Activates RMON history.
Function
g
Before activating RMON history, check if the configuration is correct. The configuration of an activated RMON history cannot be changed. If the configuration needs to be changed, delete the RMON history and configure it again.
30.7
Displaying RMON History
Command
show rmon-history config [ <1-65535> ]
Mode Function
Privileged/
Rmon/Config
Shows the configuration of RMON history of specified number.
1 - 65535: value for specifying.
Example of activating RMON history and viewing the configuration.
SWITCH(config-rmonhistory [5])#active
SWITCH(config)#show rmon-history config 5
--------------------------------------------------------------history | data source | interval| buckets | status| owner
---------------------------------------------------------------
5 | 9/1 | 60 s | 25/25 | valid | nokia
SWITCH(config)#
To show RMON ether history table, use the following command.
Command
show rmon-history ether-history <1-65535> [ 1-100 ]
Note: always the last n values will be displayed but no more than the number of the granted buckets.
Mode
Config
Function
Shows the ether history entries (sampling values).
1 - 65535: enter the history index for history table
1 - 100: enter the number of samples should be displayed.
30.8
Deleting the RMON History
To change the history configuration, delete the history and then configure it again.
Command
no rmon-history <1-65535>
Mode
Config
Function
Deletes RMON history of specified number,
1 - 65535: enter the history index for deleting.
Example of deleting RMON history 5.
SWITCH(config)#no rmon-history 5
SWITCH(config)#
Id:0900d8058024f4b8 265
Abbreviations
31 Abbreviations
ACI
AccessIntegrator
ACI-E
AccessIntegrator Ethernet
ACL
Access Control List
ADSL
Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
AMI
Alternative Mark Inversion
ANI
Access Node Interface (PON Interface)
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APC
Angled Polished Connector
APS
Application Program Software
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
AS
Autonomous System
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AWG
American Wire Gauge
B8ZS
Binary eight Zero Substitution
BCSC
Broadcast Storm Control
BER
Bit Error Rate
BGP
Border Gateway Protocol
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
CAC
Connection Admission Control
CAS
Channel Associated Signaling
CATV
(1) Community Antenna Television
(2) Cable Television
CE
Conformité Européenne
CES
Circuit Emulation Service
CFR
Code Failure Rate
266 Id:0900d80580240c85
Operation Manual CLI
Operation Manual CLI
CLI
Command Line Interface
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
CMOS
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CNN
Composite Network Node
CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture
CoS
Class of Service
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CTP
Connection Termination Point
CXU
Central Switch Fabric Unit
DA
Destination Address
DBA
Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation
DBMS
Database Management System
DC
Direct Current
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DFB
Distributed Feedback (Laser)
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIN
Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Standard)
DNS
Domain Name System
DR
Designated Router
DS
Downstream
DS0
Digital Signal 0 (64 kbps)
DS1
First Level TDM hierarchy / Digital Signal 1 (1.544 kbps)
DSCP
DiffServe Code Point
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM
DSL Access Multiplexer
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E1
Europe - First level of TDM hierarchy (2.048 kbps)
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EM
Element Manager
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
(1) Electromagnetic Interference
(2) External Machine Interface
Id:0900d80580240c85
Abbreviations
267
Abbreviations
EMS
Element Management System
EN
European Norm
ESD
Electro Static Discharge
ESF
Extended Service Frame
E-SFU
Ethernet Single-Family Unit
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FP
Febry Perot
FSAN
Full Service Access Network
FTP
File Transfer Protocol (TFTP = Trivial FTP)
FTTP
Fiber to the Premises
GAL
GEM Adaption Layer
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GEM
GPON Encapsulation Method
GPON
Gigabit Passive Optical Network
GR
Generic Requirements
GTC
GPON Transmission and Convergence
HOL
Head of Line Blocking
I2C
Inter Integrated Circuit
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
ID
Identifier
IEC
International Electronical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
Internet Ingeneering Task Force
IF
Interface
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IP
Internet Protocol
IP-DSLAM
IP Digital Subscriber Line Multiplexer
IPoA
IP over ATM
IPoE
IP over Ethernet
IPTV
Internet Protocol Television
268 Id:0900d80580240c85
Operation Manual CLI
Operation Manual CLI Abbreviations
IRL
Input Rate Limiting
IS
Intermediate System
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Organization for Standardisation
ISP
Internet Service Provider
IST
Internal Spanning-Tree
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardisation Sector
IU
Interface Unit
IU_GPON
Interface Unit with GPON Interfaces
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG
Link Aggregation Group
LAN
Local Area Network
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
LOF
Loss of Frame
LOS
Loss of Signal
LRE
Long Reach Ethernet
LSA
Link State Advertisments
LSP
Link State Packet
MAC
Medium Access Control
MAN
Metro Area Network
MC
Multicast
MDU
Multi Dwelling Unit
MGC
Multi Gateway Controller
MIB
Management Information Base
MSTP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTU
Multi Tenant Unit
NBMA
nonbroadcast Multi-access
NE
Network Element
NEBS
Network Equipment Business Systems
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
Network to Network Interface
Id:0900d80580240c85 269
Abbreviations
NTR
Network Timing Reference
ODN
Optical Distribution Network
OLT
Optical Line Termination
OMCI
ONU Management and Control Interface
ONT
Optical Network Terminal
ONU
Optical Network Unit
OS
Operating System
OSPF
Open shortest Path first
PC
(1) Physical Contact
(2) Personel Computer
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PID
Product Identification Data
PIM
Protocol Independent Multicast
PIM-DM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIM-SSM
Protocol Independent Multicast - Source Specific Multicast
PLL
Phase Lock Loop
PLOAM
Physical Layer Operation Administration
PM
(1) Power Module
(2) Performance Monitoring
PON
Optical Passive Network
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PPPoE
Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPTP
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
PSD
Power Spectral Density
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient
PVC
Permanent Virtual Connection
PVID
Port VLAN Identifier
QoS
Quality of Service
RF
Radio Frequency
RGW
Residential Gateway
Operation Manual CLI
270 Id:0900d80580240c85
Operation Manual CLI
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RMON
Remote Monitoring
RP
Rendezvous Point
RSTP
Rapid Spanning-Tree Protocol
RTCP
Realtime Control Protocol
RTP
Rapid Transport Protocol
R-VLAN
Routing VLAN
SAPS
System Application Program Software
SBU
Single Business Unit
SC
Spherical Contact
SFP
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SFU
Single-Family Unit
SGMII
Serial Gigabit Media Independent Interface
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
SW
Software
T-CONT
Traffic Container
TC
Transmission Convergence Layer
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TDMA
Time Division Multiple Access
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
ToS
Type of Service
TP
Termination Point
TV
Television
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UNI
User Network Interface
UPC
Ultra Polished Connector
US
Upstream
VCC
Virtual Cross Connection
Id:0900d80580240c85
Abbreviations
271
Abbreviations Operation Manual CLI
VDE
Association for Electrical, Electronic & Information Technologies
VDSL
Very High Speed Digital Subscriber Line
VID
VLAN ID
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VoD
Video on Demand
VoIP
Voice over IP
VR
Virtual Router
VRF
Virtual Routing and Forwarding
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ
Weighted Fair Queuing
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection/Discard
WRR
Weighted Round Robin Queuing
XFP
Optical Form-Factor Pluggable
xTU
xDSL Transmission Unit (xTU-C -> central office side, xTU-R -> remote side)
272 Id:0900d80580240c85
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement